Document:

Office Lease

 Exhibit 10.20 
  
 OFFICE LEASE 
  
 BETWEEN 
  
 TRANSWESTERN GREAT LAKES, L.P., AS LANDLORD 
  
 AND 
  
 PROQUEST COMPANY, AS TENANT 
  
 777 EISENHOWER
PLAZA—PHASE II 
  
 789 EAST EISENHOWER PARKWAY

  
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 
  

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
  

					
	 	  	 	  	PAGE

			
	1.	  	DEFINITIONS	  	l
			
	2.	  	LEASE GRANT/POSSESSION	  	9
			
	3.	  	USE	  	9
			
	4.	  	RENT	  	10
			
	5.	  	REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF LANDLORD; CONDITIONS TO EFFECTIVENESS OF LEASE	  	10
			
	6.	  	SERVICES TO BE FURNISHED BY LANDLORD	  	12
			
	7.	  	LEASEHOLD IMPROVEMENTS; TENANT’S PROPERTY	  	13
			
	8.	  	SIGNAGE	  	13
			
	9.	  	MAINTENANCE, REPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS	  	14
			
	10.	  	USE OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES BY TENANT	  	15
			
	11.	  	ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING	  	15
			
	12.	  	CONSTRUCTION LIENS	  	17
			
	13.	  	INSURANCE	  	17
			
	14.	  	INDEMNITY	  	19
			
	15.	  	DAMAGES FROM CERTAIN CAUSES	  	19
			
	16.	  	CASUALTY DAMAGE	  	19
			
	17.	  	CONDEMNATION	  	20
			
	18.	  	EVENTS OF DEFAULT	  	20
			
	19.	  	REMEDIES	  	21
			
	20.	  	NO WAIVER	  	24
			
	21.	  	PEACEFUL ENJOYMENT	  	24
			
	22.	  	SUBSTITUTION	  	24

  

					
	 	  	 	  	PAGE

			
	23.	  	HOLDING OVER	  	25
			
	24.	  	SUBORDINATION TO MORTGAGE; ESTOPPEL CERTIFICATE	  	25
			
	25.	  	NOTICE	  	25
			
	26.	  	SURRENDER OF PREMISES	  	26
			
	27.	  	RIGHTS RESERVED TO LANDLORD	  	26
			
	28.	  	ROOF USAGE	  	26
			
	29.	  	ON-SITE AMENITIES	  	27
			
	30.	  	MISCELLANEOUS	  	27
			
	31.	  	NO OFFER	  	29
			
	32.	  	ENTIRE AGREEMENT	  	29
			
	33.	  	LIMITATION OF LIABILITY	  	29

  

	
	 EXHIBIT A-1-OUTLINE AND LOCATION OF PREMISES

	 EXHIBIT A-2-LEGAL DESCRIPTION OF PHASE II LAND

	 EXHIBIT A-3-LEGAL DESCRIPTION OF PHASE I LAND

	 EXHIBIT B-RULES AND REGULATIONS

	 EXHIBIT C-PAYMENT OF BASIC COSTS

	 EXHIBIT D-WORK LETTER

	 EXHIBIT E-ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS

	 EXHIBIT F-COMMENCEMENT LETTER

  

 ii 

 OFFICE LEASE 
  
 This Office Lease (the “Lease”) is made and entered into on the 10th day of November, 2004, between TRANSWESTERN GREAT LAKES, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership (“Landlord”), and PROQUEST
COMPANY, a Delaware corporation (“Tenant”). 
  
 W I T N E S S E T H: 
  
 1. Definitions. The following are definitions of some of the defined terms used in this Lease. The definition of other defined terms are
found throughout this Lease. 
  
 A.
“Additional Rent” shall mean Tenant’s Pro Rata Share of Basic Costs (hereinafter defined) and Tenant’s Pro Rata Share of Taxes (hereinafter defined) and any other sums (exclusive of Base Rent) that are required to be paid
to Landlord by Tenant hereunder, which sums are deemed to be Additional Rent under this Lease. 
  
 B. “Base Rent”: Base Rent shall be paid in equal monthly installments of the Annual Base Rent identified
below, in accordance with and subject to Section 4 of this Lease according to the following schedule (the Periods running from and after the Commencement Date): 
  

										
	 PERIOD

	  	ANNUAL BASE RENT
PER R.S.F.*

	  	ANNUAL BASE
RENT*

	  	MONTHLY
INSTALLMENTS
OF BASE RENT*

	 Months 1-6
	  	$	0.00	  	$	0.00	  	$	0.00
	 Months 7-12
	  	$	18.75	  	$	2,069,418.75	  	$	172,451.56
	 Months 13-24
	  	$	19.13	  	$	2,110,807.13	  	$	175,900.59
	 Months 25-36
	  	$	19.51	  	$	2,153,023.27	  	$	179,418.61
	 Months 37-48
	  	$	19.90	  	$	2,196,083.73	  	$	183,006.98
	 Months 49-60
	  	$	20.30	  	$	2,240,005.41	  	$	186,667.12
	 Months 61-72
	  	$	20.70	  	$	2,284,805.52	  	$	190,400.46
	 Months 73-84
	  	$	21.12	  	$	2,330,501.63	  	$	194,208.47
	 Months 85-96
	  	$	21.54	  	$	2,377,111.66	  	$	198,092.64
	 Months 97-108
	  	$	21.97	  	$	2,424,653.89	  	$	202,054.49
	 Months 109-120
	  	$	22.41	  	$	2,473,146.97	  	$	206,095.58

  

										
	 PERIOD

	  	ANNUAL BASE RENT
PER R.S.F.*

	  	ANNUAL BASE
RENT*

	  	MONTHLY
INSTALLMENTS
OF BASE RENT*

	 Months 121-132
	  	$	22.86	  	$	2,522,609.91	  	$	210,217.49
	 Months 133-144
	  	$	23.31	  	$	2,573,062.11	  	$	214,421.84
	 Months 145-156
	  	$	23.78	  	$	2,624,523.35	  	$	218,710.28
	 Months 157-168
	  	$	24.26	  	$	2,677,013.82	  	$	223,084.48
	 Months 169-180
	  	$	24.74	  	$	2,730,554.09	  	$	227,546.17

  

	*	The Base Rent payable under this Lease is premised on Landlord’s assumption that the Phase II Project Costs shall be at least $20,000,000.00. Landlord assumes all risk that the
Phase II Project Costs may exceed that amount. If the Phase II Project Costs are less than $20,000,000.00, the foregoing schedule of Base Rent is subject to adjustment in accordance with Paragraph 12 of the Work Letter. 

  
 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this
Lease, Tenant shall be entitled to free Base Rent during the first six (6) months of the Lease Term (the “Free Rent Period”); provided however Tenant shall remain responsible for Additional Rent and electricity service to the
Premises during the Free Rent Period. 
  
 C.
“Basic Costs” is defined in Exhibit C attached hereto. 
  
 D. “Broker” shall mean Transwestern Commercial Services, an affiliate of Landlord. Landlord shall be solely responsible
for any and all commissions and/or fees of any nature payable to Broker in connection with this Lease and the Phase II Lease. 
  
 E. “Building” shall mean the new office building to be constructed by Landlord on the Phase II Land, and having a street
address of 789 Eisenhower Parkway, Ann Arbor, Michigan. 
  
 F. “Business Day(s)” shall mean Mondays through Fridays exclusive of the normal business holidays. 
  
 G. “City” shall mean the City of Ann Arbor, Michigan. 
  
 H. “Commencement Date” shall mean the date which is thirty (30) days following the date on
which the Premises have been (i) Substantially Completed in accordance with the Work Letter, and (ii) delivered to Tenant for Tenant’s installation of Tenant’s Property (including without limitation installation of fixtures, equipment and
furniture); provided, however, that if Tenant Delays (as defined in the Work Letter) occur, the Commencement Date shall mean the date which is thirty (30) days following the date 

  

 2 

 
on which the Premises would have been Substantially Completed and delivered to the Premises had such Tenant Delay(s) not have occurred. 
  
 I. “Common Areas” shall mean shall mean all
areas within the Building and the Property that are available for the common use of tenants of the Building and that are not leased or held for the exclusive use of Tenant or other tenants of the Building, including, but not limited to, parking
areas, the Parking Deck, driveways, sidewalks, loading areas, access roads, corridors, elevators, stairwells, landscaping and planted areas. Tenant shall have the nonexclusive right to use the Common Areas for the purposes intended, subject to such
reasonable rules and regulations as Landlord may establish and uniformly impose upon all Building tenants from time to time. Landlord shall not permanently alter or change any or all of the size, location, nature or use of any of the Common Areas if
such change might have a material adverse affect on Tenant’s use, occupancy or enjoyment of the Premises or access to the Premises, the Building and/or the Property. 
  
 J. “Default Rate” shall mean the lower of (i) six percent (6%) in excess of the Prime Rate
published from time to time by the Wall Street Journal (or any successor to such index), or (ii) the highest rate of interest from time-to-time permitted under applicable federal and state law. 
  
 K. “Early Termination” shall mean and refer
to Tenant’s one-time right to terminate the Lease Term at the end of the eleventh (11th) Lease Year, provided
that Tenant shall have no uncured Event of Default at the time of its election. Tenant may (but shall not be required to) exercise its right to Early Termination by giving notice of such exercise to Landlord not less than eighteen (18) months, and
paying the Termination Fee not less than thirty (30) days, prior to the expiration of the eleventh (11th) Lease
Year. 
  
 L. “Early Termination Fee”
shall mean the sum of (i) an amount equal to $35.71 per rentable square foot in the Premises, plus (ii) an amount equal to $8.80 per square foot in the Lower Level Space usable by Tenant as permitted by the City, payable by Tenant to Landlord as
full and complete consideration for the Early Termination of this Lease. 
  
 M. “Expiration Date” shall mean the last day of the Lease Term (subject to Early Termination and including any Extension Term(s)). Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Expiration Date, as determined
herein, does not occur on the last day of a calendar month, the Lease Term and the last Lease Year thereof shall be extended by the number of days necessary to cause the Expiration Date to occur on the last day of the last calendar month of the
Lease Term. Tenant shall pay Base Rent and Additional Rent for such additional days at the same rate payable for the portion of the last calendar month immediately preceding such extension. Upon the determination of the actual Commencement Date and
the actual Expiration Date, Landlord and Tenant shall each execute and deliver a Commencement Letter in the form of Exhibit F attached hereto. 
  
 N. “Extension Term” is defined in Paragraph 2 of Exhibit E. 
  

 3 

 O. “Lease Term” shall commence on the Commencement Date, and shall
expire (unless extended pursuant to Paragraph 2 of Exhibit E) one hundred eighty (180) months thereafter, subject to Tenant’s termination rights under Section 5 of this Lease. 
  
 P. “Lease Year” shall mean each twelve (12)
month period commencing on the Commencement Date, and on each anniversary of the Commencement Date (or portion thereof ending on the Expiration Date). 
  
 Q. “Leasehold Improvements” shall mean all fixtures, equipment, improvements and appurtenances attached to, or built
into, the Premises at the commencement of or during the Lease Term, whether or not by, or at the expense of, Tenant. 
  
 R. “Lower Level Space” shall mean that certain space consisting of approximately 15,000 usable square feet in the lower
level of the Building, which shall be made available to Tenant, if and to the extent permitted, for Tenant’s exclusive use for the purposes of (i) a cafeteria, (ii) meeting space, (iii) laboratory space, and (iv) exercise facility. The terms
and conditions for the lease of the Lower Level Space are more fully described in Paragraph 3 of Exhibit E. 
  
 S. “MEDC” shall mean the Michigan Economic Development Corporation. 
  
 T. “Normal Business Hours” for the Building
shall mean 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Mondays through Fridays, and 8:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. on Saturdays, exclusive of holidays. 
  
 U. “Notice Addresses” shall mean the following addresses for Tenant and Landlord, respectively: 
  
 Tenant: 
  
 Before the Commencement Date of the Phase I Lease: 
  
 ProQuest Company 
 300 North Zeeb Road 
 Ann Arbor, Michigan 48103 
 Attn: Chief Financial Officer 
  
 With copy to: 
  
 James C. Adams, Esq. 
 Dykema Gossett PLLC 
 400 Renaissance Center

 Detroit, Michigan 48243 
  

 4 

 After the Commencement Date of the Phase I Lease: 
  
 ProQuest Company 
 777 Eisenhower Parkway 
 Ann Arbor, Michigan
48108 
 Attn: Chief Financial Officer 
  
 With a copy of any default notices to: 
  
 James C. Adams, Esq. 
 Dykema Gossett PLLC

 400 Renaissance Center 
 Detroit, Michigan 48243 
  
 Landlord: 
  
 Transwestern Commercial Services 
 777 Eisenhower Parkway 
 Ann Arbor, Michigan
48108 
 Attn: Property Manager 
  
 with a copy to: 
  
 Transwestern Investment Company 
 150 North
Wacker Drive, Suite 800 
 Chicago, IL 60606 
 Attn: Owner’s Representative 
  
 and to: 
  
 Drane, Freyer and Lapins 
 150 North Wacker Drive, 8th Floor 
 Chicago,
IL 60606 
 Attn: Wendy Freyer, Esq. 
  
 Payments of Rent only shall be made payable to the order of Transwestern 789 Eisenhower Plaza, at the following address: 
  
 Transwestern Commercial Services 
 777 Eisenhower Parkway 
 Ann Arbor, Michigan
48108 
 Attn: Property Manager 
  
 or such other name and address as Landlord shall, from time to time, designate. 
  
 V. “Parking Deck” shall mean and refer to the approximately 700 space parking garage to be
constructed by Landlord on the Phase II Land in accordance with the 

  

 5 

 
Work Letter, for Tenant’s non-exclusive use under this Lease, except as otherwise provided herein. 
  
 W. “Permitted Use” shall mean general
office use, any other office use related to or a part of Tenant’s business, and any related and incidental uses thereto. 
  
 X. “Phase I Building” means the existing office building commonly known as 777 Eisenhower Parkway, Ann Arbor, Michigan,
and located on the Phase I Land, with office space to be leased to Tenant pursuant to the Phase I Lease. 
  
 Y. “Phase I Land” means that certain parcel of land owned by Landlord, adjacent to the Property and more particularly
described on Exhibit A-3 to this Lease. 
  
 Z. “Phase I Lease” means the Lease of even date herewith between Landlord and Tenant, covering the Phase I Building and the Phase I Land. 
  
 AA. “Phase II Land” means that certain parcel of land owned by Landlord, upon which the
Building and Parking Deck will be constructed, and more particularly described on Exhibit A-2 to this Lease. 
  
 BB. “Phase II Project Costs” shall mean hard and soft costs actually incurred by Landlord in the site development of the
Phase II Land and construction of the Building (for purposes hereof being only the “Base Building Work” as set forth in the Work Letter, and exclusive of the “Landlord’s Work” as defined in the Work Letter), Parking Deck,
water detention areas, and connector to the Phase I Building, and in particular shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 
  

	 	(1)	Construction costs pursuant to approved contracts, including labor and materials, and including fees to third party, non-affiliated construction manager/contractors;

  

	 	(2)	Site improvement work to the Phase II Land, and the Phase I Land to the extent necessary for the development; 

  

	 	(3)	All modifications and/or additions to surface parking on the Phase I Land and the Phase II Land; 

  

	 	(4)	All soft costs including, but not limited to, construction period interest and other financing costs, construction period taxes, legal or accounting fees, leasing commissions, and
any development fee to Landlord or any affiliate of Landlord; 

  

	 	(5)	Third party, non-affiliated architects’ fees, space planners’s fees and engineers’ fees; 

  

	 	(6)	On-site utility installation costs, and off-site utility installation costs to the extent necessary to the construction and operation of the Building; and 

 

 6 

	 	(7)	Fees and costs for building permits and governmental approvals. 

  
 The Development of the Phase II Land and construction of the Building and Parking Deck shall be undertaken and performed by Landlord on an “open
book” basis, and Tenant, its architects, attorneys, accountants and other consultants shall have full and unimpeded rights (with cooperation and assistance by Landlord) to review and audit Landlord’s Phase II Project Costs and back-up
documentation therefor at all times. 
  
 CC.
“Premises” shall mean all the interior space within the Building and outlined on Exhibit A-1 to this Lease, including without limitation all lobby areas, all corridors and restroom facilities located within the Building, and
including the exclusive use of the 37 car enclosed parking area within the lower level of the Building. 
  
 DD. “Property” shall mean the Building, the Parking Deck, the Phase II Land and all other improvements located on such
land. The parties acknowledge that Landlord also owns the Phase I Land (defined above), upon which the Phase I Building is located and which the parties anticipate Tenant will lease pursuant to the Phase I Lease. 
  
 EE. “Rentable Area in the Building” shall
mean 110,369 square feet. Tenant and Landlord shall each have the right, within 90 days after the Commencement Date, to have the rentable square footage of the Building measured by a licensed architect, and verified by the other party, which
measurement shall be made pursuant to BOMA standards, provided however, the vertical penetration on the second floor of the Building for the purpose of creating a two-story atrium lobby shall not be subtracted from the calculation of the rentable
square footage of the Building. In addition, the calculation of the rentable square footage of the Building shall not include the Lower Level Space, but shall be comprised of the main floors of the Building and Common Areas in the Building. The
measurement as determined by such architect, and verified by the other party, shall be substituted for the foregoing amount, and those items under this Lease measured with reference to the Rentable Area in the Building, including the Tenant’s
Pro-Rata Share, shall be adjusted accordingly. 
  
 FF. “Rentable Area in the Premises” shall mean 110,369 square feet. Tenant and Landlord shall each have the right, within 90 days after the Commencement Date, to have the rentable square footage of the Premises measured by
a licensed architect, and verified by the other party, which measurement shall be made pursuant to BOMA standards, provided however, the vertical penetration on the second floor of the Building for the purpose of creating a two-story atrium lobby
shall not be subtracted from the calculation of the rentable square footage of the Premises. In addition, the calculation of the rentable square footage of the Premises shall not include the Lower Level Space, but shall be comprised of the main
floors of the Building and Common Areas in the Building. If the rentable square footage of the Premises as so measured and verified differs from the foregoing amounts, the measurement as determined by such architect shall be substituted for the
foregoing amount(s), and the Base Rent (and any other charge under this Lease measured on a square footage basis or dependent upon the square footage of the Premises) and Tenant’s Pro Rata Share shall be appropriately adjusted. 
  

 7 

 GG. “State” shall mean the State of Michigan. 
  
 HH. “Substantial Completion” or
“Substantially Complete” shall mean (except as otherwise provided in the Work Letter): 
  
 (i) completion by Landlord of all construction and other work required of Landlord pursuant to this Lease or other relevant documents
between Landlord and Tenant (as to this Lease and the Work Letter) so that (A) Tenant can use the Premises, Parking Deck and all Common Areas for its intended purposes without material interference to Tenant conducting its ordinary business
activities, and (B) the only incomplete items are minor or insubstantial details of construction, mechanical adjustments, or finishing touches like touch-up plastering or painting; 
  
 (ii) the Building, Parking Deck, Premises and all operating and mechanical systems thereof are in good
condition and working order; 
  
 (iii) Landlord
securing a temporary or permanent certificate of occupancy from the local municipality if required for lawful occupancy by the municipality; 
  
 (iv) Tenant, its employees, agents, and invitees, have reasonable access to the Building and Premises through the lobby, entranceways,
elevators, loading docks, sidings and hallways; 
  
 (v) all tenant improvements, decorations, fixtures, and equipment, if any, to be installed by Landlord pursuant to the Work Letter are installed and in good operating order to Tenant’s reasonable satisfaction; and 
  
 (vi) the Premises (or the relevant portions thereof being
delivered) are broom clean. 
  
 II.
“Target Commencement Date” shall mean February 1, 2006. 
  
 JJ. “Taxes” is defined in Exhibit C attached hereto. 
  
 KK. “Tenant’s Pro Rata Share” shall mean One Hundred Percent (100%). 
  
 LL. “Tenant’s Property” shall mean all
unattached and moveable partitions, trade fixtures, moveable equipment or furniture located in the Premises and acquired by or for the account of Tenant, without expense to Landlord, which can be removed without structural damage to the Building or
Premises, and all personalty brought into the Premises by Tenant. 
  
 MM. “Work Letter” is attached as Exhibit D and incorporated by reference herein. 
  

 8 

 2. Lease Grant/Possession. 
  
 A. Subject to and upon the terms herein set forth, Landlord leases to Tenant and Tenant leases from Landlord
the Premises, together with the right, in common with others, to use the Common Areas. Subject in all respects to the obligations of Landlord under the Work Letter and as otherwise set forth in this Lease, by taking possession of the Premises,
Tenant is deemed to have accepted the Premises and agreed that the Premises is in good order and satisfactory condition. 
  
 B. The Lease Term shall commence on the Commencement Date and shall end on the Expiration Date, subject to (i) Tenant’s exercise of
one or more Extension Term, (ii) Tenant’s rights to terminate as set forth in Paragraph 5, below; (iii) Tenant’s one-time right of Early Termination, exercisable at the time and as set forth in the definition of Early Termination, above,
and subject to Tenant’s payment of the Early Termination Fee; and (iv) the rights of the parties to termination of this Lease for any other reason set forth herein. 
  
 C. Landlord shall deliver possession of the Premises to Tenant no later than upon Substantial Completion
(and earlier if practicable) of Landlord’s Work pursuant to the Work Letter, for the purpose of performing any improvements therein or installing Tenant’s Property, and such possession shall be subject to all of the terms and conditions of
this Lease, except that Tenant shall not be required to pay Base Rent or Additional Rent with respect to the period of time prior to the Commencement Date during which Tenant performs such work. Tenant shall, however, be liable for the reasonable
cost of electricity provided to Tenant during the period of Tenant’s possession prior to the Commencement Date. 
  
 3. Use. The Premises shall be used for the Permitted Use and for no other purpose. Tenant agrees not to use or permit the use of the
Premises for any purpose which is illegal or dangerous, which creates a nuisance or which would increase the cost of insurance coverage with respect to the Building. Tenant will conduct its business and control its agents, servants, employees,
customers, licensees, and invitees in such a manner as not to interfere with or disturb other tenants or Landlord in the management of the Property. Tenant will maintain the Premises in a clean and healthful condition, and comply with all laws,
ordinances, orders, rules and regulations of any governmental entity with reference to the use, condition, configuration or occupancy of the Premises. Tenant shall not, and shall not allow its employees, agents, contractors or invitees, to bring
into the Building or the Premises any dangerous or hazardous materials, except for customary office and cleaning supplies, provided Tenant uses, stores and disposes of the same in compliance with all applicable law. Tenant, at its expense, will
comply with the rules and regulations of the Building attached hereto as Exhibit B and such other rules and regulations adopted and altered by Landlord and uniformly applied to all tenants from time-to-time and will cause all of its agents,
employees, invitees and visitors to do so. All such changes to rules and regulations will be reasonable and shall be sent by Landlord to Tenant in writing. In the event of a conflict between the rules and regulations and the terms of this Lease, the
terms of this Lease shall control. Landlord shall not knowingly enforce the rules and regulations against Tenant in a discriminatory manner. 
  

 9 

 4. Rent. 
  
 A. Tenant covenants to pay to Landlord during the Lease Term, without any setoff or deduction except as
otherwise expressly provided herein, the full amount of all Base Rent and Additional Rent due hereunder and the full amount of all such other sums of money as shall become due under this Lease, all of which hereinafter may be collectively called
“Rent.” In addition, Tenant shall pay, as Additional Rent, all rent, sales and use taxes or other similar taxes, if any, levied or imposed by any city, state, county or other governmental body having authority, such payments to be
in addition to all other payments required to be paid to Landlord by Tenant under this Lease. Such payments shall be paid concurrently with the payments of the Rent on which the tax is based. Base Rent and Additional Rent for each calendar year or
portion thereof during the Lease Term, shall be due and payable in advance in monthly installments on the first day of each calendar month during the Lease Term, without demand. If the Lease Term commences on a day other than the first day of a
month or terminates on a day other than the last day of a month, then the installments of Base Rent (if any) and Additional Rent (if any) for such month or months shall be prorated, based on the number of days in such month. All amounts received by
Landlord from Tenant hereunder shall be applied first to the earliest accrued and unpaid Rent then outstanding. Tenant’s covenant to pay Rent shall be independent of every other covenant set forth in this Lease. 
  
 B. If Tenant fails to pay any installment of Base Rent and
Additional Rent or any other item of Rent within ten (10) days after the same becomes due and payable hereunder, a “Late Charge” equal to five percent (5%) of such unpaid amount will be due and payable with the next installment of
Base Rent by Tenant to Landlord. 
  
 C. The
Additional Rent payable hereunder shall be adjusted from time-to-time in accordance with the provisions of Exhibit C attached hereto. 
  
 5. Representations and Warranties of Landlord; Conditions to Effectiveness of Lease. 
  
 A. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein
or in the Phase I Lease, if and in the event (i) foundation installation work of the Building is not commenced on or before January 1, 2005 (the “Foundation Commencement Date”) for reasons other than (a) Delays (as defined in the Work
Letter) by Tenant, or (b) Force Majeure (as defined in Section 30.D); or (ii) Tenant delivers notice to Landlord that Landlord is not diligently and continuously proceeding to complete the development and construction of the Building and all other
improvements related thereto, unless Landlord provides Tenant with evidence within fifteen (15) days thereafter that it will still be able to meet the schedule previously provided to Tenant; or (iii) Landlord fails to Substantially Complete and
deliver occupancy of the Building to Tenant on or before July 31, 2006 in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Lease for reasons other than delays solely attributable to the act or failure to act of Tenant in violation of Tenant’s
obligations (if any) under this Lease; or (iv) Landlord defaults under any other provision of this Lease prior to the Commencement Date, then Tenant may elect, at its sole option, to terminate this Lease and the Phase I 

  

 10 

 
Lease within thirty (30) days after the date of such occurrence, in which event this Lease and the Phase I Lease shall terminate and be of no further force
or effect. 
  
 B. Landlord hereby represents and
warrants to Tenant that Landlord has adequate funds from its own resources and from binding, irrevocable commitments from financial institutions, to fully fund the development and construction of the Building and all other construction and related
costs included within the definition of the Phase II Project Costs. Landlord hereby agrees to maintain financial responsibility for the completion of Phase II Project Costs, and such responsibility shall not be terminated by the transfer of title to
the Building as provided in this Lease, notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained within this Lease. 
  
 C. The effectiveness of this Lease and the obligations of Tenant hereunder are subject to the execution and effectiveness of the Phase I
Lease by Landlord and Tenant. 
  
 D. The
effectiveness of this Lease and the obligations of Tenant hereunder are subject to the establishment of an industrial development district for the Property by the City and the City’s grant of tax abatement and issuance of a tax exemption
certificate for personal and real property taxes in amounts and on terms and conditions satisfactory to Tenant in its sole discretion. If such grants by the City are not received by November 23, 2004, then Tenant, at its option, may terminate this
Lease by written notice received by Landlord within five (5) days following such date, in which event (i) this Lease shall terminate and be of no further force or effect, and (ii) Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all Phase II Project Costs paid
or incurred through the date of termination, as well as all similar costs incurred relative to the Phase I Lease, and the tenant improvement work required thereby, such payment to be made within twenty (20) days after Tenant’s receipt of
written request therefore. Tenant’s obligation to make such payment shall survive the termination of this Lease. 
  
 E. The effectiveness of this Lease and the obligations of Tenant hereunder are subject to the receipt by Tenant of other incentives and
inducements from the State of Michigan and other governmental entities contemplated by Tenant and sufficient in Tenant’s judgment to establish the financial feasibility of Tenant’s relocation to the premises under the Phase I Lease and the
Building as its executive headquarters building. If such incentives or inducements are not received by November 23, 2004, then Tenant, at its option, may terminate this Lease by written notice received by Landlord within five (5) days following such
date, in which event (i) this Lease shall terminate and be of no further force or effect, and (ii) Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all Phase II Project Costs paid or incurred through the date of termination, as well as all similar costs incurred
relative to the Phase I Lease, and the tenant improvement work required thereby, such payment to be made within twenty (20) days after Tenant’s receipt of written request therefore. Tenant’s obligation to make such payment shall survive
the termination of this Lease. 
  

 11 

 6. Services to be Furnished by Landlord. 
  
 A. Landlord shall furnish the following services: (i)
heating, ventilating and air conditioning during Normal Business Hours to provide a temperature condition required for comfortable occupancy of the Premises under normal business operations; (ii) at all times hot and cold water for restrooms located
in the Building and refrigerated water for drinking fountains located in the Building, and at Tenant’s request and reasonable expense, hot and cold water for kitchen areas within the Premises; (iii) janitorial service in the Premises and Common
Areas (including cleaning of all floors—wet mop or dry sweep—, vacuuming of carpets, emptying wastebaskets, and cleaning restrooms) on Business Days; (iv) electricity to the Premises for general office use, in accordance with and subject
to the terms and conditions of Section 10 of this Lease; (v) passenger elevator service, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week; and freight elevator service on Business Days, upon request of Tenant and subject to scheduling and charges by Landlord; (vi)
on-site trash dumpster and at least weekly trash removal; (vii) snowplowing and ice removal services for the parking lot, driveways and sidewalks located on the Property, Monday through Saturday (excluding legal holidays); (viii) maintaining the
Parking Deck and all interior and exterior Common Areas, including elevators and stairwells, in a safe, lawful, clean and neat, and in good operating, condition; and (ix) wash Building windows at intervals reasonably established by Landlord.

  
 B. If Tenant requests any other utilities or
building services in addition to those identified in Section 6A, or any of the above utilities or building services in frequency, scope, quality or quantities substantially greater than the standards set by Landlord for the Building, then Landlord
shall use reasonable efforts to attempt to furnish Tenant with such additional utilities or building services. Landlord may impose a reasonable charge for such additional utilities or building services, which shall be paid monthly by Tenant as
Additional Rent on the same day that the monthly installment of Base Rent is due. 
  
 C. Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, the failure by Landlord to any extent to furnish, or the interruption or termination of
utilities and Building services identified in Section 6A in whole or in part, resulting from adherence to laws, regulations and administrative orders, wear, use, repairs, improvements, alterations or any causes shall not render Landlord liable in
any respect nor be construed as an actual or constructive eviction of Tenant, nor give rise to an abatement of Rent, nor relieve Tenant from the obligation to fulfill any covenant or agreement hereof. 
  
 D. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in
this Section 6, if: (i) Landlord ceases to furnish any service in the Building for a period in excess of five (5) consecutive Business Days (or five (5) or more Business Days in any ten (10) Business Day period) after Tenant notifies Landlord of
such cessation (the “Interruption Notice”); (ii) such cessation does not arise as a result of an act or omission of Tenant; (iii) such cessation is not caused by a fire or other casualty (in which case Section 16 shall
control); (iv) the restoration of such service is reasonably within the control of Landlord; and (v) as a result of such cessation, the Premises or a material portion thereof, is rendered reasonably unusable for Tenant’s ordinary business
operations, and Tenant in fact ceases to use the 

  

 12 

 
Premises, or the material portion thereof, then Tenant, as its sole remedy, shall be entitled to receive an abatement of Base Rent payable hereunder during
the period for the period and duration of such cessation and ending on the day when the service in question has been restored. In the event the entire Premises has not been rendered untenantable by the cessation in service, the amount of abatement
that Tenant is entitled to receive shall be prorated based upon the percentage of the Premises so rendered untenantable and not used by Tenant. 
  
 7. Leasehold Improvements; Tenant’s Property. Unless otherwise mutually agreed to by Landlord and Tenant at the time of
installation, all Leasehold Improvements, shall be and remain a part of the Premises; shall be the property of Landlord; and shall not be removed by Tenant except as expressly provided herein. All Tenant’s Property shall be owned and insured by
Tenant. Upon the termination of the Lease Term or the sooner termination of Tenant’s right to possession of the Premises, Tenant shall remove Tenant’s Property, all electronic, phone and data cabling exclusively serving the Premises
(whether such cabling is located within or outside of the Premises). Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, repair any damage caused by such removal and perform such other work as is reasonably necessary to restore the Premises to a “move
in” condition. If Tenant fails to remove any of the foregoing items or to perform any required repairs and restoration, (i) Landlord, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, may remove the same (and repair any damage occasioned thereby) and
dispose thereof or deliver such items to any other place of business of Tenant, or warehouse the same, and Tenant shall pay the cost of such removal, repair, delivery, or warehousing of such items within twenty (20) days after demand from Landlord,
and (ii) such failure shall be deemed a holding over by Tenant under Section 23 hereof until such failure is rectified by Tenant or Landlord. 
  
 8. Signage. Tenant will have the right to place any and all interior signage of its own design and selection within the Premises,
subject to Landlord’s prior approval (which shall not be unreasonably withheld). Tenant will also have the right to place its name on any monument signage that Landlord erects for the Building, in a style satisfactory to Landlord and Tenant and
of a scale and visibility of equal or greater prominence than any other Building tenant. 
  
 For so long as Tenant leases and occupies the entire Building, Tenant shall have the right to have its name placed on the exterior of the Building (the “Building Sign”). Tenant shall make certain that the
Building Sign is at all times in compliance with all applicable laws, and shall also be subject to the approval of Landlord with respect to size, location, design and content, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. Tenant may not modify
the size, design or content of the Building Sign without the prior written approval of Landlord which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. The costs associated with obtaining the necessary governmental approvals and permitting, and for
designing, producing, installing, maintaining and removing the Building Sign shall be borne by Tenant. Tenant shall bear the cost of illuminating the Building Sign and all costs of operating and maintaining said illumination (including bulbs and
ballasts) (“Lighting Costs”). If any Lighting Cost is invoiced to Landlord, such cost shall become additional Rent due from Tenant upon invoice therefore from Landlord. Upon the expiration or termination of this Lease, termination of
Tenant’s right of possession of the Premises or termination of Tenant’s right to maintain the Building Sign provided in this section, Tenant (at its expense but performed by a 

  

 13 

 
contractor selected by Landlord) shall remove such Building signage, and shall repair and restore any damage caused by such removal. 
  
 9. Maintenance, Repairs and Alterations. 
  
 A. Except to the extent such obligations are imposed upon
Landlord hereunder, Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, maintain the interior of the Premises in good order, condition and repair throughout the entire Lease Term, ordinary wear and tear excepted. Tenant agrees to keep the areas visible from
outside the Premises in a neat, clean and attractive condition at all times. Tenant shall, within thirty (30) days after Landlord’s written demand therefor, reimburse Landlord for the cost of all repairs, replacements and alterations
(collectively, “Repairs”) in and to the Premises, Building and Property and the facilities and systems thereof, plus an administration charge often percent (10%) of such cost, the need for which Repairs arises out of (and provided
Landlord has given prior written notice to Tenant of such need): (1) Tenant’s use of the Premises in contravention of the terms and conditions of this Lease, or Tenant’s failure to perform maintenance or repairs which are Tenant’s
obligation hereunder, (2) the installation, removal, use or operation of Tenant’s Property, if undertaken by Landlord at Tenant’s request or by virtue of Tenant’s default in undertaking such obligations, (3) the moving of
Tenant’s Property into or out of the Building, or (4) the act, omission, misuse or negligence of Tenant, its agents, contractors, employees or invitees. 
  

B. Tenant shall not make or allow to be made any alterations, additions or improvements to the Premises (collectively,
“Alterations”), without first obtaining the written consent of Landlord, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed; provided however, Tenant shall have the right to perform, without Landlord’s consent, certain
Alterations that do not cost in excess of $25,000.00 in the aggregate (at any one time), and do not affect any mechanical or electrical or life safety systems or plumbing in the Building, provided that advance notice has been given to Landlord in
each instance. Landlord reserves the right to require Tenant to remove at the end of the Lease Term any Alterations installed without the Landlord’s consent. Prior to commencing any such Alterations and as a condition to obtaining
Landlord’s consent where necessary, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord plans and specifications acceptable to Landlord; names and addresses of contractors reasonably acceptable to Landlord; copies of contracts; necessary permits and approvals;
evidence of contractor’s and subcontractor’s insurance in accordance with Section 13 hereof; and a payment bond or other security, all in form and amount satisfactory to Landlord. Tenant shall be responsible for insuring that all such
persons procure and maintain insurance coverage against such risks, in such amounts and with such companies as Landlord may reasonably require. All Alterations shall be constructed in a good and workmanlike manner using Building standard materials
or other new materials of equal or greater quality. Landlord, to the extent reasonably necessary to avoid any disruption to the tenants and occupants of the Building, shall have the right to designate the time when any Alterations may be performed
and to otherwise designate reasonable rules, regulations and procedures for the performance of work in the Building. Upon completion of the Alterations, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord “as-built” plans, contractor’s affidavits and
full and final waivers of lien and receipted bills covering all labor and materials. All 

  

 14 

 
Alterations shall comply with the insurance requirements and with applicable codes, ordinances, laws and regulations. Tenant shall reimburse Landlord upon
demand for all reasonable sums, if any, expended by Landlord for third party examination of the architectural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing plans for any Alterations. In addition, if Landlord so requests, Landlord shall be entitled to oversee
the construction of any Alterations, and in such event, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for Landlord’s actual out of pocket costs incurred in connection therewith, which may include the cost of management personnel working outside of Normal
Business Hours. Landlord’s approval of Tenant’s plans and specifications for any Alterations performed for or on behalf of Tenant shall not be deemed to be representation by Landlord that such plans and specifications comply with
applicable insurance requirements, building codes, ordinances, laws or, regulations or that the Alterations constructed in accordance with such plans and specifications will be adequate for Tenant’s use. 
  
 10. Use of Electrical Services by Tenant. All electricity used
by Tenant in the Premises shall, at Landlord’s option, be paid for by Tenant by (i) a separate charge or charges billed by the utility company providing electrical service and payable by Tenant directly to such utilities company, or (ii) a
separate charge billed directly to Tenant by Landlord and payable by Tenant as additional rent. Such charge shall be based upon the electric current consumed on the Premises during the Lease Term, the rates, terms and conditions for comparable
service to Tenant directly from The Detroit Edison Company under like conditions, all as determined by an independent meter reader. Landlord shall have the right at any time and from time-to-time during the Lease Term to contract for electricity
service from such providers of such services as Landlord shall elect (each being an “Electric Service Provider”). Tenant shall cooperate with Landlord, and the applicable Electric Service Provider, at all times and, as reasonably
necessary, shall allow Landlord and such Electric Service Provider reasonable access to the Building’s electric lines, feeders, risers, wiring, and any other machinery within the Premises. Tenant’s use of electrical services furnished by
Landlord shall not exceed in voltage, rated capacity, or overall load that which is standard for the Building. In the event Tenant shall request that it be allowed to consume electrical services in excess of Building standard, Landlord may refuse to
consent to such usage or may consent upon such conditions as Landlord reasonably elects, and all such additional usage shall be paid for by Tenant as Additional Rent. Landlord, at any time during the Lease Term, shall have the right to separately
meter electrical usage for the Premises or to measure electrical usage by survey or any other method that Landlord, in its reasonable judgment, deems appropriate. 
  
 11. Assignment and Subletting. 
  
 A. Except in connection with a Permitted Transfer (defined in Section 11E below), Tenant shall not assign,
sublease, transfer or encumber any interest in this Lease or allow any third party to use any portion of the Premises (collectively or individually, a “Transfer”) without the prior written consent of Landlord, which consent shall
not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. Without limitation, it is agreed that Landlord’s consent shall not be considered unreasonably withheld if: (1) the proposed transferee’s financial condition is not adequate for the obligations such
transferee is assuming in connection with the proposed Transfer; (2) the transferee’s business or reputation is not suitable for the Building considering the business and reputation of the other tenants and the Building’s 

  

 15 

 
prestige, or would result in a violation of another tenant’s rights under its lease at the Building; (3) the transferee is a governmental agency or
occupant of the Building; (4) Tenant is in default beyond any applicable notice and cure period; or (5) Landlord or its leasing agent has received a proposal from or made a proposal to the proposed transferee to lease space in the Building within
six (6) months prior to Tenant’s delivery of written notice of the proposed Transfer to Landlord. Consent by Landlord to one or more Transfers shall not operate as a waiver of Landlord’s rights to approve any subsequent Transfers. In no
event shall any Transfer or Permitted Transfer release or relieve Tenant from any obligation under this Lease or any liability hereunder. 
  
 B. If Tenant requests Landlord’s consent to a Transfer, Tenant shall submit to Landlord (i) financial statements for the proposed
transferee, (ii) a copy of the proposed assignment or sublease, and (iii) such other information as Landlord may reasonably request. After Landlord’s receipt of the required information and documentation, Landlord shall either: (1) consent or
reasonably refuse consent to the Transfer in writing; (2) in the event of a proposed assignment of this Lease, terminate this Lease (and thereby release Tenant from any further obligations under this Lease) effective the first to occur of ninety
(90) days following written notice of such termination or the date that the proposed Transfer would have come into effect; and (3) in the event of a proposed subletting, terminate this Lease with respect to the portion of the Premises which Tenant
proposes to sublease (and thereby release Tenant from any further obligations under this Lease with respect to such sublet portion) effective the first to occur of ninety (90) days following written notice of such termination or the date the
proposed Transfer would have come into effect. Tenant shall pay Landlord a review fee of $500.00 for Landlord’s review of any Permitted Transfer or proposed Transfer. In addition, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for its actual reasonable costs
and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable attorney’s fees) incurred by Landlord in connection with Landlord’s review of such proposed Transfer or Permitted Transfer. 
  
 C. Tenant shall pay to Landlord fifty percent (50%) of all
cash and other consideration which Tenant receives as a result of a Transfer that is in excess of the rent payable to Landlord hereunder for the portion of the Premises and Lease Term covered by the Transfer within ten (10) business days following
receipt thereof by Tenant. 
  
 D. Except as
provided below with respect to a Permitted Transfer, if Tenant is a corporation, limited liability company, partnership or similar entity, and the person, persons or entity which owns or controls a majority of the voting interests at the time
changes for any reason (including but not limited to a merger, consolidation or reorganization), such change of ownership or control shall constitute a Transfer. The foregoing shall not apply so long as Tenant is an entity whose outstanding stock is
listed on a nationally recognized security exchange, or if at least eighty percent (80%) of its voting stock is owned by another entity, the voting stock of which is so listed. 
  
 E. Tenant may assign its entire interest under this Lease or sublet the Premises (i) to any entity
controlling or controlled by or under common control with Tenant or (ii) to any successor to Tenant by purchase, merger, consolidation or reorganization (hereinafter, 

  

 16 

 
collectively, referred to as “Permitted Transfer”) without the consent of Landlord, provided: (1) Tenant is not in default under this Lease;
(2) if such proposed transferee is a successor to Tenant by purchase, said proposed transferee shall acquire all or substantially all of the stock or assets of Tenant’s business or, if such proposed transferee is a successor to Tenant by
merger, consolidation or reorganization, the continuing or surviving entity shall own all or substantially all of the assets of Tenant; (3) with respect to a Permitted Transfer to a proposed transferee described in clause (ii), such proposed
transferee shall have a net worth which is at least equal to the greater of Tenant’s net worth at the date of this Lease or Tenant’s net worth as of the day prior to the proposed purchase, merger, consolidation or reorganization as
evidenced to Landlord’s reasonable satisfaction; and (4) Tenant shall give Landlord written notice at least thirty (30) days prior to the effective date of the proposed purchase, merger, consolidation or reorganization. 
  
 12. Construction Liens. Tenant will not permit any construction
liens or other similar liens to be placed upon the Property. If a lien is attached to the Property, then, in addition to any other right or remedy of Landlord, Landlord may, but shall not be obligated to, discharge the same. Any amount paid by
Landlord for any of the aforesaid purposes including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees, shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord within thirty (30) days after demand as Additional Rent. Tenant shall within thirty (30) days after
receiving such notice of lien or claim have such lien or claim released of record, or bonded over to the reasonable satisfaction of Landlord. Tenant’s failure to comply with the provisions of the foregoing sentence shall be deemed an Event of
Default entitling Landlord to exercise all of its remedies therefor without the requirement of any additional notice or cure period. 
  
 13. Insurance. 
  
 A. Landlord shall, at all times during the Lease Term, procure and maintain: (i) policies of insurance covering loss or damage to the
Property in an amount equal to the full replacement cost of the Building, including leasehold improvements in the Premises, which shall provide protection against loss by fire and other all-risk casualties including earthquake and flood and such
other property insurance as may be required by Landlord’s mortgagee or as otherwise desired by Landlord, and (ii) commercial general liability insurance applicable to the Building and the Common Areas, providing a minimum limit of $3,000,000.00
per occurrence. 
  
 B. Tenant shall procure and
maintain, at its expense, (i) all-risk (special form) property insurance in an amount equal to the full replacement cost of Tenant’s Property located in the Premises; (ii) a policy or policies of general liability and umbrella or excess
liability insurance applying to Tenant’s operations and use of the Premises, providing a minimum limit of $3,000,000.00 per occurrence and in the aggregate, naming Landlord and Landlord’s Building manager as additional insureds, (iii)
automobile liability insurance covering owned, non-owned and hired vehicles in an amount not less than a combined single limit of $1,000,000.00 per accident, and (iv) workers’ compensation insurance in accordance with the laws of the State in
which the Property is located and employer’s liability insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000.00 each accident, $1,000,000.00 disease-each employee and policy limit, with the insurance policies required under this 

  

 17 

 
clause (iv) to be endorsed to waive the insurance carriers’ right of subrogation. Tenant shall maintain the foregoing insurance coverages in effect
commencing on the earlier to occur of the Commencement Date and the date Tenant takes possession of the Premises, and continuing to the end of the Lease Term. Tenant may, at its election, provide the foregoing insurance coverage through blanket
policies covering multiple locations of Tenant’s operations, provided that the Property shall be identified by schedule or otherwise and provided further that the foregoing limits shall apply to the Premises and Tenant’s Property as
required herein. 
  
 C. The insurance
requirements set forth in this Section 13 are independent of the waiver, indemnification, and other obligations under this Lease and will not be construed or interpreted in any way to restrict, limit or modify the waiver, indemnification and other
obligations or to in any way limit any party’s liability under this Lease. In addition to the requirements set forth in Sections 13 and 14, the insurance required of Tenant under this Lease must be issued by an insurance company with a rating
of no less than A-VIII in the current Best’s Insurance Guide or that is otherwise acceptable to Landlord, and admitted to engage in the business of insurance in the state in which the Building is located; be primary insurance for all claims
under it and provide that any insurance carried by Landlord, Landlord’s Building manager, and Landlord’s lenders is strictly excess, secondary and noncontributing with any insurance carried by Tenant; and provide that insurance may not be
cancelled, nonrenewed or the subject of change in coverage of available limits of coverage, except upon thirty (30) days’ prior written notice to Landlord and Landlord’s lenders. Tenant will deliver to Landlord a legally enforceable
certificate of insurance on all policies procured by Tenant in compliance with Tenant’s obligations under this Lease on or before the date Tenant first occupies any portion of the Premises, at least ten (10) days before the expiration date of
any policy and upon the renewal of any policy. Landlord shall have the right to approve all deductibles and self-insured retentions under Tenant’s policies, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed. 

 
 D. Neither Landlord nor Tenant shall be liable (by way of
subrogation or otherwise) to the other party (or to any insurance company insuring the other party) for any loss or damage to any of the property of Landlord or Tenant, as the case may be, with respect to their respective property, the Building, the
Property or the Premises or any addition or improvements thereto, or any contents therein, to the extent covered by insurance carried or required to be carried by a party hereto even though such loss might have been occasioned by the negligence or
willful acts or omissions of the Landlord or Tenant or their respective employees, agents, contractors or invitees. Landlord and Tenant shall give each insurance company which issues policies of insurance, with respect to the items covered by this
waiver, written notice of the terms of this mutual waiver, and shall have such insurance policies properly endorsed, if necessary, to prevent the invalidation of any of the coverage provided by such insurance policies by reason of such mutual
waiver. For the purpose of the foregoing waiver, the amount of any deductible applicable to any loss or damage shall be deemed covered by, and recoverable by the insured under the insurance policy to which such deductible relates. 
  

 18 

 14. Indemnity. To the extent not expressly prohibited by law, Landlord and Tenant each (in
either case, the “Indemnitor”) agree to hold harmless and indemnify the other and the other’s agents, partners, shareholders, members, officers, directors, beneficiaries and employees (collectively, the
“Indemnitees”) from any losses, damages, judgments, claims, expenses, costs and liabilities imposed upon or incurred by or asserted against the Indemnitees, including without limitation reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses,
for death or injury to, or damage to property of, third parties, other than the Indemnitees, that may arise from the negligence or willful misconduct of Indemnitor or any of Indemnitor’s agents, members, partners or employees. Such third
parties shall not be deemed third party beneficiaries of this Lease. If any action, suit or proceeding is brought against any of the Indemnitees by reason of the negligence or willful misconduct of Indemnitor or any of Indemnitor’s agents,
contractors, members, partners or employees, then Indemnitor will, at Indemnitor’s expense and at the option of said Indemnitees, by counsel reasonably approved by said Indemnitees, resist and defend such action, suit or proceeding. In
addition, to the extent not expressly prohibited by law, Tenant agrees to hold harmless and indemnify Landlord and Landlord’s Indemnitees from any losses, damages, judgments, claims, expenses, costs and liabilities imposed upon or incurred by
or asserted against Landlord or Landlord’s Indemnitees, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, for death or injury to, or damage to property of, third parties (other than Landlord’s Indemnitees) that may arise from any act
or occurrence in the Premises, except to the extent caused by the negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord, Landlord’s contractors, or Landlord’s Indemnitees. 
  
 15. Damages from Certain Causes. To the extent not expressly prohibited by law, Landlord shall not be liable
to Tenant or Tenant’s employees, contractors, agents, invitees or customers, for any injury to person or damage to property sustained by Tenant or any such party or any other person claiming through Tenant resulting from any accident or
occurrence in the Premises or any other portion of the Building caused by the Premises or any other portion of the Building becoming out of repair or by defect in or failure of equipment, pipes, or wiring, or by broken glass, or by the backing up of
drains, or by gas, water, steam, electricity, or oil leaking, escaping or flowing into the Premises (except where due to Landlord’s grossly negligent or willful failure to make repairs required to be made pursuant to other provisions of this
Lease, after the expiration of a reasonable time after written notice to Landlord of the need for such repairs), nor shall Landlord be liable to Tenant for any loss or damage that may be occasioned by or through the acts or omissions of other
tenants of the Building or of any other persons whomsoever, including, but not limited to riot, strike, insurrection, war, court order, requisition, order of any governmental body or authority, acts of God, fire or theft. 
  
 16. Casualty Damage. If the Premises or any part thereof shall
be damaged by fire or other casualty, Tenant shall give prompt written notice thereof to Landlord. In case the Building shall be so damaged that substantial alteration or reconstruction of the Building shall, in Landlord’s reasonable exercise
of its business opinion as supported by documentation by a certified architect and delivered to Tenant, take more than 180 days to complete (whether or not the Premises shall have been damaged by such casualty), or in the event there is less than
two (2) years of the Lease Term remaining, or in the event Landlord’s mortgagee should require that the insurance proceeds payable as a result of a casualty be applied to the payment of the mortgage debt, or in the event of any material
uninsured loss to the Building, either Landlord or Tenant may, at its respective option, terminate this Lease by notifying the other in writing of such termination within ninety (90) days 

  

 19 

 
after the date of such casualty. If Landlord determines that any such damage shall take less than 180 days to complete, upon Tenant’ reasonable request,
Landlord shall furnish Tenant with supporting documentation from a certified architect. If neither Landlord nor Tenant so elects to terminate this Lease, Landlord shall commence (no later than sixty (60) days following the casualty) and proceed with
diligence to restore the Building, and the improvements located within the Premises to substantially the same condition in which it was immediately prior to the happening of the casualty. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord’s obligation to
restore the Building, and the improvements located within the Premises shall not require Landlord to expend for such repair and restoration work more than the insurance proceeds actually received by Landlord as a result of the casualty; provided
that Landlord shall have complied with the insurance requirements and limits set forth in Section 13A. When the repairs described in the preceding two sentences have been completed by Landlord, Tenant shall complete the restoration of all
Tenant’s Property which are necessary to permit Tenant’s reoccupancy of the Premises. Landlord shall not be liable for any inconvenience or annoyance to Tenant or injury to the business of Tenant resulting in any way from such damage or
the repair thereof, except that Rent shall be abated from the date of the damage or destruction for any portion of the Premises that is unusable by Tenant (including without limitation if the Premises is not itself damaged, but the Building has
suffered damage making access to and use of the Premises impracticable), which abatement shall be in the same proportion that the Rentable Area of the Premises which is unusable (or such use is so rendered impracticable) by Tenant bears to the total
Rentable Area of the Premises; provided that Tenant shall not be entitled to any abatement of Rent if the damage or destruction within the Premises is restored within five (5) Business Days after Landlord’s receipt of written notice from Tenant
of the occurrence of the damage or destruction. 
  
 17.
Condemnation. If the whole or any substantial part of the Premises or if the Building or any portion thereof which would leave the remainder of the Building unsuitable for use comparable to its use on the Commencement Date, or if the
land on which the Building or the Parking Deck is located or any material portion thereof, shall be taken or condemned for any public or quasi-public use under governmental law, ordinance or regulation, or by right of eminent domain, or by private
purchase in lieu thereof, then either Landlord or Tenant may, at its respective option, terminate this Lease by written notice to the other party and Rent shall be abated during the unexpired portion of this Lease, effective when the physical taking
of said Premises or said portion of the Building or land shall occur. If this Lease is not terminated, the Rent for any portion of the Premises so taken or condemned shall be abated during the unexpired Lease Term effective when the physical taking
of said portion of the Premises shall occur. All compensation awarded for any taking or condemnation, or sale proceeds in lieu thereof, shall be the property of Landlord, and Tenant shall have no claim thereto, the same being hereby expressly waived
by Tenant, except for any portions of such award or proceeds which are specifically allocated by the condemning or purchasing party for the taking of or damage to trade fixtures of Tenant and moving costs, which Tenant specifically reserves to
itself. 
  
 18. Events of Default. 
  
 A. The following events shall be deemed to be
“Events of Default” under this Lease: (i) Tenant fails to pay any Rent when due; provided that the first (1st) such failure during any consecutive twelve (12) month period during the Term shall not be an Event of 

  

 20 

 
Default if Tenant pays the amount due within ten (10) days after Tenant’s receipt of written notice from Landlord that such payment was not made when
due; (ii) Tenant fails to perform any other provision of this Lease not described in this Section 18, and such failure is not cured within thirty (30) days (or immediately if the failure involves a hazardous condition) after notice from Landlord,
however, other than with respect to a hazardous condition, if Tenant’s failure to comply cannot reasonably be cured within thirty (30) days, Tenant shall be allowed additional time (not to exceed ninety (90) additional days) as is reasonably
necessary to cure the failure so long as Tenant begins the cure within thirty (30) days and diligently pursues the cure to completion; (iii) Tenant fails following written notice and within any applicable cure period to observe or perform any of the
covenants with respect to (a) assignment and subletting as set forth in Section 11, (b) construction liens as set forth in Section 12, (c) insurance as set forth in Section 13 or (d) delivering subordination agreements or estoppel certificates
as set forth in Section 24, (iv) the leasehold interest of Tenant is levied upon or attached under process of law; (v) Tenant dissolves; (vi) Tenant abandons or vacates the Premises; (vii) any voluntary or involuntary proceedings are filed by or
against Tenant or any guarantor of this Lease under any bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws and, in the case of any involuntary proceedings, are not dismissed within sixty (60) days after filing; or (viii) an Event of Default by Tenant under the
Phase I Lease. 
  
 B. The following events shall
be deemed to be “Landlord Default(s)” under this Lease: (i) any representation or warranty made by Landlord under this Lease, including without limitation those enumerated in Section 5.B is untrue; (ii) Landlord fails to perform any
express undertaking of Landlord under this Lease, including without limitation those enumerated in Sections 5.A, 5.B
and 5.C; (iii) Landlord defaults in the Phase I Lease; or (iv) Landlord fails to perform any other provision of this Lease not described in this Section 18, and such failure is not cured within thirty (30) days (or immediately if the failure
involves a hazardous condition) after notice from Tenant, however, other than with respect to a hazardous condition, if Landlord’s failure to comply cannot reasonably be cured within thirty (30) days, Landlord shall be allowed additional time
(not to exceed ninety (90) additional days) as is reasonably necessary to cure the failure so long as Landlord begins the cure within thirty (30) days and diligently pursues the cure to completion. 
  
 19. Remedies. 
  
 A. Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default, Landlord
shall have the following rights and remedies, subject in all respects to the provisions and limitations of applicable laws, any one or more of which may be exercised without further notice to or demand upon Tenant and which may be pursued
successively or cumulatively as Landlord may elect: 
  

	 	(1)	Landlord may re-enter the Premises and attempt to cure any default of Tenant, in which event Tenant shall, upon demand, reimburse Landlord as Additional Rent for all reasonable
costs and expenses which Landlord incurs to cure such default; 

  

 21 

	 	(2)	Landlord may terminate this Lease by giving to Tenant notice of Landlord’s election to do so, in which event the Lease Term shall end, and all right, title and interest of
Tenant hereunder shall expire, on the date stated in such notice; 

  

	 	(3)	Landlord may terminate the right of Tenant to possession of the Premises without terminating this Lease by giving notice to Tenant and pursuing its remedies for recovery of
possession in accordance with applicable Michigan law; and 

  

	 	(4)	Landlord may enforce the provisions of this Lease by a suit or suits in equity or at law for the specific performance of any covenant or agreement contained herein, or for the
enforcement of any other appropriate legal or equitable remedy, including recovery of all moneys due or to become due from Tenant under any of the provisions of this Lease. 

  
 Landlord shall not be required to serve Tenant with any notices or demands as a prerequisite to its exercise of any of its rights or
remedies under this Lease, other than those notices and demands specifically required under this Lease or applicable law. TENANT WAIVES ANY RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY LAWSUIT BROUGHT BY LANDLORD TO RECOVER POSSESSION OF THE PREMISES FOLLOWING
LANDLORD’S TERMINATION OF THIS LEASE OR THE RIGHT OF TENANT TO POSSESSION OF THE PREMISES PURSUANT TO THE TERMS OF THIS LEASE AND ON ANY CLAIM FOR DELINQUENT RENT WHICH LANDLORD MAY JOIN IN ITS LAWSUIT TO RECOVER POSSESSION. 
  
 B. If Landlord exercises either of the remedies provided in
Sections 19A(2) or 19A(3), Tenant shall surrender possession and vacate the Premises and immediately deliver possession thereof to Landlord, and Landlord may re-enter and take complete and peaceful possession of the Premises, with process of law,
and Landlord may remove all occupants and property therefrom, using such force as may be necessary to the extent allowed by law, without being deemed guilty in any manner of trespass, eviction or forcible entry and detainer and without relinquishing
Landlord’s right to Rent or any other right given to Landlord hereunder or by operation of law. 
  
 C. If Landlord terminates the right of Tenant to possession of the Premises without terminating this Lease, Landlord shall have the right
to immediate recovery of all amounts then due hereunder. Such termination of possession shall not release Tenant, in whole or in part, from Tenant’s obligation to pay Rent hereunder for the full Lease Term, and Landlord shall have the right,
from time to time, to recover from Tenant, and Tenant shall remain liable for, all Rent accruing as it becomes due under this Lease during the period from the date of such notice of termination of possession to the stated end of the Lease Term. In
any such case, Landlord shall make reasonable efforts, in accordance with Section 19E hereof, to relet the Premises. In attempting to relet the Premises, Landlord may make repairs, alterations and additions in or to the Premises and redecorate the
same to the extent reasonably deemed by Landlord necessary or desirable, and Tenant upon 

  

 22 

 
demand shall pay the reasonable cost of all of the foregoing together with Landlord’s reasonable expenses of reletting. The rents from any such
reletting shall be applied first to the payment of the expenses of reentry, redecoration, repair and alterations and the expenses of reletting (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and brokers’ fees and commissions) and second to the
payment of Rent herein provided to be paid by Tenant. Any excess or residue shall operate only as an offsetting credit against the amount of Rent due and owing as the same thereafter becomes due and payable hereunder. 
  
 D. If this Lease is terminated by Landlord, Landlord shall
be entitled to recover from Tenant all Rent accrued and unpaid for the period up to and including such termination date, as well as all other additional sums payable by Tenant, or for which, Tenant is liable or for which Tenant has agreed to
indemnify Landlord, which may be then owing and unpaid, and all reasonable costs and expenses, including court costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred by Landlord in the enforcement of its rights and remedies hereunder. In addition,
Landlord shall be entitled to recover as damages for loss of the bargain and not as a penalty (1) the aggregate sum which at the time of such termination represents the excess, if any, of the present value of the aggregate Rent which would have been
payable after the termination date had this Lease not been terminated, including, without limitation, the amount projected by Landlord to represent Additional Rent for the remainder of the Lease Term, over the then present value of the then
aggregate fair rent value of the Premises for the balance of the Lease Term, including for this purpose the Additional Rent that would constitute a component thereof, such present worth to be computed in each case on the basis of a ten percent (10%)
per annum discount from the respective dates upon which such Rent would have been payable hereunder had this Lease not been terminated, and (2) any damages in addition thereto, including without limitation reasonable attorneys’ fees and court
costs, which Landlord sustains as a result of the breach of any of the covenants of this Lease other than for the payment of Rent. 
  
 E. Landlord shall use commercially reasonable efforts to mitigate any damages resulting from an Event of Default by Tenant under this
Lease. Landlord’s obligation to mitigate damages after an Event of Default by Tenant under this Lease shall be satisfied in full if Landlord undertakes to lease the Premises to another tenant (a “Substitute Tenant”) in
accordance with the following criteria: (1) Landlord shall have no obligation to solicit or entertain negotiations with any other prospective tenants for the Premises until Landlord obtains full and complete possession of the Premises including,
without limitation, the final and unappealable legal right to relet the Premises free of any claim of Tenant; (2) Landlord shall not be obligated to lease or show the Premises, on a priority basis, or offer the Premises to a prospective tenant when
other premises in the Building suitable for that prospective tenant’s use are (or soon will be) available; (3) Landlord shall not be obligated to lease the Premises to a Substitute Tenant for a rent less than the current fair market rent then
prevailing for similar uses in comparable buildings in the same market area as the Building, nor shall Landlord be obligated to enter into a new lease under other terms and conditions that are unacceptable to Landlord under Landlord’s then
current leasing policies for comparable space in the Building; (4) Landlord shall not be obligated to enter into a lease with a Substitute Tenant whose use would: (i) violate any restriction, covenant, or requirement contained in the lease of
another tenant of the Building; (ii) adversely affect 

  

 23 

 
the reputation of the Building; or (iii) be incompatible with the operation of the Building; and (5) Landlord shall not be obligated to enter into a lease
with any proposed Substitute Tenant which does not have, in Landlord’s reasonable opinion, sufficient financial resources to operate the Premises in a first class manner and to fulfill all of the obligations in connection with the lease thereof
as and when the same become due. 
  
 F. The
receipt by Landlord of less than the full Rent due shall not be construed to be other than a payment on account of Rent then due, nor shall any statement on Tenant’s check or any letter accompanying Tenant’s check be deemed an accord and
satisfaction, and Landlord may accept such payment without prejudice to Landlord’s right to recover the balance of the Rent due or to pursue any other remedies provided in this Lease. The acceptance by Landlord of Rent hereunder shall not be
construed to be a waiver of any breach by Tenant of any term, covenant or condition of this Lease. No act or omission by Landlord or its employees or agents during the Lease Term shall be deemed an acceptance of a surrender of the Premises, and no
agreement to accept such a surrender shall be valid unless in writing and signed by Landlord. 
  
 G. To the extent allowed by law, all installments of Rent not paid within thirty (30) days after the due date therefor shall bear interest
at the Default Rate from the date due until paid. In the event of any litigation between Tenant and Landlord to enforce or interpret any provision of this Lease or to enforce any right of either party hereto, the unsuccessful party to such
litigation shall pay to the successful party all costs and expenses, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred therein. 
  
 H. In the event of a Landlord Default, Tenant may exercise any and all remedies available to it at law or in equity. Landlord in any event
shall have personal liability in connection with any Landlord Default pertaining to the representations, warranties and covenants by Landlord under Section 5.B of this Lease, notwithstanding anything to the contrary otherwise set forth herein.

  
 20. No Waiver. Failure of either party to
declare any default immediately upon its occurrence, or delay in taking any action in connection with an event of default, shall not constitute a waiver of such default, nor shall it constitute an estoppel against the non-defaulting party, but the
non-defaulting party shall have the right to declare the default at any time and take such action as is lawful or authorized under this Lease. Failure by non-defaulting party to enforce its rights with respect to any one default shall not constitute
a waiver of its rights with respect to any subsequent default. 
  
 21. Peaceful Enjoyment. Tenant shall, and may peacefully have, hold, and enjoy the Premises, subject to the other terms hereof, provided that Tenant pays the Rent and other sums herein recited to be paid by Tenant and timely
performs all of Tenant’s covenants and agreements herein contained. 
  
 22. Substitution. Intentionally omitted. 
  

 24 

 23. Holding Over. If Tenant continues to occupy the Premises after the expiration or
other termination of this Lease or the termination of Tenant’s right of possession, such occupancy shall be that of a tenancy at sufferance. Tenant shall, throughout the entire holdover period, be subject to all the terms and provisions of this
Lease and shall pay for its use and occupancy an amount (on a per month basis without reduction for any partial months during any such holdover) equal to one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the Base Rent and one hundred percent (100%) of the
Additional Rent due under this Lease for the last full month of the term hereof during the first ninety (90) days of such holdover, and two hundred percent (200%) of such Base Rent and one hundred percent (100%) of such Additional Rent thereafter
during such holdover. No holding over by Tenant or payments of money by Tenant to Landlord after the expiration of the Lease Term shall be construed to extend the Lease Term or prevent Landlord from recovery of immediate possession of the Premises
by summary proceedings or otherwise Tenant shall also be liable to Landlord for all direct and consequential damages which Landlord may suffer by reason of any holding over by Tenant. 
  
 24. Subordination to Mortgage; Estoppel Certificate. Tenant
accepts this Lease subject and subordinate to any ground lease, mortgage, deed of trust or other lien presently existing or hereafter arising upon the Premises, or upon the Building or the Property and to any renewals, modifications, refinancings
and extensions thereof, but Tenant agrees that any such mortgagee shall have the right at any time to subordinate such mortgage, deed of trust or other lien to this Lease on such terms and subject to such conditions as such mortgagee may deem
appropriate in its discretion. The provisions of the foregoing sentence shall be self-operative and no further instrument of subordination shall be required. However, Landlord is hereby irrevocably vested with full power and authority to subordinate
this Lease to any mortgage, deed of trust or other lien now existing or hereafter placed upon the Premises, or the
Building or the Property and Tenant agrees within twenty (20) days after written demand to execute such further instruments subordinating this Lease or attorning to the holder of any such liens as Landlord may request; provided, however, that it
shall be a condition of any such subordination by Tenant that the mortgagee, trustee under deed of trust or holder of such other lien agree that, in the event of a default by Landlord and foreclosure of the applicable mortgage, deed of trust or
other lien, the mortgagee, trustee or holder, and any purchaser at foreclosure sale, shall acknowledge Tenant’s rights under this Lease and shall not disturb Tenant’s possession of the Premises so long as Tenant is not in default under
this Lease. Tenant agrees that it shall from time-to-time furnish within twenty (20) days after so requested by Landlord, a certificate signed by Tenant certifying as to such matters as may be reasonably requested by Landlord. Any such certificate
may be relied upon by any ground lessor, prospective purchaser, secured party, mortgagee or any beneficiary under any mortgage, deed of trust on the Building or the Property or any part thereof or interest of Landlord therein. 
  
 25. Notice. Any notice required or permitted to be given under
this Lease or by law shall be deemed to have been given if it is written and delivered in person or mailed by Registered or Certified mail, postage prepaid, or sent by a nationally recognized overnight delivery service to the party who is to receive
such notice at the address specified in Section 1 of this Lease (and, if no address is listed for Tenant, notices to Tenant shall be delivered to the Premises). When so mailed, the notice shall be deemed to have been given two (2) Business Days
after the date it was mailed. When sent by overnight delivery service, the notice shall be deemed to have been given on the next 

  

 25 

 
Business Day after deposit with such overnight delivery service. The address specified in Section 1 of this Lease may be changed from time to time by giving
written notice thereof to the other party. 
  
 26. Surrender
of Premises. Upon the termination of the Lease Term, or upon any termination of Tenant’s right to possession of the Premises, Tenant will at once surrender possession of the Premises to Landlord in good condition and repair, ordinary
wear and tear, and damage by fire and the elements, excepted. Tenant shall surrender to Landlord all keys to the Premises and make known to Landlord the combination of all combination locks which Tenant is required to leave on the Premises.

  
 27. Rights Reserved to Landlord. Landlord
reserves the following rights, exercisable without notice, except as provided herein, and without liability to Tenant for damage or injury to property, person or business and without affecting an eviction or disturbance of Tenant’s use or
possession or giving rise to any claim for setoff or abatement of rent or affecting any of Tenant’s obligations under this Lease: (1) upon thirty (30) days’ prior notice to change the name or street address of the Building; (2) to install
and maintain signs on the exterior and interior of the Building (subject in all respects to Tenant’s signage rights hereunder); (3) to designate and approve window coverings to present a uniform exterior appearance; (4) to retain at all times
and to use in appropriate instances, pass keys to all locks within and to the Premises; (5) to approve the weight, size, or location of heavy equipment, or articles within the Premises; (6) to change the arrangement and location of entrances of
passageways, doors and doorways, corridors, elevators, stairs, toilets and public parts of the Building or Property; (7) to regulate access to telephone, electrical and other utility closets in the Building and to require use of designated
contractors for any work involving access to the same; (8) if Tenant has vacated the Premises during the last six (6) months of the Lease Term, to perform additions, alterations and improvements to the Premises in connection with a reletting or
anticipated reletting thereof without being responsible or liable for the value or preservation of any then existing improvements to the Premises and without effectuating a surrender or entitling Tenant to any abatement of Rent; (9) to enter the
Premises to inspect the same or to show the Premises to prospective purchasers, mortgagees, tenants (during the last twelve months of the Lease Term) or insurers, or to clean or make repairs, alterations or additions thereto, provided that, except
for any entry in an emergency situation or to provide normal cleaning and janitorial service, Landlord shall provide Tenant with reasonable prior notice of any entry into the Premises; and (10) to temporarily close the Premises or the Building to
perform repairs, alterations or additions in the Premises or the Building. In exercising its rights under this Section 27, Landlord shall make commercially reasonable efforts to avoid unreasonably interfering with Tenant’s business operations
in the Premises. 
  
 28. Roof Usage. Landlord shall
provide Tenant the nonexclusive right to install up to two (2) satellite dishes (the “Rooftop Equipment”) on the roof of the Building in accordance with plans and specifications, and installation methods, approved by Landlord and provided
that the satellite dishes do not damage or impair the integrity of the roof, or invalidate the roof warranty, or impair or cause interference with the operation of any machinery, equipment or apparatus of the Building or other tenants of the
Building. Landlord shall have no responsibility and shall not be obligated to provide any utilities, including, but not limited to, electricity or other power for the operation of the Rooftop Equipment. Tenant shall pay for the cost of all utility
services, including the installation, 

  

 26 

 
separate metering or submetering, if necessary. Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for any of Landlord’s consultants or contractors reasonable fees
incurred in connection with the review of any drawings, plans and specifications and the Rooftop Equipment installation. Tenant shall be responsible for the payment of any costs Landlord may incur as a result of the cancellation of any roof warranty
or the denial of any claim under any roof warranty due to the installation or operation of the Rooftop Equipment, unless (i) Landlord had previously approved the installation method, (ii) Landlord had previously approved the contractor performing
such installation, and (iii) the warrantor of the roof (if still in effect) approved the installation. Tenant shall operate and maintain the Rooftop Equipment, at its own cost and expense, in good working order and condition and free from any hazard
to person and property. Tenant shall not place any load upon the roof of the Building, which will exceed the load per square foot, which the roof was designed to carry. Upon termination of Tenant’s use or right to the use of the Rooftop
Equipment by expiration of time or otherwise, Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, remove the Rooftop Equipment and shall restore the roof of the Building to its condition existing prior to the installation of the Rooftop Equipment. Tenant
shall further repair, at its sole cost and expense, any damage or destruction caused by the removal of the Rooftop Equipment. Restoration and repair hereby required to be performed by Tenant shall be performed, at Tenant’s cost, by a contractor
reasonably approved by Landlord or under the supervision of a representative of Landlord (the cost for whom shall be paid by Landlord and Landlord shall be reimbursed by Tenant) at such time and in such manner that is satisfactory to Landlord.

  
 29. On-Site Amenities. Intentionally omitted.

  
 30. Miscellaneous. 
  
 A. If any term or provision of this Lease, or the
application thereof, shall, to any extent, be invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of this Lease, or the application of such term or provision, shall not be affected thereby, and each term and provision of this Lease shall be valid and enforced
to the fullest extent permitted by law. 
  
 B.
Tenant agrees not to record this Lease or any short form or memorandum hereof; provided, however, that this provision shall not be deemed to preclude Tenant from filing information with respect to or a copy of this Lease in connection with any
report required under applicable Federal or State law, including without limitation the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission. 
  
 C. This Lease and the rights and obligations of the parties hereto shall be interpreted, construed, and enforced in accordance with the
laws of the state in which the Building is located. 
  
 D. The term “Force Majeure” shall mean strikes, riots, acts of God, shortages of labor or materials not attributable to Landlord’s failure to properly manage construction or procurement schedules and lead-times, war,
acts of terrorism, governmental laws, regulations or restrictions, or any other cause whatsoever beyond the control of Landlord or Tenant, as the case may be. Whenever a period of time is herein prescribed for the taking of any action by Landlord or
Tenant (other than the payment of Rent and all other such sums 

  

 27 

 
of money as shall become due hereunder), such party shall not be liable or responsible for, there shall be excluded from the computation of such period of
time, any delays due to events of Force Majeure. 
  
 E. Except as expressly otherwise herein provided, with respect to all required acts of Tenant, time is of the essence of this Lease. 
  
 F. Landlord shall have the right to transfer and assign, in whole or in part, all of its rights and obligations hereunder and in the
Building and Property referred to herein, and in such event and upon such transfer Landlord shall be released from any further obligations hereunder, and Tenant agrees to look solely to such successor in interest of Landlord for the performance of
such obligations; provided, however no such transfer or assignment shall relieve Landlord from personal liability for the representations, warranties and undertakings set forth in Section 5.B of this Lease. 
  
 G. Tenant and Landlord hereby represent to each other that
it respectively has dealt directly with and only with the Broker as a broker in connection with this Lease. Landlord and Tenant hereby indemnify and hold each other harmless against any loss, claim, expense or liability with respect to any
commissions or brokerage fees claimed by any broker or finder other than the Broker on account of the execution and/or renewal of this Lease due to any action of the indemnifying party. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary hereinabove, Landlord
shall be solely responsible for the payment of any fees or commissions of the Broker as well as any broker employed or utilized by Great Lakes REIT or any other former owner of the Building to the extent any fee or commission is due any such other
broker. 
  
 H. If there is more than one Tenant,
or if Tenant as such is comprised of more than one person or entity, the obligations hereunder imposed upon Tenant shall be joint and several obligations of all such parties. All notices, payments, and agreements given or made by, with or to any one
of such persons or entities shall be deemed to have been given or made by, with or to all of them. 
  
 I. Tenant acknowledges that the financial capability of Tenant to perform its obligations hereunder is material to Landlord and that
Landlord would not enter into this Lease but for its belief, based on its review of Tenant’s financial statements, that Tenant is capable of performing such financial obligations. Tenant hereby represents, warrants and certifies to Landlord
that its financial statements previously furnished to Landlord fairly represent the financial condition of Tenant. In the event of a proposed sale or other transfer, financing or refinancing by Landlord of the Building, where the proposed lender or
purchaser requests tenant financial statements, within twenty (20) days after Landlord’s request, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord the most current year-end financial statements of Tenant and any guarantor of this Lease. 
  
 J. Except as otherwise expressly set forth in this Lease,
the expiration of the Lease Term, whether by lapse of time or otherwise, shall not relieve Tenant from Tenant’s 

  

 28 

 
obligations accruing prior to the expiration of the Lease Term, and such obligations shall survive any such expiration or other termination of the Lease
Term. 
  
 K. Landlord and Tenant understand,
agree and acknowledge that (i) this Lease has been freely negotiated by both parties; and (ii) in any controversy, dispute or contest over the meaning, interpretation, validity, or enforceability of this Lease or any of its terms or conditions,
there shall be no inference, presumption, or conclusion drawn whatsoever against either party by virtue of that party having drafted this Lease or any portion thereof. 
  
 L. The headings and titles to the paragraphs of this Lease are for convenience only and shall have no affect
upon the construction or interpretation of any part hereof. The term “including” shall be deemed to mean “including without limitation”. 
  
 31. No Offer. Landlord has delivered a copy of this Lease to Tenant for Tenant’s review only, and the delivery hereof does not
constitute an offer to Tenant or an option. This Lease shall not be effective until an original of this Lease executed by both Landlord and Tenant and an original Guaranty, if applicable, executed by each Guarantor is delivered to and accepted by
Landlord, this Lease has been approved by Landlord’s mortgagee, if required, and the condition to the effectiveness of this Lease under Section 5.C, D, E and F have been satisfied or waived in writing. 
  
 32. Entire Agreement. This Lease, including the Exhibits
attached hereto, constitutes the entire agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter of this Lease and supersedes all prior agreements and understandings between the parties related to the Premises, including all lease
proposals, letters of intent and similar documents. Tenant expressly acknowledges and agrees that Landlord has not made and is not making, and Tenant, in executing and delivering this Lease, is not relying upon, any warranties, representations,
promises or statements, except to the extent that the same are expressly set forth in this Lease. This Lease may be modified only by a written agreement signed by Landlord and Tenant. Landlord and Tenant expressly agree that there are and shall be
no implied warranties of merchantability, habitability, suitability, fitness for a particular purpose or of any other kind arising out of this Lease, all of which are hereby waived by Tenant, and that there are no warranties which extend beyond
those expressly set forth in this Lease. 
  
 33. Limitation
of Liability. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Lease, Landlord shall have personal liability for the representations, warranties and undertakings set forth in Section 5.B of this Lease. Any other liability of Landlord under
this Lease shall be limited solely to its interest in the Property, and in no such other event shall any personal liability be asserted against Landlord, its members, or their respective members, partners, shareholders, officers, directors, agents
or employees, in connection with this Lease nor shall any recourse be had to any other property or assets of Landlord, its members, or their respective members, partners, shareholders, officers, directors, agents or employees. In no event shall
either Landlord or Tenant be liable for consequential or punitive damages as a result of a breach or default under or otherwise in connection with this Lease, other than and excepting those payable as expressly set forth in Paragraph 23 of this
Lease. 
  

 29 

 [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] 
  

 30 

 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Landlord and Tenant have executed this Lease as of the day and year first
above written. 
  

													
	LANDLORD:	 	 	 	TENANT:
			
	 TRANSWESTERN GREAT LAKES,
 L.P.,
a Delaware limited partnership
	 	 	 	 PROQUEST COMPANY, a
 Delaware corporation

					
	By:	 	Transwestern Great Lakes GP, L.L.C., a Maryland limited liability company, its general partner	 	 	 	By:	 	 /s/ Kevin Gregory

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 Name:
	 	 Kevin Gregory

	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 Title:
	 	 Senior Vice President

					
	By:	 	Transwestern Investment Company, L.L.C., its authorized agent	 	 	 	 	 	 
					
	By:	 	/s/ Scott A. Tausk	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 Name:
	 	 Scott A. Tausk
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 	 	 Title:
	 	 Managing Director
	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
			
	WITNESS/ATTEST	 	 	 	WITNESS/ATTEST
					
	By:	 	/s/ William Harvey IV	 	 	 	By:	 	 /s/ Christine E. Kaliszuk

	 	 	 Name:
	 	 William Harvey IV
	 	 	 	 	 	 Name:
	 	 Christine E. Kaliszuk

	 	 	 Title:
	 	 Sr. V. P.
	 	 	 	 	 	 Title:
	 	 Paralegal

  

 31 

  
 EXHIBIT A-1

  
 OUTLINE AND LOCATION OF PREMISES

  
 see attached 
  

 A-1 

  
 

 
  

  
 EXHIBIT A-2

  
 LEGAL DESCRIPTION OF PHASE II LAND

  
 Included in the legal description of the Phase I Land
attached hereto as Exhibit A-3 
  

 A-2 

  
 EXHIBIT A-3

  
 LEGAL DESCRIPTION OF PHASE I LAND

  
 Commencing at the Southwest corner of Section 4, T3S, R6E, City of Ann
Arbor, Washtenaw, County, Michigan, thence N 01°53’00”W 250.00 feet along the West line of said Section and the centerline of State Road; thence N87°09’00” E 51.25 feet to a point on the Easterly right of way line of
State Road, said point being the POINT OF BEGINNING; thence N 02°03’20” W 429.50 feet along said right of way line; thence N 87°01’00” E 150/04 feet; thence N 01°53 W W 133.16 feet; thence S 87°01’00” W
150.44 feet; THENCE N 02°03’20” W 51.40 feet along said right of way line; thence N 87°01’00” E 502.45 feet; thence N 01°53’00” W 178.60 feet; thence N 87°01’00” E 635.25 feet; thence
S01°53’00” 983.39 feet along the Westerly right of way line of Boardwalk Drive to a point on the Northerly right of way line of Eisenhower Parkway; thence along said right of way line in the following courses; S 85°32’50”
W 426.81 feet, S 87°09’00” W240.19 feet, N 02°51 W W 25.00 feet and S 87°09’00” W 310.01 feet; thence N 01°53’00” W 175.00 feet; thence S 87°09’00” W 158.75 feet to the POINT OF BEGINNING.
Being a part of the Southwest  1/4 of the Southwest 14 of Section 4, T3S, R6E, City of Ann Arbor, Washtenaw
County, Michigan. 
  
 TOGETHER WITH easements and rights of way
appurtenant, as of record. 
  

 A-3 

  
 EXHIBIT B

  
 RULES AND REGULATIONS 
  
 The following rules and regulations shall apply, where applicable, to the Premises, the
Building, the parking areas associated therewith (if any), the Property and the appurtenances thereto: 
  
 1. Sidewalks, entrances, passageways, courts, corridors, vestibules, halls, elevators and stairways in and about the Building shall not be obstructed nor
shall objects be placed against glass partitions, doors or windows which would be unsightly from the Building’s corridors or from the exterior of the Building. 
  
 2. Plumbing, fixtures and appliances shall be used for only the purpose for which they were designed and no foreign
substance of any kind whatsoever shall be thrown or placed therein. Damage resulting to any such fixtures or appliances from misuse by Tenant or its agents, employees or invitees, shall be paid for by Tenant and Landlord shall not in any case be
responsible therefor. 
  
 3. Any sign, lettering, picture, notice
or advertisement installed within the Premises which is visible from the public corridors within the Building shall be installed in such manner, and be of such character and style, as Landlord shall approve, in writing in its reasonable discretion.
No sign, lettering, picture, notice or advertisement shall be placed on any outside window or door or in a position to be visible from outside the Building. No nails, hooks or screws (except for customary artwork or wall hangings) shall be driven or
inserted into any part of the Premises or Building except by Building maintenance personnel, nor shall any part of the Building be defaced or damaged by Tenant. 
  

4. Tenant shall not place any additional lock or locks on any door in the Premises or Building without Landlord’s prior written consent. A
reasonable number of keys to the locks on the doors in the Premises shall be furnished by Landlord to Tenant at the cost of Tenant, and Tenant shall not have any duplicate keys made. All keys and passes shall be returned to Landlord at the
expiration or earlier termination of the Lease. 
  
 5. Tenant
shall refer all contractors, contractors’ representatives and installation technicians to Landlord for Landlord’s supervision, approval and control before the performance of any contractual services. This provision shall apply to all work
performed in the Building including, but not limited to installation of telephones, telegraph equipment, electrical devices and attachments, doors, entranceways, and any and all installations of every nature affecting floors, walls, woodwork, window
trim, ceilings, equipment and any other physical portion of the Building. Tenant shall not waste electricity, water or air conditioning. All controls shall be adjusted only by Building personnel. 
  
 6. Movement in or out of the Building of furniture or office equipment, or
dispatch or receipt by Tenant of any merchandise or materials which require the use of elevators, stairways, lobby areas, or loading dock areas, shall be restricted to hours designated by Landlord. Tenant must seek Landlord’s prior approval by
providing in writing a detailed listing of such 

  

 B-1 

 
activity. If approved by Landlord, such activity shall be under the supervision of Landlord and performed in the manner stated by Landlord. Landlord may
prohibit any article, equipment or any other item from being brought into the Building. Tenant is to assume all risk for damage to articles moved and injury to persons resulting from such activity. If any equipment, property and/or personnel of
Landlord or of any other tenant is damaged or injured as a result of or in connection with such activity, Tenant shall be solely liable for any and all damage or loss resulting therefrom. 
  
 7. All corridor doors, when not in use, shall remain closed. Tenant shall cause all doors to the Premises to be closed and
securely locked before leaving the Building at the end of the day. 
  
 8. Tenant shall keep all electrical and mechanical apparatus owned by Tenant free of vibration, noise and airwaves which may be transmitted beyond the Premises. 
  
 9. Canvassing, soliciting and peddling in or about the Building or Property
is prohibited. Tenant shall cooperate and use its best efforts to prevent the same. 
  
 10. Tenant shall not use the Premises in any manner which would overload the standard heating, ventilating or air conditioning systems of the Building. 
  
 11. Tenant shall not utilize any equipment or apparatus in such manner as to create any magnetic fields or waves which
adversely affect or interfere with the operation of any systems or equipment in the Building or Property. 
  
 12. Bicycles and other vehicles are not permitted inside or on the walkways outside the Building, except in those areas specifically designated by
Landlord for such purposes. 
  
 13. Tenant shall not
operate or permit to be operated on the Premises any coin or token operated vending machine or similar device (including, without limitation, telephones, lockers, toilets, scales, amusements devices and machines for sale of beverages, foods, candy,
cigarettes or other goods), except for those vending machines or similar devices which are for the sole and exclusive use of Tenant’s employees. 
  
 14. Tenant shall utilize the termite and pest extermination service designated by Landlord to control termites and pests in the Premises. Except as
included in Basic Costs, Tenant shall bear the cost and expense of such extermination services. 
  
 15. Tenant shall not open or permit to be opened any window in the Premises. This provision shall not be construed as limiting access of Tenant to any
balcony adjoining the Premises. 
  
 16. To the extent permitted by
law, Tenant shall not permit picketing or other union activity involving its employees or agents in the Building or on the Property, except in those locations and subject to time and other constraints as to which Landlord may give its prior written
consent, which consent may be withheld in Landlord’ sole discretion. 
  

 B-2 

 17. Tenant shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, governmental orders or regulations and
applicable orders or directions from any public office or body having jurisdiction, with respect to the Premises, the Building, the Property and their respective use or occupancy thereof. Tenant shall not make or permit any use of the Premises, the
Building or the Property, respectively, which is directly or indirectly forbidden by law, ordinance, governmental regulation or order, or direction of applicable public authority, or which may be dangerous to person or property. 
  
 18. Tenant shall not use or occupy the Premises in any manner or for any
purpose which would injure the reputation or impair the present or future value of the Premises, the Building or the Property; without limiting the foregoing, Tenant shall not use or permit the Premises or any portion thereof to be used for lodging,
sleeping or for any illegal purpose. 
  
 19. All deliveries to or
from the Premises shall be made only at times, in the areas and through the entrances and exits designated for such purposes by Landlord. Tenant shall not permit the process of receiving deliveries to or from the Premises outside of said areas or in
a manner which may interfere with the use by any other tenant of its premises or any common areas, any pedestrian use of such area, or any use which is inconsistent with good business practice. 
  
 20. Tenant shall carry out Tenant’s permitted repair, maintenance,
alterations, and improvements in the Premises only during times agreed to in advance by Landlord and in a manner which will not interfere with the rights of other tenants in the Building. 
  
 21. Landlord may from time to time adopt appropriate systems and procedures for the security or safety of the Building, its
occupants, entry and use, or its contents. Tenant, Tenant’s agents, employees, contractors, guests and invitees shall comply with Landlord’s reasonable requirements thereto. 
  
 22. Subject to the signage rights of Tenant under this Lease, Landlord shall have the right to prohibit the use of the name
of the Building or any other publicity by Tenant that in Landlord’s opinion may tend to impair the reputation of the Building or its desirability for Landlord or its other tenants. Upon written notice from Landlord, Tenant will refrain from
and/or discontinue such publicity immediately. 
  
 23. Neither
Tenant nor any of its employees, agents, contractors, invitees or customers shall smoke in any area designated by Landlord (whether through the posting of a “no smoking” sign or otherwise) as a “no smoking” area. In no event
shall Tenant or any of its employees, agents, contractors, invitees or customers smoke in the hallways or bathrooms of the Building or at the entrances to the Building. Landlord reserves the right to designate, from time to time, additional areas of
the Building and the Property as “no smoking” areas and to designate the entire Building and the Property as a “no smoking” area. 
  
 [END OF EXHIBIT B] 
  

 B-3 

  
 EXHIBIT C

  
 PAYMENT OF BASIC COSTS 
  
 A. During each calendar year, or portion thereof, falling within the Lease
Term, Tenant shall pay to Landlord as Additional Rent hereunder Tenant’s Pro Rata Share of Basic Costs (as defined below) and Tenant’s Pro Rata Share of Taxes (as defined below) for the applicable calendar year. Prior to the Commencement
Date, or as soon as practical thereafter, and prior to January 1 of each calendar year during the Lease Term, or as soon as practical thereafter, Landlord shall make a good faith estimate of Basic Costs and Taxes for the applicable full or partial
calendar year and Tenant’s Pro Rata Share thereof. On or before the first day of each month during such calendar year, Tenant shall pay Landlord, as Additional Rent, a monthly installment equal to one-twelfth of Tenant’s Pro Rata Share of
Landlord’s estimates of Basic Costs and Taxes. Landlord shall have the right from time to time during any such calendar year to reasonably revise the estimate of Basic Costs and/or Taxes for such year and provide Tenant with a revised statement
therefor (provided, however, Landlord agrees that Landlord shall not issue a revised statement more than once for Basic Costs and once for Taxes in any calendar year), and thereafter the amount Tenant shall pay each month shall be based upon such
revised estimate. If Landlord does not provide Tenant with an estimate of the Basic Costs and/or Taxes by January 1 of any calendar year, Tenant shall continue to pay a monthly installment based on the previous year’s estimate until such time
as Landlord provides Tenant with an estimate of Basic Costs and/or Taxes for the current year. Upon receipt of such current year’s estimate, an adjustment shall be made for any month during the current year with respect to which Tenant paid
monthly installments of Additional Rent based on the previous year’s estimate. Tenant shall pay Landlord for any underpayment within thirty (30) days after Landlord’s written demand. Any overpayment of Additional Rent shall, at
Tenant’s option, be refunded to Tenant or credited against the installment(s) of Additional Rent next coming due under the Lease. Any amount paid by Tenant based on any estimate shall be subject to adjustment pursuant to Paragraph C below when
actual Basic Costs or actual Taxes, as applicable, are determined. 
  
 B. If the Parking Deck is at any time made available for use by tenants of the Phase I Building or future tenants (other than Tenant), if any, of the Building, Tenant shall be given a credit against Tenant’s Pro-Rata Share of Basic
Costs for the portion of Basic Costs reasonably attributable to and reflecting such shared use of the Parking Deck. 
  
 C. As soon as is practical following the end of each calendar year during the Lease Term, Landlord shall furnish to Tenant a statement of Landlord’s
actual Basic Costs and Taxes for the previous calendar year. If for any calendar year the Additional Rent collected for the prior year, as a result of Landlord’s estimate of Basic Costs or Taxes, is in excess of Tenant’s actual Pro Rata
Share of Basic Costs or Taxes, as applicable, for such prior year, then Landlord shall refund to Tenant any overpayment (or at Tenant’s option apply such amount against Additional Rent due or to become due hereunder). Likewise, Tenant shall pay
to Landlord, within thirty (30) days after Landlord’s written demand, any underpayment with respect to the 

  

 C-1 

 
prior year whether or not the Lease has terminated prior to receipt by Tenant of a statement for such underpayment, it being understood that this clause
shall survive the expiration of the Lease. 
  
 D. “Basic
Costs” shall mean all reasonable direct and indirect costs, expenses paid and disbursements of every kind (subject to the limitations set forth below), which Landlord incurs, pays or becomes obligated to pay in each calendar year in
connection with operating, maintaining, repairing, owning and managing the Building, the Parking Deck and the Property. Basic Costs shall include, without limitation, insurance premiums for insurance which is the obligation of Landlord under Section
13, and deductibles paid with respect to claims thereunder, and the amortized cost of capital improvements made to the Building or the Property which are (i) primarily for the purpose of reducing operating expense costs or otherwise improving the
operating efficiency of the Property or Building (but the amortized amount included in Basic Costs each year shall not exceed the amount of such savings); or (ii) required to comply with any laws, rules or regulations of any governmental authority
not in existence as of the date of this Lease or a requirement of Landlord’s insurance carrier. The cost of such capital improvements shall be amortized over the useful life thereof, as reasonably determined by Landlord in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles, consistently applied, and shall, at Landlord’s option, include interest at a rate that is reasonably equivalent to the interest rate that Landlord would be required to pay (assuming, for this purpose,
that Landlord is creditworthy and the interest rate reflects such creditworthiness) to finance the cost of the capital improvement in question as of the date such capital improvement is performed. 
  
 E. Basic Costs shall not include the following: 
  

	 	(1)	leasing and sale commissions, fees and expenses; 

  

	 	(2)	wages, benefits and other compensation for any employee above the grade of building manager; 

  

	 	(3)	advertising, marketing and promotional costs and expenses; 

  

	 	(4)	legal, accounting and auditing fees; 

  

	 	(5)	costs and expenses reimbursed to Landlord, such as by insurance or condemnation proceeds or by a warranty claim or from another tenant; 

  

	 	(6)	costs and expenses incurred to correct, repair, or remedy any breach of any representation or warranty of Landlord in this Lease; 

  

	 	(7)	costs and expenses attributable to any grossly negligent or willful act or omission of Landlord or any of Landlord’s agents; 

  

	 	(8)	costs of environmental compliance and remediation and related environmental response costs; 

  

	 	(9)	 amounts paid to any affiliate of Landlord for services rendered or goods furnished to the extent the amount paid exceeds the amount that would have 

  

 C-2 

	 	 
been paid for goods and services of a similar quality if procured in an arms-length transaction from a non-affiliate of Landlord;

  

	 	(10)	principal, interest, points, late charges and service charges on borrowed money, and all collection costs related thereto; 

  

	 	(11)	non-cash expense items, such as depreciation and amortization; 

  

	 	(12)	costs and expenses incurred to renovate, improve or build-out tenant spaces at the Property; 

  

	 	(13)	rentals and other charges under ground leases; 

  

	 	(14)	costs and expenses incurred to correct or repair defects in the design, construction or installation of any part of the Common Areas, Building or Property; 

 

	 	(15)	land acquisition and development costs and expenses; 

  

	 	(16)	management fees in excess of three percent (3%) of aggregate gross rental income paid by Building tenants; 

  

	 	(17)	costs and expenses incurred for repairs, replacements and restorations occasioned by any casualty loss or occurrence, or condemnation (or conveyance in lieu thereof);

  

	 	(18)	fines and penalties incurred due to a violation by Landlord or another Building tenant of applicable laws, rules, regulations, codes and ordinances; 

  

	 	(19)	interest, penalties and late charges applicable to Basic Costs to the extent attributable to Landlord’s failure to pay such expenses on a timely basis;

  

	 	(20)	allowances and concessions to Building tenants and other users; 

  

	 	(21)	Landlord’s income tax or Michigan single business tax, and any other tax measured by the income or revenues of Landlord from the Building; 

  

	 	(22)	costs and expenses billed to Tenant by Landlord or any third party and paid for by Tenant or such third party, or otherwise directly paid by Tenant or any third party;

  

	 	(23)	costs and expenses incurred to cause the Building, Property or Common Areas to comply with applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances or codes, including without
limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act, in existence as of the date of this Lease; 

  

 C-3 

	 	(24)	costs and expenses incurred to repair or replace any structural component, interior or exterior load bearing wall, or exterior skin of the Building, or the Building roof covering or
roof structure; 

  

	 	(25)	costs and expenses incurred to replace any HVAC, plumbing, electrical or sprinkler system component, except as provided in Paragraph D above; 

  

	 	(26)	costs and expenses incurred to replace any portion of the paved area (including asphalt, concrete, and other artificial surfaces) of the Property; 

  

	 	(27)	costs and expenses for materials or services that are for the primary or sole benefit of a Building tenant or user other than Tenant; 

  

	 	(28)	legal, space planning, construction, and other expenses incurred in procuring tenants for the Building or renewing or amending leases with existing tenants or occupants of the
Building; 

  

	 	(29)	costs of advertising and public relations and promotional costs and attorneys’ fees associated with the leasing of the Building; and 

  

	 	(30)	Taxes. 

  
 F. “Taxes” shall mean (i) all real estate taxes and assessments on the Property, the Building or the Premises, and taxes and assessments levied in substitution or supplementation in whole or in part
of such taxes, (ii) all personal property taxes for the Building’s personal property, including license expenses, (iii) all taxes imposed on services of Landlord’s agents and employees, (iv) all sales, use or other tax, excluding state
and/or federal income tax now or hereafter imposed by any governmental authority upon rent received by Landlord, (v) all other taxes, fees or assessments now or hereafter levied by any governmental authority on the Property, the Building or its
contents or on the operation and use thereof (except as relate to specific tenants), and (vi) all reasonable costs and fees incurred in connection with seeking reductions in or refunds in Taxes including, without limitation, any costs incurred by
Landlord to challenge the tax valuation of the Building or Property, but excluding income taxes. Estimates of real estate taxes and assessments for any calendar year during the Lease Term shall be determined based on Landlord’s good faith
estimate of the real estate taxes and assessments. Taxes and assessments hereunder are those paid or payable for such calendar year, as opposed to the real estate taxes and assessments accrued with respect to such calendar year. 
  
 Notwithstanding the provisions of Paragraph F of this Exhibit C, Landlord and
Tenant acknowledge that, if and in the event an Exemption Certificate (defined below) is issued for the Property, Tenant shall be the tax payer and shall be responsible for the payment of those Taxes consisting of (i) all real estate taxes and
assessments on the Property, the Building, the Parking Deck or the Premises, and taxes and assessments levied in substitution or supplementation in whole or in part of such taxes, (ii) all personal property taxes for the Building’s personal
property, including license expenses, (iii) all other taxes, fees or assessments now or hereafter levied by any governmental authority on the Property, the Parking Deck, the Building or its 

  

 C-4 

 
contents or on the operation and use thereof. Tenant plans to petition the City for the establishment of the leased premises under the Phase I Lease and the
Property as an industrial development district and to obtain real/personal property tax abatements pursuant to an industrial facilities exemption certificate (“Exemption Certificate”). In connection therewith, the parties acknowledge that
the Exemption Certificate would be issued in Tenant’s name, and that accordingly Tenant will be required to pay the foregoing identified portions of the Taxes. From and after the date of issuance of the Exemption Certificate, Tenant will be
billed by the City for and will pay directly any and all such taxes or payments in lieu thereof. If and in the event this Lease is terminated at any time prior to the Commencement Date, Landlord shall forthwith reimburse Tenant for the full amount
of all such taxes and other payments borne by Tenant under the Exemption Certificate through the date of termination. If the Parking Deck is at any time, made available for use by tenants of the Phase I Building or future tenants (other than
Tenant), if any, of the Building, Landlord shall reimburse Tenant, upon request, for the portion of Taxes and other payments borne by Tenant and reasonably attributable to and reflecting such shared use of the Parking Deck. 
  
 G. Tenant shall have the right to inspect, at reasonable times and in a
reasonable manner, during the thirty (30) day period following the delivery of Landlord’s statement of the actual amount of Basic Costs, such of Landlord’s books of account and records as pertain to and contain information concerning such
costs and expenses in order to verify the amounts thereof. Tenant agrees that any information obtained during an inspection by Tenant of Landlord’s books of account and records shall be kept in confidence by Tenant and its agents and employees
and shall not be disclosed to any other parties, except to Tenant’s attorneys, accountants and other consultants. If Tenant shall not dispute any item or items included in the determination of Basic Costs for a particular Lease Year by
delivering a written notice to Landlord generally describing in reasonable detail the basis of such dispute within sixty (60) days after the statement for such year was delivered to it, Tenant shall be deemed to have approved such statement. During
the pendency of any dispute over Basic Costs, Tenant shall pay, under protest and without prejudice, Tenant’s Pro Rata Share of Basic Costs as calculated by Landlord. Tenant shall bear the cost of its accountants or other consultants employed
by Tenant undertaking any review of Basic Costs; provided, however, that in the event the review reveals an overcharge (by error or otherwise) of actual (as distinguished from estimated) Basic Costs in excess of five percent (5%) of the total Basic
Costs, Landlord shall pay the reasonable out of pocket cost of the review (up to the amount of the overcharge). 
  
 H. Solely for the benefit of Tenant and not for the benefit of any other tenant or third-party, “Operating Expenses” (as defined below) for any
calendar year (the “Applicable Calendar Year”) following the calendar year in which the Commencement Date occurs (the “Commencement Year”), commencing with the second Applicable Calendar Year, shall not exceed an amount
determined by increasing the Operating Expenses for the first Applicable Calendar Year (the “Base Expenses”) at the rate of four percent (4%) per year cumulative interest through the Applicable Calendar Year. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
relative to the fifth Applicable Calendar Year, and the Applicable Calendar Year falling every five years thereafter, the Base Expenses shall be adjusted to be an amount equal to the product of (x) the average of the actual Operating Expenses for
the three prior Applicable Calendar Years, multiplied by (y) 1.0816. “Operating Expenses” shall mean the Basic Costs, exclusive of (i) 

  

 C-5 

 
Taxes, or (ii) Basic Costs incurred by virtue of an increased scope of services mutually agreed to by Landlord and Tenant (in advance of implementation).
Such limitation on Operating Expenses shall not limit or otherwise affect Tenant’s obligations regarding the payment of any other component of Rent under this Lease. 
  
 I. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Lease, the Basic Costs charged to Tenant during the
Commencement Year shall not exceed $7.20 per rentable square foot per year (such amount to be prorated based on the number of days in the Commencement Year). 
  
 [END OF EXHIBIT C] 
  

 C-6 

  
 EXHIBIT D

  
 WORK LETTER 
  

	1.	Promptly following execution of this Lease, Landlord shall promptly commence, and thereafter diligently proceed to completion, construction of the Building, the Parking Deck, the
connector to the Phase I Building, and all other improvements to be located or utilized in connection with the Phase II Land (the “Base Building Work”), all in accordance with the site plan approved by the City on June 4, 2002 (the
“Site Plan”) and the architectural drawings and specifications therefor prepared by Wright Architects and identified on Attachment 1 attached hereto and made a part hereof (the “Base Building Plans and
Specifications”). 

  
 Subject only to
Delays (as defined below in this Work Letter) or other delays permitted under Section 5 of this Lease, Landlord shall use good faith efforts to have the Base Building Work (and the Landlord’s Work, below) Substantially Completed no later than
the Target Commencement Date. No change in or variation from the Site Plan or the Base Building Plans and Specifications shall be permitted without Tenant’s prior written approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned
or delayed. 
  
 Landlord shall enter into a direct contract for
Base Building Work with a general contractor selected by Landlord and Tenant after soliciting bids therefor in accordance with the requirements of the Michigan Economic Growth Authority Act (“MEGA”) and any reasonable additional
requirements imposed by the City in connection with Tenant’s application for tax exemption. In particular, but without limitation, Landlord acknowledges that MEGA requires that (i) a competitive bid process for the construction of the Base
Building Work must be followed; (ii) the process must be open to all Michigan residents and firms; (iii) Landlord may not discriminate against any contractor on the basis of its affiliation or nonaffiliation with any collective bargaining
organization; (iv) a good faith effort must be used to employ or contract with Michigan residents in connection with the Base Building Work; and (v) a good faith effort must be made to utilize Michigan-based suppliers and vendors in connection with
the Base Building Work. In addition, Landlord shall have the right to select and/or approve of any subcontractors used in connection with the Base Building Work, subject to all of the above MEGA requirements and any applicable requirements imposed
by the City. 
  

	2.	 This Work Letter shall set forth the obligations of Landlord and Tenant with respect to the preparation of the Premises for Tenant’s occupancy, including the
initial Leasehold Improvements. All improvements described in this Work Letter (other than and expressly excluding the Base Building Work) to be constructed in and upon the Premises by Landlord are hereinafter referred to as “Landlord’s
Work.” Landlord and Tenant acknowledge that Plans (hereinafter defined) for Landlord’s Work have not yet been prepared and, therefore, it is impossible to determine the exact cost of Landlord’s Work at this time. Accordingly,
Landlord and Tenant agree that Landlord’s obligation to pay for 

  

 D-1 

	 	 
the cost of Landlord’s Work shall be limited to $31.00 per rentable square foot of the Premises (the “Construction Allowance”) and that
Tenant shall be responsible for the cost of Landlord’s Work to the extent that it exceeds the Construction Allowance. Tenant shall be permitted to utilize up to $5.00 per rentable square foot of the Premises of the Construction Allowance for
planning, construction documents, furniture, fixtures and equipment or other related items. Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for such costs within thirty (30) days of receipt from Tenant of paid invoices therefor. Landlord shall enter into a direct
contract for Landlord’s Work with a general contractor selected by Landlord and Tenant after soliciting bids therefor in accordance with the requirements of the Michigan Economic Growth Authority Act (“MEGA”) and any additional
requirements imposed by the City in connection with Tenant’s application for tax exemption. In particular, but without limitation, Landlord acknowledges that MEGA requires that (i) a competitive bid process for the construction of
Landlord’s Work must be followed; (ii) the process must be open to all Michigan residents and firms; (iii) Landlord may not discriminate against any contractor on the basis of its affiliation or nonaffiliation with any collective bargaining
organization; (iv) a good faith effort must be used to employ or contract with Michigan residents in connection with the Landlord’s Work; and (v) a good faith effort must be made to utilize Michigan-based suppliers and vendors in connection
with Landlord’s Work. If Tenant elects to require competitive bidding for Landlord’s Work as set forth above, any delays in execution by Landlord of the construction contract for Landlord’s Work with Landlord’s general contractor
beyond September 1, 2005, solely attributable to the requirement of competitive bidding shall constitute Tenant Delay as set forth hereinbelow. If Tenant elects to waive the requirement of competitive bidding of Landlord’s Work, delays in
execution of the said contract shall not constitute a Tenant Delay. In addition, Landlord shall have the right to select and/or approve of any subcontractors used in connection with Landlord’s Work, subject to all of the above MEGA requirements
and any applicable requirements imposed by the City. 

  
 Tenant shall be entitled to utilize any unused portion of the Construction Allowance as an additional Construction Allowance for Phase I tenant improvements under the Phase I Lease, and any unused portion of the Construction Allowance not
utilized for Phase I tenant improvements in connection with the Phase I Lease but in no event in excess of $3.00 per rentable square foot of the Premises of the Construction Allowance, shall be (i) paid in cash to Tenant, or (ii) applied as a credit
against the next installments) of Base Rent payable under this Lease after determination of the amount of such unused Construction Allowance. 
  
 Tenant shall pay Landlord, within fifteen (15) days after Landlord’s written demand, a construction management fee equal to one percent (1%) of the
cost of Landlord’s Work (excluding any architectural and engineering fees and fixturing costs) to compensate Landlord for its construction management services in connection with Landlord’s Work. Landlord reserves the right to deduct such
fee from the Construction Allowance; provided however, in no event shall such construction management fee exceed one percent (1%) of the amount of the Construction Allowance (which amount may be adjusted due to reallocation of unused Construction
Allowance for the Phase I Lease pursuant to the preceding paragraph). 
  

 D-2 

	3.	Space planning, architectural and any necessary and required engineering (mechanical, electrical and plumbing) drawings for Landlord’s Work shall be prepared by Wright
Architects (“Landlord’s Architect”) at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, subject to funding through the Construction Allowance as set forth above. The space planning, architectural and mechanical drawings are collectively referred
to herein as the “Plans”. The Plans shall be based upon that certain Space Plan to be approved by Landlord and Tenant, and prepared by Wright Architects. 

  

	4.	Tenant shall deliver to Landlord any information reasonably requested by Landlord and shall deliver to Landlord Tenant’s approval or disapproval of any preliminary or final
layout, drawings, or plans within five (5) Business Days after written request. Any disapproval shall be in writing and shall set forth in reasonable detail the reasons for such disapproval. Landlord shall have ten (10) Business Days from its
receipt of Tenant’s disapproval within which to revise the layout, drawings or plans to address the matters identified by Tenant to Tenant’s satisfaction. Tenant and Landlord’s Architect shall devote such time in consultation with
Landlord and Landlord’s engineer as may be required to provide all information Landlord deems necessary in order to enable Landlord’s Architect and engineer to complete, and obtain Tenant’s written approval of the Plans for
Landlord’s Work by not later than June 1, 2005 (the “Plans Due Date”). The Plans Due Date shall be extended for any failure by Landlord to so timely respond to Tenant’s objections and provide revised layouts, drawings or
plans as set forth above. In the event that Landlord is fully and timely responsive to Tenant’s objections as set forth above, including providing revised drawings, layouts or plans as the case may be to Tenant, and Tenant nevertheless fails to
approve the Plans by the Plans Due Date (as the same may be extended for delays by Landlord), Tenant shall be responsible for one (1) day of Delay (as hereinafter defined) for each day during the period beginning on the day following the Plans Due
Date and ending on the date Tenant approves the Plans. Neither the approval of the Plans nor the supervision of Landlord’s Work by Landlord shall constitute a representation or warranty by Landlord as to the accuracy, adequacy, sufficiency and
propriety of the Plans or the quality of workmanship or compliance of Landlord’s Work with applicable law. 

  

	5.	Prior to commencing any construction of Landlord’s Work, Landlord shall submit to Tenant a written estimate setting forth the anticipated cost of Landlord’s Work,
including but not limited to labor and materials, architect’s fees, contractor’s fees and permit fees. Within three (3) Business Days thereafter, Tenant shall either notify Landlord in writing of its approval of the cost estimate, or
specify its objections thereto in reasonable detail and any desired changes to the proposed Landlord’s Work. In the event Tenant notifies Landlord of such objections and desired changes, Tenant shall work with Landlord in good faith to alter
the scope of Landlord’s Work in order to reach a mutually acceptable alternative cost estimate, and Tenant shall not be responsible for any Delay resulting therefrom. 

  

	6.	 If Landlord’s estimate and/or the actual cost of Landlord’s Work shall exceed the maximum Construction Allowance (such excess being herein referred to as
the “Excess Costs”), Tenant shall pay to Landlord such Excess Costs upon Substantial Completion of 

  

 D-3 

	 	 
Landlord’s Work and presentation of an invoice therefor by Landlord. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if such Excess Costs are in excess of $10.00 per
rentable square foot of the Premises, then Tenant shall pay to Landlord such Excess Costs within ten (10) days after Tenant’s receipt of Landlord’s invoice together with all necessary and/or appropriate back-up documentation of such Excess
Costs. Landlord shall not be required to proceed with Landlord’s Work until Tenant pays such Excess Costs and any delay in the completion of Landlord’s Work due to a delay by Tenant in making such payment shall be deemed a Delay pursuant
to this Lease. The statements of costs submitted to Landlord by Landlord’s contractors shall be conclusive for purposes of determining the actual cost of the items described therein. Excess Costs constitute Rent payable pursuant to the Lease,
and the failure to timely pay same constitutes an Event of Default under the Lease. 

  

	7.	If Tenant shall request any changes to Landlord’s Work that are approved by Landlord (“Change Orders”), Landlord shall have any necessary revisions to the
Plans prepared, and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord on demand for the cost of preparing such revisions. Landlord shall notify Tenant in writing of the estimated increased cost, if any, which will be chargeable to Tenant by reason of such Change
Orders, which increased cost shall be included in the calculation determining whether there are Excess Costs under Paragraph 6 above. Tenant shall, within three (3) Business Days after receiving Landlord’s estimate of the cost of the Change
Order, notify Landlord in writing whether it desires to proceed with such Change Order. In the absence of such written authorization within said time period, Landlord shall have the option to continue work on the Premises disregarding the requested
Change Order, or Landlord may elect to discontinue work on the Premises until it receives notice of Tenant’s decision, in which event Tenant shall be responsible for any Delay in completion of Landlord’s Work resulting therefrom.

  

	8.	Following approval of the Plans, and the payment by Tenant of the required portion of the Excess Costs, if any, Landlord shall promptly commence and thereafter diligently pursue to
completion Landlord’s Work in accordance with the approved Plans, so long as no default shall occur under the Lease, and in any event shall Substantially Complete Landlord’s Work on or before the Target Commencement Date, subject only to
Delays (as defined below). Landlord shall notify Tenant upon Substantial Completion of Landlord’s Work. 

  

	9.	If Landlord shall be delayed in Substantially Completing Landlord’s Work as a result of the occurrence of any of the following (a “Delay”); provided, however,
that in any such case (i) Landlord shall provide written notice of and back-up documentation supporting such claim of Delay promptly (but in no event later than 5 days) after the occurrence of the Delay, and (ii) an actual delay in Substantial
Completion occurs as a result of such Delay: 

  

	 	(a)	Tenant’s failure to timely furnish information to complete the Plans, or otherwise in accordance with this Work Letter, or to respond to any request by Landlord for any
approval or information within any time period prescribed, or if no time period is prescribed, then within three (3) Business Days of such request; or 

  

 D-4 

	 	(b)	Tenant’s request after initial approval of the Base Building Plans and Specifications or the Plans, as the case may be, for different materials, finishes or installations that
have long lead times after having first been informed by Landlord that such materials, finishes or installations will cause a Delay; or 

  

	 	(c)	Changes in any plans and specifications requested by Tenant if Landlord advises Tenant such changes shall cause a Delay and Tenant elects to proceed with such changes; or

  

	 	(d)	The performance or nonperformance by a person or entity employed by on or behalf of Tenant in the completion of any work in the Premises (all such work and such persons or entities
being subject to prior approval of Landlord), provided that such performance or nonperformance has an actual demonstrable effect on the schedule for Substantial Completion; or 

  

	 	(e)	Any request by Tenant that Landlord delay the completion of any component of Landlord’s Work if Landlord advises Tenant that such delay shall cause a Delay and Tenant elects to
proceed with such request; or 

  

	 	(f)	Any breach or default by Tenant in the performance of Tenant’s obligations under the Lease, provided that such breach or default has an actual demonstrable effect on the
schedule for Substantial Completion; or 

  

	 	(g)	Tenant’s failure to pay any amounts as and when due under this Work Letter; or 

  

	 	(h)	Any delay resulting from Tenant’s having taken possession of the Premises for any reason prior to Substantial Completion of Landlord’s Work, if Landlord advises Tenant
that such action shall cause a Delay and Tenant elects to proceed with taking possession; or 

  

	 	(i)	Any other delay chargeable to Tenant, its agents, employees or independent contractors; provided that such delay has an actual effect on the schedule for Substantial Completion;

  
 then, for purposes of
determining the Commencement Date, the date of Substantial Completion shall be deemed to be the day that Landlord’s Work would have been Substantially Completed absent any such Delay. The adjustment of the Commencement Date and, accordingly,
the postponement of Tenant’s obligation to pay Base Rent and other sums due under the Lease shall be Tenant’s sole remedy that Tenant might otherwise have against Landlord by reason of the Premises not being ready for occupancy by Tenant
on the Target Commencement Date, except as otherwise provided in Section 5 of this Lease. Promptly after the determination of the Commencement Date, Landlord and Tenant shall enter into a letter agreement (the “Commencement Letter”)
on the form attached to the Lease as Exhibit F setting forth the Commencement Date, the Expiration Date and any other dates that are affected by the adjustment of the Commencement Date. The Commencement Letter shall identify any
minor incomplete 

  

 D-5 

 
items of Landlord’s Work as reasonably determined by Landlord’s architect (the “Punchlist Items”), which Punchlist Items Landlord
shall promptly remedy. Tenant, within five (5) days after receipt thereof from Landlord, shall execute the Commencement Letter and return the same to Landlord. 
  

	10.	All capitalized terms used in this Work Letter but not defined herein shall have the same meanings ascribed to such terms in the Lease. 

  

	11.	Tenant shall perform all work (other than Landlord’s Work) in accordance with the terms of this Work Letter as required to put the Premises in a condition to permit the conduct
of Tenant’s business therein and in accordance with the requirements of this Lease. When Landlord’s Work has proceeded to the point where the work to be performed by Tenant and the installation of Tenant’s Property in the Premises
(collectively “Tenant’s Work”) can, in the opinion of Landlord, be commenced in accordance with good construction practice, then Tenant shall have the right to occupy the Premises for the purpose of performing Tenant’s Work so
far as its occupancy is not inconsistent with Landlord’s Work or any work to be done in the Building by Landlord, subject to all the terms and condition of this Lease (including in particular Section 9B), except that the Term of this Lease
shall not commence until the Commencement Date. Tenant acknowledges that entry onto the Premises when the Landlord’s Work is not Substantially Complete entails a risk of bodily injury, death, or damage, destruction, loss or misappropriation of
property. To the extent not expressly prohibited by law, Tenant hereby assumes all such risks for entry onto the Premises, and agrees to defend and hold harmless Landlord (its agents, contractors, and employees) against all costs and expenses,
including reasonable attorneys’ fees in connection therewith, arising out of any bodily injury, death, or damage, destruction, loss or misappropriation of property related to entry onto the Premises by Tenant or its agents, employees,
contractors, invitees or subtenants prior to such time as the Landlord’s Work is substantially complete, except to the extent such costs or expenses arise out of the negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord, its contractors, subcontractors,
employees, agents or representatives. Tenant shall be solely responsible to determine at the site all dimensions of the Premises and the Building which affect any work to be performed by Tenant hereunder. The installation of Tenant’s Property
into the Premises shall be the sole responsibility of Tenant, and any costs associated therewith shall be borne by Tenant. Neither review nor approval by Landlord of any plans or specifications for Tenant’s Work or any other work to be
performed by Tenant shall constitute a representation or warranty by Landlord that any of such plans or specifications either (i) are complete or suitable for their intended purpose, or (ii) comply with applicable laws, ordinances, codes and
regulations. 

  

	12.	 If the actual Phase II Project Costs are less than Twenty Million Dollars ($20,000,000.00), Tenant shall be entitled to receive the difference in such amounts (the
“Savings”). The Savings shall be paid to Tenant in the form of (i) cash payment to Tenant, and/or (ii) abatement of Base Rent and/or Additional Rent, and/or (iii) reduction of Base Rent over all or any portion of the Lease Term, such
determination to be made in Landlord’s sole discretion. Within ninety (90) days after the Commencement Date, Landlord shall deliver to Tenant a statement in sufficient detail summarizing the Phase II 

  

 D-6 

	 	 
Project Costs and the Savings, if any, and in the event of a Savings, the manner in which such Savings shall be paid to Tenant. Tenant shall have the right
to review the invoices and records of Landlord that comprise the Phase II Project Costs. 

  
 [END OF EXHIBIT D] 
  

 D-7 

  
 ATTACHMENT 1

  
 BASE BUILDING PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 

 
 See attached Development Program and Drawings 
  

 D-8 

 DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 
 789 EISENHOWER 
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 
 November 1, 2004 
  
 Transwestern Great Lakes, L.P. (“Owner”) currently owns a 10-story office building with surface parking on a site known as 777 Eisenhower in Ann Arbor, Michigan. Owner intends to develop an approximately 110,000 rentable square
foot, 3-story Class A office building with lower level and two-level parking deck. The project will include a pedestrian bridge between the new building and the existing building as well as site work, infrastructure, landscaping, and parking to
accommodate the new building and parking deck. 
  
 The Base Building design
criteria and program are more specifically described below. 
  
 BUILDING

  
 General 
  

	 	•	 	3-story office building with full lower level 

  

	 	•	 	Approximately 110,000 rentable square feet 

  

	 	•	 	Raised ceiling area on the south side of 3rd floor 

  

	 	•	 	Two-story atrium lobby 

  

	 	•	 	Pedestrian bridge connecting 2nd floors of new
and existing building 

  

	 	•	 	Exterior design to complement the existing building 

  

	 	•	 	ADA compliant 

  

	 	•	 	Meet all applicable codes and regulations 

  

	 	•	 	New building located on Lot B 

  

	 	•	 	Office 

  

	 	1.	On floors 1 – 3 

  

	 	2.	Approximately 36,300 rentable square feet per floor 

  

	 	•	 	Lower Level 

  

	 	1.	Approximately 36,300 square foot floor plate 

  

	 	2.	Contains cafeteria, fitness center, parking, delivery, mechanical, electrical 

  

	 	3.	Approximately 15,000 square foot area (subject to City of Ann Arbor approval) for cafeteria, fitness center, and other tenant-related uses 

  
 Facade 
  

	 	•	 	General 

  

	 	1.	Architectural precast and insulated glass on second and third floor similar to existing building in window pattern and detail. First floor will be treated with continuous glass
storefront. 

  

	 	2.	First Floor Glass – The interior will have a window sill at approximately 2’6” above the floor. Drywall will cover the surface from the floor to the sill. This detail
eliminates the need for perimeter baseboard heat on the first floor. This detail will not affect the exterior. The first floor exterior will be and will appear to be floor to ceiling glass. 

  

			
	Page 1	  	

 DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 
 789 EISENHOWER 
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 
 November 1, 2004 
  

	 	3.	Raised ceiling height on 3rd floor in center of
and on the south side building; approximately a 40’ x 30’ area adjacent to the elevator lobby. 

  

	 	4.	Entrances on north side of building with potential terrace on the south side. 

  

	 	5.	Loading dock/receiving door on east end of lower level 

  

	 	•	 	Precast 

  

	 	1.	Precast color and texture/finish to approximate existing building facade 

  

	 	2.	Architectural panels to accommodate 6’ x 8’ windows for the 2nd and 3rd floors 

  

	 	3.	Exposed foundation wall to be clad with precast panels or concrete finished to “match” precast panels 

  

	 	4.	Decorative cornice around the 3rd floor and on
the raised ceiling area 

  

	 	5.	Caulking – Caulking at precast panel joints and at the intersection of the precast panels and window systems. Caulking will be two lines of continuous silicone-based sealant at
each joint. 

  

	 	6.	Flashing – Pre-finished brake formed sheet metal 

  

	 	•	 	Glass Storefront & Curtainwall 

  

	 	1.	Glass storefront on the ground level and glass curtain wall at center area of building on north and south facades beyond the roof line 

  

	 	2.	6’ x 8’ windows for punched window openings 

  

	 	3.	Bronze color glass to match existing building 

  

	 	4.	Insulated, “low e” energy efficient windows 

  

	 	5.	Mullion color to be compatible with design 

  

	 	•	 	Exterior Doors 

  

	 	1.	Revolving door at front entrance 

  

	 	2.	One pair of insulated glass and aluminum frame doors with hardware at the front and rear entrances 

  

	 	3.	Main entrance to be Handicap Accessible 

  

	 	4.	Additional exterior doors as required to meet code 

  

	 	5.	Doors, glass and framing to match and be part of storefront system 

  
 Causeway 
  

	 	•	 	Exterior Wall – Glass exterior wall with drywall columns 

  

	 	•	 	Ceiling 

  

	 	1.	Suspended acoustical tile 

  

	 	2.	Space above ceiling available for conduit to connect voice/data between 777 and 789 

  

	 	•	 	Floor – Concrete surface ready to receive floor covering 

  

	 	•	 	Fire Protection – Fire and smoke separation doors at each end of the causeway held open by magnetic devices. Doors will close upon signal from the fire alarm. Doors will be
metal and paint-ready. 

  

			
	Page 2	  	

 DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 
 789 EISENHOWER 
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 
 November 1, 2004 
  

 Floor Plates 
  

	 	•	 	Approximately 36,300 square feet per floor, including LL – 3rd floor 

  

	 	•	 	Building width of approximately 113 feet glass line to glass line 

  

	 	•	 	40’-30’-40’ x 30’ structural bay spacing. 

  

	 	•	 	Finished concrete slab 

  
 Structural 
  

	 	•	 	Spread footing foundation or as otherwise specified by the structural engineer 

  

	 	•	 	Reinforced concrete slab for lower level. 

  

	 	•	 	Steel frame with 5 1/4” composite
(concrete filled) metal decking at supported office floors (east portion of first floor, second and third floors) 

  

	 	•	 	Steel framing and with composite decking (concrete filled) at the roof under the Air Handing Units for noise and vibration control. 

  

	 	•	 	Approximately 12’-8” floor-to-floor height to allow for 9’ finished ceiling height. 

  

	 	•	 	Increased height in the raised ceiling area on the 3rd floor to allow for approximately 12’ ceiling height 

  

	 	•	 	100 pound/square foot Live Loading at the supported slabs 

  
 Roof 
  

	 	•	 	Single-ply, fully adhered EPDM membrane roof 

  

	 	•	 	Insulated 

  

	 	•	 	15-year warranty 

  
 Electrical 
  

	 	•	 	277/480 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire electrical service delivered to building 

  

	 	•	 	3,000 amp Main service: 1,200 amp house power and 1,800 amp tenant power 

  

	 	•	 	Tenant power to each floor for lighting, mechanical, and power. 600 amp, 277/480 Volt feed delivered to electrical closet on each floor. A 225 Kva transformer to step down power and
distribution panel provided in electrical closet. 

  

	 	•	 	No building UPS generator is provided. Transwestern will specify location outside of the building and near the electrical room for Tenant to install and to connect a generator at
its cost. 

  

			
	Page 3	  	

 DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 
 789 EISENHOWER 
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 
 November 1, 2004 
  

 Voice/Data 
  

	 	•	 	Single conduit into building for Tenant to pull voice/data cable. Landlord will work with Tenant to provide sleeve for future use. Additional sleeve at Tenant’s cost.

  
 Mechanical 
  

	 	•	 	Four 80-ton roof-mounted mechanical units with economizers and variable drives for economical operation 

  

	 	•	 	Power and gas supplied to roof top Air Handling Units 

  

	 	•	 	Interconnected air handing units to provide redundant cooling for tenant spaces 

  

	 	•	 	Medium pressure duct loop provided on each office floor 

  

	 	•	 	HVAC system controls package will accommodate after-hours cooling on partial floor areas 

  

	 	•	 	AHU’s set on sound attenuation isolator curbs and located over toilet rooms to minimize sound and vibration 

  
 Fire Protection 
  

	 	•	 	Main branch system and alarm per building code requirements. 

  

	 	•	 	Firesafing between facade and floor slab as required 

  
 Plumbing 
  

	 	•	 	Operating base building toilets, lavatories, water fountains, and janitor’s closet 

  

	 	•	 	Water line and vent stack available on each floor for tenant to access. Both are located in the restroom core. Tenant will be able to extend water line and vent stack to other areas
on the floor. 

  

	 	•	 	Foundation – Gravity-driven drainage system 

  

	 	•	 	Basement – Interior drainage in basement 

  

	 	•	 	Sump Alarm – Not required due to gravity drainage 

  

	 	•	 	Oil Separator – Installed to sewer system if required by code. 

  
 Waterproofing 
  

	 	•	 	Basement Walls – Waterproof membrane included 

  

	 	•	 	Elevator Sump Pit – Damp proofing 

  

	 	•	 	Upper Level Bathrooms – Floor drain supplied. No waterproofing necessary. 

  

Elevators 
  

	 	•	 	2 – 3,500 Ib four stop hydraulic passenger elevators 

  

	 	•	 	Elevators to run from the basement to the third floor 

  

	 	•	 	One elevator available for freight use. It will be equipped with buttons/hooks upon which Tenant can hang protective pads. 

  

			
	Page 4	  	

 DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 
 789 EISENHOWER 
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 
 November 1, 2004 
  

	 	•	 	Security – Elevators will be equipped to accept card reader system at Tenant’s cost. Card reader system also at Tenant’s cost. 

  

	 	•	 	Finishes 

  

	 	1.	Wood finish wall panels 

  

	 	2.	Ceramic tile floors 

  

	 	3.	Stainless steel ceiling with down lights 

  

	 	4.	Brushed stainless steel doors (interior and exterior) 

  
 Loading Dock & Lower Level Entrance 
  

	 	•	 	Loading Dock 

  

	 	1.	Located at the southeast corner of the lower level 

  

	 	2.	At Sidewalk level 

  

	 	3.	Double doors in a 6’0” wide by 7’0” high opening 

  

	 	•	 	Lower Level Entrance 

  

	 	1.	8’0”x10’0” manual lift door 

  
 Building Lobby 
  

	 	•	 	Two story atrium lobby finished with a combination of natural stone, carpet inlays, brushed stainless steel, and wood paneling as shown in Wright Architect’s drawings:

  

	 	1.	SK-102604-A1 

  

	 	2.	SK-102604-A2 

  

	 	3.	SK-102604-B1 

  

	 	4.	SK-102604-B2 

  
 Quantities and prices for this lobby are specified as Exhibit I to this Development Program. 
  
 Building Security System – None provided by Landlord. 
  
 Interior Finishes 
  

	 	•	 	Broom-clean floor throughout with completed bathrooms and exit stairs 

  

	 	•	 	Bathrooms 

  

	 	1.	Per code on each floor 

  

	 	2.	Finishes 

  

	 	•	 	Walls 

  

	 	1.	Wet Walls behind Fixtures – Ceramic tile; all floors (2,880 sf @ $9.00 psf) 

  

	 	2.	Walls – Vinyl wall covering; all floors ($1.50 psf) 

  

	 	•	 	Floors – Porcelain ceramic tile; all floors (2,880 sf @ $14.00 psf) 

  

			
	Page 5	  	

 DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 
 789 EISENHOWER 
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 
 November 1, 2004 
  

	 	•	 	Ceilings – Drywall; all floors. Note: Transwestern recommends drywall coves over the toilets and soffits over the lavatories. Then, install 2’x4’ lay in tile in the
remaining ceiling to provide ease of access and maintenance. Price is the same for both options. (2,880 sf @ $1.75 psf) 

  

	 	•	 	Lights – Can lights in drywall ceiling ($225 per light fixture) 

  

	 	•	 	Counter Tops – Granite; all floors (168 If @ $80.00 If) 

  

	 	•	 	Sinks – Under mount vitreous china (24 @ $80 per sink) 

  

	 	•	 	Faucets and Accessories – $7,600 

  

	 	1.	Faucets – Manual faucets (24 @ $50 per unit). 

  

	 	2.	Accessories – Toilet paper dispensers, soap dispensers, recessed paper towel dispenser/waste receptacle, grab bars, sanitary napkins dispensers, stainless steel framed mirrors,
electric hand dryers 

  

	 	•	 	Toilets – Toilets with manual flush ($175 per unit) 

  

	 	•	 	Toilet Partitions – Floor mounted metal partitions; all floors ($7,800) 

  

	 	•	 	Exit Stairs – Interior walls and stairs painted 

  

	 	•	 	Drywall 

  

	 	1.	Elevator Lobbies – Walls and ceilings taped and sanded for LL, 2nd, 3rd floors – finished and painted at first floor lobby 

  

	 	2.	Perimeter Walls – Taped and sanded. Windows framed finished with sills. 

  

	 	3.	Stairwells & Core – Walls facing into the tenant space are taped and sanded 

  

	 	4.	Base Building Finish – Level 4 for those areas which will be painted 

  

	 	•	 	Sound Attenuation 

  

	 	1.	Toilet room, fire stair, and elevator shaft walls built to structure(deck) above 

  

	 	2.	Toilet room, fire stair, and elevator shaft walls filled with batt insulation 

  

			
	Page 6	  	

  
 EXHIBIT I 

2-STORY LOBBY FINISHES (1) 
 DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 
 789 EISENHOWER 
  

												
	 	  	SQ FT

	  	COST PSF

	 	 	TOTAL COST

	  	 
	 1st FLOOR
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 
	 FLOOR
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 
	 GRANITE
	  	707	  	$	25.00	 	 	$	17,675	  	Polished Granite - Main & Elev Lobby
	 CARPET
	  	693	  	$	2.78	 	 	 	1,927	  	$25.00 per Sq Yd
	 WALLS
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 
	 WOOD PANELS
	  	1,320	  	$	20.00	 	 	 	26,400	  	10 ft high Oak or Maple panels
	 CEILING
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 
	 DRYWALL COVES
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	4,500	  	 Coves at walls and elevator lobby
 Painted Drywall
 Downlights washing wood panels

	 2nd FLOOR FRAMING COVER
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 
	 PAINTED DRYWALL
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	5,000	  	At Opening
	 2nd FLOOR
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 
	 STAINLESS STEEL & GLASS RAILING (2)
	  	98	  	$	250.00	 	 	 	24,500	  	 3 sides of opening to curtainwall
 Double Baluster System*

	 DRYWALL CEILING
	  	1,200	  	$	5.50	 	 	 	6,600	  	Painted with downlights
	 HIGH INTENSITY DOWN LIGHTS
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	6,000	  	 
	 	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	
	
	  	 
	 TOTAL SUBCONTRACTOR PRICE
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	92,602	  	 
					
	 OLIVER/HATCHER FEE
	  	 	  	 	5.50	%	 	 	5,093	  	 
	 	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	
	
	  	 
	 TOTAL COST IN BUDGET
	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	97,695	  	 
	 	  	 	  	 	 	 	 	
	
	  	 

  
 NOTES 
  

	1	Quantities and pricing based on Wright Architect drawings: 

  
 SK-102604-A1 
 SK-102604-A2

 SK-102604-B1 
 SK-102604-B2 
  

	2	Railing website www.artec-rail.com 

  

			
	Page 7	  	

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

 

 
  
  

  
 EXHIBIT E

  
 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS 
  
 1. Parking. Tenant, and its employees, guests and invitees, shall have the
exclusive right to utilize the enclosed lower level parking (approximately 37 spaces) to be constructed within the Building, as well as the non-exclusive right to use the Parking Deck (700 spaces). The parties acknowledge that the required parking
ratio for the Premises is based on four (4) spaces per 1,000 rentable square feet, or an aggregate for the Premises under this Lease of 441. Tenant agrees that surplus parking spaces in the Parking Deck over those required for the Premises will be
utilized by Tenant, and other tenants in the Phase I Building, to fulfill a portion of the parking requirements under the Phase I Lease. 
  
 2. Option to Renew. 
  
 A. Tenant shall have the option (but shall not be required) to extend the Lease Term with respect to all (but not less than all) of the Premises for two
(2) additional periods of five (5) years, each (the “Extension Term(s)”). Tenant may elect to exercise such option(s) by written notice received by Landlord not less than eighteen (18) months prior to the expiration of the Lease Term, or
the first Extension Term, as the case may be, time being of the essence for the giving of such notice. During the Extension Term(s), the Lease will continue on the terms and conditions set forth herein, other than the Base Rent, which shall be
adjusted to the current “Market Rental Rate” for the Premises as of the date the applicable Extension Term is to commence with appropriate increases each year thereafter. 
  
 B. Landlord shall advise Tenant of the Market Rental Rate for the applicable Extension Term within twenty (20) days after
the earlier of (i) a request therefore from Tenant, or (ii) Landlord’s receipt of Tenant’s notice exercising a renewal option. Tenant’s failure to timely make such request shall not extend the date upon which Tenant must give notice
of its exercise of the option to renew. Tenant shall have twenty (20) days from the receipt of Landlord’s notice to either accept or dispute Landlord’s determination of the Market Rental Rate. In the event that Tenant disputes
Landlord’s determination, Tenant shall so notify Landlord and advise Landlord of Tenant’s determination of the Market Rental Rate for the Renewal Term. If, after engaging in good faith negotiations, Landlord and Tenant cannot agree upon
the Market Rental Rate within thirty (30) days after Landlord’s receipt of Tenant’s notice of objection to Landlord’s determination of the Market Rental Rate, the “Dispute Resolution Mechanism” described in subparagraph C
below shall apply. 
  
 C. The Dispute Resolution Mechanism shall
be as follows: no later than fifteen (15) days after the end of the 30-day period described in subparagraph B above, Landlord and Tenant shall jointly appoint as arbitrator a commercial real estate broker licensed in Michigan with a minimum of five
(5) years experience in the applicable office market. If Landlord and Tenant 

  

 E-1 

 
cannot agree on an acceptable arbitrator, Landlord and Tenant shall each choose, within an additional fifteen (15) days thereafter, its own arbitrator who
meets the qualifications described above. The arbitrators shall then jointly select, within an additional ten (10) days, an arbitrator to serve as the arbitrator hereunder. If either Landlord or Tenant fails to choose its own arbitrator within said
fifteen (15) day period, then the arbitrator chosen by the other shall resolve the dispute. Within ten (10) days after appointment (whether mutually by the parties, by default of one party to choose an arbitrator, or by selection by the two
arbitrators), Landlord and Tenant shall each submit to the arbitrators) in writing its good faith estimate of the Market Rental Rate for the Extension Term. Within ten (10) days after receipt of the last of the determinations, the arbitrators) shall
choose either Landlord’s or Tenant’s determination of Market Rental Rate. The cost of the arbitrator(s) shall be borne by the party whose determination of the Market Rental Rate was not selected by the arbitrator. 
  
 D. Tenant’s exercise of the foregoing option to renew is subject to the
conditions that (i) the Lease is in full force and effect, (ii) Tenant is not in default hereunder beyond any applicable notice or cure period at the time of notification or at any time after notification and through commencement of the Renewal
Term, (iii) neither the Premises nor any part thereof have been sublet (other than a Permitted Transfer), (iv) Tenant has not assigned the Lease (other than a Permitted Transfer), (v) Tenant is an occupant of the Premises under this Lease and
intends to continue to use the Premises itself, and (vi) that both at the time of notification and commencement there has been no material adverse change in the financial condition of the Tenant since the date of the Lease, as reasonably determined
by Landlord. 
  
 E. For purposes of this Lease, “Market
Rental Rate” shall mean the rental, as of the date for which such Market Rental Rate is being calculated, per annum per rentable square foot, for lease renewals for comparable space of comparable size, which Landlord is offering or prepared to
offer for renewals in good faith at that time to third parties for a similar term for such other space in the Building, as well as in other comparable buildings within a five (5) mile radius of the Property, taking into account prevailing market
conditions. 
  
 F. Landlord shall have no obligation to make
improvements, decorations, repairs, alterations or additions to the Premises as a condition to Tenant’s obligations to pay Rent during the Extension Term(s) unless otherwise agreed to by the parties at the time the amendment set forth below is
executed, other than those repairs, maintenance and/or replacements as may otherwise be the responsibility of Landlord under this Lease. In the event that Tenant exercises the renewal option(s) set forth herein, Landlord and Tenant agree to enter
into an amendment to the Lease incorporating the applicable Extension Term and the Annual and Monthly Base Rent applicable thereto within sixty (60) days following the exercise of the applicable renewal option, but in no event shall a delay in the
full execution of such amendment nullify Tenant’s exercise of the option to renew. 
  

 E-2 

 3. Lower Level Space. 
  
 A. Subject to and upon the terms set forth in this Lease, in addition to the Premises, Tenant shall also lease from Landlord
and Landlord shall lease to Tenant during the Lease Term the Lower Level Space. Commencing on the Commencement Date of this Lease, but following the Free Rent Period, Tenant shall pay Landlord an annual rental rate of $12.00 per square foot,
escalating two percent (2%) per Lease Year (the “Lower Level Rental Rate”) for the use of the Lower Level Space, and without any obligation to pay Additional Rent for the Lower Level Space. The Lower Level Space shall not be
utilized in the calculation of the Rentable Area in the Premises, or Tenant’s Pro Rata Share. The Lower Level Rental Rate shall be paid monthly in advance simultaneously with the payment of Base Rent. At all times during the term of the Lease,
Tenant shall be directly responsible for the payment of all electrical and other utility services to the Lower Level Space. 
  
 B. Landlord shall provide up to but not in excess of $20.00 per square foot in the Lower Level Space (“Lower Level Allowance”) for
Tenant’s use for the purpose of performing improvements and alterations to the Lower Level Space, provided that the Lower Level Allowance shall only apply to those portions of the Lower Level Space for which Landlord or Tenant has received City
approvals for occupancy. No work may be performed prior to Landlord’s written approval of such work and/or the detailed plans of such work, if necessary and available. Any contractors performing work in the Lower Level Space that are not
contracted through Landlord shall be subject to Landlord’s prior approval. If the cost of such work to the Lower Level exceeds the amount of the Lower Level Allowance, Tenant shall be directly responsible for said excess amount or shall pay to
Landlord said excess amount within ten (10) days of Tenant’s receipt of Landlord’s statement of such excess costs. 
  
 C. Except as otherwise provided herein, all of the terms and provisions of the Lease shall also apply to the Lower Level Space as if it were part of the
Premises. 
  
 D. The terms and conditions of this Paragraph 3 are
conditioned on Landlord or Tenant receiving the necessary City approvals for the use and occupancy of the Lower Level Space, or portions thereof. Tenant shall be obligated to pay the Lower Level Rental Rate as of the Commencement Date, but only for
those portions of the Lower Level Space for which Landlord or Tenant has received City approvals for occupancy. Landlord and Tenant shall use commercially reasonable efforts to obtain City approvals for the use and occupancy of the Lower Level Space
on the terms set forth herein. The area of Lower Level Space so leased hereunder, from time to time, may be re-measured at the request of either party, and verified by the other party. 
  
 [END OF EXHIBIT E] 
  

 E-3 

  
 EXHIBIT F

  
 COMMENCEMENT LETTER 
  
 Date
                                     
  
 Tenant
                                 
 Address
                               
 ______________________ 
  

	Re:	Commencement Letter with respect to that certain Lease dated
                     by and between
                                    , as Landlord, and
                                , a(n)
                , as Tenant, for a Rentable Area in the Premises of
                 square feet on the                  floor of the Building
located at                                 ,
            ,         . 

  
 Dear
                                : 
  
 In accordance with the terms and conditions of the above referenced Lease,
Tenant hereby accepts possession of the Premises and agrees as follows: 
  
 The Commencement Date of the Lease is
                                        
            . 
  
 The Expiration Date of the Lease is
                                        
            . 
  
 Tenant shall pay the following amounts as Base Rent for the Premises: 
  
 [Insert rent schedule with dates] 
  
 Landlord agrees to complete the work in the Premises identified in the punchlist jointly prepared by Landlord and Tenant dated
                            . Tenant accepts possession of the Premises subject to Landlord’s
obligation to complete the work identified on the punchlist. 
  
 Please acknowledge your acceptance of possession and agreement to the terms set forth above by signing all three (3) copies of this Commencement Letter in the space provided and returning two (2) fully executed copies of the same to my
attention. 
  

			
	 Sincerely,

	
	 XXXXXXXXX
 Property Manager

	
	 Agreed and Accepted:

	
	 TENANT:

		
	By:	 	 

			
	 Name:
	 	 

			
	 Title:
	 	 

  

 F-1Master Service Agreement

 Exhibit 10.21 
  
 MASTER SERVICES AGREEMENT 
  
 THIS MASTER SERVICES AGREEMENT (the “MSA”), effective as of January 01, 2005 (the “Effective Date”), is made and
entered into by and between ProQuest Company, a Delaware corporation having its principal offices at 300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48106 (“Client Parent”), and International Business Machines Corporation, a New York corporation
having its principal offices at Route 100, Somers, New York 10589 (“Supplier Parent”). 
  
 RECITALS 
  
 WHEREAS, Client Parent and Supplier Parent have engaged in extensive negotiations, discussions and due diligence that have culminated in the formation of the contractual relationship described in this MSA; and 
  
 WHEREAS, Client Parent desires to procure from Supplier Parent, and Supplier
Parent desires to provide to Client Parent, the information technology products and services described in this MSA and in Service Agreements entered to by the Parties from time to time under this MSA, on the terms and conditions specified herein;

  
 NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and
agreements herein contained, and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the Parties hereby agree as follows: 
  
 ARTICLE I. 
  
 INTRODUCTORY PROVISIONS 
  
 1.1 Scope of Agreement. This MSA establishes a contractual framework for Supplier’s provision of Services under Service Agreements worldwide.
In order to provide a uniform mechanism for implementing the principles of this MSA, the provisions of this MSA, as between Supplier Parent and Client Parent, shall be applicable worldwide and shall be implemented by Client Parent and Supplier
Parent, and their respective domestic and foreign subsidiaries and business units, entering into Service Agreements which incorporate the principles of the applicable provisions of this MSA, modified as may be necessary by reason of local Laws or
commercial custom. Client Parent and Supplier Parent each acknowledge and understand that their respective subsidiaries are not parties to this MSA and will not be legally bound by the provisions of this MSA unless and until they agree to be so
bound. However, during any period and to the extent that a locally appropriate Service Agreement for any such Services is not then currently in effect, Client Parent and Supplier Parent shall each remain obligated to the other for the performance of
the respective obligations of Client and Supplier stated herein. 
  
 1.2 Definitions. 
  
 (a) As used
in this MSA, the terms set forth in Exhibit A shall have the respective meanings set forth therein. 
  
 (b) The term “Client Direct Competitor” means the Entities described in an applicable Statement of Work and the
Affiliates and successors in interest of such Entities, as may be updated by Client from time to time upon written notice to Supplier. 
  
 (c) The term “Contracting Party” shall mean (1) with respect to this MSA, Client Parent or Supplier Parent, and (2) with
respect to any Service Agreement, the Client Contracting Party receiving Services pursuant to the Service Agreement or the Supplier Contracting Party providing such Services. 
  

 (d) The term “Service Agreement” shall mean any written agreement, as
provided for in Section 2.1 hereof, that is entered into between a Client Contracting Party and a Supplier Contracting Party for the provision of Services to that Client Contracting Party by the Supplier Contracting Party. 
  
 Other terms used in this MSA are defined in the context in which they are
used and, unless otherwise specified herein, shall have the meanings there indicated wherever they are used in this MSA. 
  
 1.3 Term. 
  
 (a) The term of this MSA shall commence as of the Effective Date and shall continue until the expiration of an initial term of five (5)
years. The term of this MSA may be extended for an additional term upon mutual agreement by Client Parent and Supplier Parent prior to the end of the initial term. 
  
 (b) Service Agreement terms which extend beyond the term of this MSA shall be subject to the approval of the
Corporate Contract Managers. If this MSA expires or is terminated, Client Parent and Supplier Parent will not enforce any Service Agreement term which purports to extend beyond the expiration or termination of this MSA unless such extension is or
has been mutually agreed upon by the Corporate Contract Managers. With respect to any Service Agreement which survives expiration or termination of this MSA (as a result of such approval by the Corporate Contract Managers), the provisions of this
MSA that have been incorporated into such Service Agreement shall remain valid provisions of that Service Agreement unless and until the Contracting Parties thereto otherwise agree, notwithstanding termination of this MSA. 
  
 1.4 Applicability of Terms and Conditions. The Terms and Conditions
set forth in Exhibit B hereto are intended to be applicable to both this MSA and each Service Agreement and, when used in connection with a Service Agreement, a reference to the applicable provisions of this MSA shall be considered a
reference to the provisions of Exhibit B hereto, except to the extent that any such provisions are expressly modified or excluded therefrom in a Service Agreement. 
  
 1.5 Fundamental Principle of Good Faith and Fair Dealing. In entering into this MSA, Client Parent and Supplier
Parent each acknowledge and agree that all aspects of the worldwide business relationship and dealings between Client and Supplier contemplated by this MSA and each Service Agreement, including the performance of all obligations and the exercise of
all rights under this MSA and each Service Agreement, will be governed by the fundamental principle of good faith and fair dealing. Client Parent and Supplier Parent shall assure that each Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party,
respectively, complies with this principle of good faith and fair dealing. 
  
 ARTICLE II. 
  
 SERVICE
AGREEMENTS 
  
 2.1 Service Agreements. As of the
Effective Date, each Client Contracting Party and the corresponding Supplier Contracting Party have agreed upon and entered into or shall, as soon as practicable, agree upon and enter into one or more Service Agreements for the performance of
Services for that Client Contracting Party on mutually agreeable terms and conditions, subject to the limitations set forth in this MSA. If and to the extent applicable, each such Service Agreement shall: 
  
 (a) Refer to this MSA, which reference shall be deemed to
incorporate into the Service Agreement the applicable provisions of this MSA. 
  
 (b) Designate the date as of which the provisions of the Service Agreement will be effective and the term or period of time during which Supplier will perform Services pursuant to the Service Agreement. 
  

 (c) Describe the obligations of Supplier related to the Service Agreement, including any
Hardware or Materials to be delivered and any Services to be performed by Supplier pursuant to the Service Agreement, together with the general performance standards and related provisions agreed to by the Parties. 
  
 (d) Describe the obligations of Client related to the
Service Agreement, including without limitation any space, facilities, Hardware, Materials, Client Assets or other support to be provided by Client. 
  
 (e) Specify the mutually agreed upon pricing structure, method and amounts of payment to be made to Supplier for the Services performed
pursuant to the Service Agreement. 
  
 (f)
Establish specific measurable standards of performance applicable to Supplier’s performance under the Service Agreement, such as function point analysis for application software development and Hardware and Software availability standards, as
well as related remedies and rewards available if the Supplier Contracting Party’s performance fails to meet or exceeds those performance standards. Any such remedies and rewards shall be designed to incent and reward good performance and not
to distort the intended economic effects of the Service Agreement. 
  
 (g) Identify any provisions of the Terms and Conditions that are expressly excluded from the Service Agreement and any provisions of the Service Agreement that shall supersede and prevail over any conflicting or
inconsistent provisions of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 (h) Include any other provisions deemed necessary or desirable by the Contracting Parties to the Service Agreement, such as, but not limited to, provisions enabling the Service Agreement to conform to the requirements of any applicable
local Laws and government contracting requirements. 
  
 The
general format for each Service Agreement is set forth in Exhibit C to this MSA. 
  
 2.2 Service Agreement Objectives. Each applicable Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party will negotiate in good faith to agree upon and enter into Service Agreements under this MSA. 

 
 2.3 Continued Services to Divested Business Units. In any situation
where an existing Service Agreement does not accommodate the continued provision of Services to a divested Client business unit, Supplier will negotiate in good faith with the divested Client business unit to either enter into an agreement pursuant
to which Supplier will continue providing services to the divested Client business unit on such terms and conditions as may be mutually agreed upon by Supplier and the divested Client business units. 
  
 ARTICLE III. 
  
 OPERATIONAL PROVISIONS 
  
 3.1 Client/Supplier Relationship. Client Parent and Supplier Parent
will establish a group, which will include the Corporate Contract Managers and other executive key to the Client/Supplier relationship as may be designated by each Party, to ensure that the Parties are acting in a manner consistent with the
principles of this MSA, and to address any issues that may arise in connection with this MSA. 
  
 3.2 Information Technology Strategy and Architecture. The respective roles and responsibilities of Client and Supplier in connection with the performance of the Services pursuant to the Service Agreements will
be governed by the following: 
  
 (a) Client will
be responsible for, and will decide and direct, its information technology strategies and requirements, including Client’s computing and communications architecture. 

  

 
This includes Client’s right (1) to develop, maintain and publish technology standards that support the implementation of Client’s architecture,
and architecture and technology compliance processes, and (2) to identify and select vendors of hardware and software used by Supplier to provide Services that are performed for Client on a dedicated basis. In this regard, Supplier will cooperate,
as reasonably requested by Client, in preparing and updating any such strategies and requirements. 
  
 (b) Supplier will be responsible for, and will decide and direct, its performance of the Services in furtherance of Client’s
information technology strategies and requirements, and will retain specific responsibility for the computing and communications architecture and technology at the Supplier Sites. 
  
 (c) In managing its own functions and operations in performing the Services, Supplier will consult with
Client and take into account Client’s legitimate suggestions and concerns regarding the delivery of the Services. 
  
 3.3 Contract Administration. Client Parent and Supplier Parent shall each designate a Corporate Contract Manager who shall be responsible for,
among other things: 
  
 (a) The implementation,
management and enforcement of this MSA on behalf of that Parent, including overall management of its performance under this MSA. 
  
 (b) Exercising day-to-day responsibility for achieving resolution of corporate-wide issues relating to this MSA or the Service Agreements.

  
 (c) Working with the Contract Managers
designated under each Service Agreement to establish, where appropriate, uniform policies applicable to the Services provided to Client by Supplier. 
  
 (d) Interfacing with any committees or other bodies of that Parent with responsibility for reviewing or approving any matters relating to
this MSA or the Service Agreements and otherwise satisfying any administrative requirements internally required by that Parent. 
  
 (e) Monitoring the activities of the Contract Managers designated under each Service Agreement, as applicable, of that Parent. 

 
 The Supplier Corporate Contract manager shall be considered a Key Employee
and the provisions related to Key Employees set forth in the Terms and Conditions shall apply with respect to the designated individual. 
  
 ARTICLE IV. 
  
 GENERAL PROVISIONS 
  
 4.1 Termination of MSA. This MSA may be terminated as follows: 
  
 (a) In the event either Supplier Parent or Client Parent defaults in the performance of any of its duties or obligations that are material
in the context of the overall relationship between Client and Supplier and fails to cure such default within thirty (30) days after being given written notice specifying the default, or, with respect to any default which cannot reasonably be cured
within thirty (30) days, if the defaulting Party fails to provide, promptly after being given written notice specifying the default, a specific written action plan for curing the default as expeditiously as reasonably possible, including a specified
schedule for the action plan and a mutually agreed upon end date by which the action plan is to be completed and the default cured, and to proceed utilizing its reasonable best efforts to cure the default in accordance with and on the schedule
specified in the action plan, then the Party not in default may, by giving written notice thereof to the defaulting Party, terminate this MSA as of a date specified in such notice of termination. Additionally, in the event that the defaulting Party
fails to cure the 

  

 
default by the mutually agreed upon end date as set forth in the action plan, the Party not in default may, by giving written notice thereof to the
defaulting Party, immediately terminate this MSA. 
  
 (b) In the event that either Party is unable to pay its debts generally as they come due or is declared insolvent or bankrupt, is the subject of any proceedings relating to its liquidation, insolvency or for the appointment of a receiver or
similar officer for it, makes an assignment for the benefit of all or substantially all of its creditors, or enters into an agreement for the composition, extension, or readjustment of all or substantially all of its obligations, then the other
Party hereto may, by giving written notice thereof to such Party, terminate this MSA as of a date specified in such notice of termination. 
  
 (c) Expiration or termination of this MSA shall not relieve the Parties of their respective obligations which survive expiration or
termination under the Terms and Conditions, including, without limitation, any obligation to provide Termination Assistance Services. 
  
 4.2 Amendment or Modification. This MSA may be amended or modified upon mutual agreement of Client Parent and Supplier Parent; provided, however,
such amendment or modification shall only be effective if made in writing by the Corporate Contract Managers or other authorized representatives of Client Parent and Supplier Parent. 
  
 4.3 Incorporation of Exhibits. The provisions of the Exhibits hereto are hereby incorporated into and made a part of
this MSA for all purposes. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Exhibit B hereto, for purposes of these provisions as incorporated into this MSA (a) the Effective Date shall mean the Effective Date of this MSA, (b) the Contracting
Parties shall mean Client Parent and Supplier Parent, and (c) the Contract Managers of the Contracting Parties shall mean the Client and Supplier Corporate Contract Managers. 
  
 4.4 Governing Law. This MSA shall be governed by the laws of the State of Michigan without regard to the principles
of conflict of laws. 
  
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties
hereto, by their duly authorized representatives, have executed this MSA effective as of the Effective Date first above written. 
  

									
	INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION	 	 	 	 PROQUEST COMPANY

					
	By:	 	 	 	 	 	By:	 	 
					
	 (Print):
	 	 	 	 	 	 (Print):
	 	 
					
	 Title:
	 	 	 	 	 	 Title:
	 	 
					
	 Date:
	 	 	 	 	 	 Date:
	 	 

  

  
 EXHIBIT A 

 
 to the 
  
 MASTER SERVICES AGREEMENT 
  
 DEFINITIONS 
  
 The terms defined in this Exhibit include the plural as well as the singular. Unless otherwise expressly stated, the words “herein,”
“hereof,” and “hereunder” and other words of similar import refer to the MSA as a whole and not to any particular Article, Section, Subsection or other subdivision. Article, Section, Subsection, Exhibit and Schedule references
refer to articles, sections and subsections of, and schedules to, the MSA. The words “include” and “including” shall not be construed as terms of limitation. The word “or” shall mean “and/or” unless the
context requires otherwise. The words “day,” “month,” and “year” mean, respectively, calendar day, calendar month and calendar year, and the words “writing” or “written” mean preserved or presented
in retrievable or reproducible written form. Except as provided in the MSA, “writing” or “written” may mean electronic (including E-mail transmissions where receipt is acknowledged by the recipient, but excluding voice-mail), or
hard copy, including by facsimile (with acknowledgment of receipt from the recipient’s facsimile machine) unless otherwise stated. Other terms used in the MSA or any Service Agreement entered into under the MSA are defined in the context in
which they are used and shall have the meanings there indicated. 
  
 “Act” shall have the meaning given in Section 4.12.h of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Acquired Assets” means the Hardware, Software and other assets owned or controlled by Client and listed in a Service Agreement that
Supplier will acquire as of the Effective Date. 
  
 “Acquired Assets Credit” means the amount set forth in a Service Agreement that Supplier will pay to Client as consideration for the Acquired Assets. 
  
 “Additional Resource Charge” is the charge for additional utilization of a predefined Service or resource
in excess of the defined Resource Baseline volume, as set forth in a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Affiliate” shall mean, generally, with respect to any Entity, any other Entity Controlling, Controlled by or under common Control with such Entity. 
  
 “Benchmarker” shall have the meaning given in the Statement
of Work. 
  
 “Benchmarking” shall have the
meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Cause” shall mean the flagrant disregard of the rules and regulations of Supplier; insubordination, negligence, or misconduct as defined in Supplier’s human resource policies and procedures; or commission of a felony.

  
 “Change” shall have the meaning given in
Section 10.2 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Change Control Procedures” shall have the meaning given in Section 10.2 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Charges” shall have the meaning given in Section 17.1 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  

 “Claim” shall have the meaning given in Section 27.5 of the Terms and Conditions.

  
 “Client” shall mean Client Contracting Party
and any related Entities that have entered into any applicable Service Agreements or that are receiving any of the Services. 
  
 “Client Agents” shall mean the subcontractors, consultants, representatives, agents and suppliers of Client (other than Supplier and
those subcontractors, agents and suppliers acting for or on behalf of Supplier). 
  
 “Client Assets” shall have the meaning given in Section 12.3 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Client Confidential Information” shall mean any information of a confidential or proprietary nature received by Supplier, directly or
indirectly, from Client, or acquired or developed pursuant to the provision of the Services, including, but not limited to, business affairs, data, designs, manuals, training materials and documentation, formulas, ideas, inventions, knowledge of
manufacturing processes, mask-works, methods, prices, financial and accounting data, products and product specifications, systems, and technical information and the terms of the Agreement. 
  
 “Client Contracting Party” shall mean the Client Entity that
enters into a Service Agreement and is identified as such therein. 
  
 “Client Contract Manager” shall have the meaning given in Section 12.1 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Client Consents” shall have the meaning given in Section 14.1.b.3. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Client Data” shall have the meaning given in Section
15.1 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Client
Hardware” shall mean the Hardware owned or leased by, or under the control of, Client or a Client Agent. 
  
 “Client Sites” shall mean the facilities or sites owned or leased by, or under the control of, Client or a Client Agent. 
  
 “Client Materials” shall mean the Client Proprietary
Materials and the Client Third Party Materials, collectively. 
  
 “Client Personnel” means the employees, agents, contractors or representatives of Client who are listed in a schedule to a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Client Proprietary Materials” shall have the meaning given in Section 13.1.a. of the Terms
and Conditions. 
  
 “Client Third Party
Materials” shall have the meaning given in Section 13.1.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Confidential Information” shall mean Client Confidential Information and Supplier Confidential Information, collectively. 
  
 “Contracting Party” shall mean Client Contracting Party or
Supplier Contracting Party, as the case may be. 
  

 “Control” and its derivatives shall mean the legal, beneficial, or equitable ownership,
directly or indirectly, of at least 50% of the aggregate of all voting equity interests in an Entity or equity interests having the right to at least 50% of the profits of an Entity or, in the event of dissolution, to at least 50% of the assets of
an Entity and, in the case of a partnership, also includes the holding by an Entity (or one of its Affiliates) of the position of sole general partner. 
  
 “Corporate Contract Manager” shall have the meaning given in the MSA. 
  
 “Critical Systems” shall mean the systems identified as critical in a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Designated Services” shall have the meaning given in
Section 4.1.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Developed Materials” shall mean the Materials developed and written by or on behalf of Supplier and/or Supplier Agents for Client pursuant to the provision of the Services unless agreed otherwise between Client and
Supplier as a specific amendment to a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Disclosing Party” shall have the meaning given in Section 15.6.c. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Direct Client Competitors” shall mean the Entities identified in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Direct Damages Cap” shall have the meaning given in
Section 27.6 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Documentation” shall mean the user guides, operating manuals, education materials, product descriptions and specifications, technical manuals, supporting materials, and other information relating to the Software or used in
conjunction with the Services, whether distributed in print, magnetic, electronic, or video format. 
  
 “Effective Date” shall have the meaning set forth in the applicable Service Agreement. 
  
 “Employment Effective Date” shall have the meaning given in
the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Entity” shall
mean a corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, limited liability company, limited partnership, limited liability partnership, governmental agency, association or other organization or Entity. 
  
 “Expiration Date” shall have the meaning set forth in the
applicable Service Agreement. 
  
 “Force Majeure
Event” shall have the meaning given in Section 16.2 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Hardware” shall mean the computers and related equipment used in connection with the provision of the Services, including central
processing units and other processors, controllers, modems, communications and telecommunications equipment (voice, data and video), cables, storage devices, printers, terminals, other peripherals and input and output devices, and other tangible
mechanical and electronic equipment intended for the processing, input, output, storage, manipulation, communication, transmission and retrieval of information and data. 
  
 “Illicit Code” shall mean any hidden files, any automatically replicating, transmitting or activating
computer program, any virus (or other malicious computer program), or any Hardware-limiting, Software-limiting or Services-limiting function (including, but not limited to, node lock, time-out or other similar functions), whether implemented by
electronic or other means. 
  

 “Indemnified Party” shall have the meaning given in Section 27.5 of the Terms and
Conditions. 
  
 “Indemnifying Party” shall have
the meaning given in Section 27.5 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Initial Term” shall have the meaning given in Section 2.1 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Intellectual Property” is defined in the definition for Work Product below. 
  
 “Key Employees(s)” shall have the meaning given in the
Statement of Work. 
  
 “Laws” shall mean all
federal, provincial, state and local laws, statutes, regulations, rules, executive orders, government directives, government circulars, or binding pronouncements of or by any government (including any department or agency thereof) having
jurisdictional authority over a Party. 
  
 “Losses” shall mean all losses, liabilities, damages and claims (including taxes), and all related costs and expenses (including reasonable legal fees and disbursements and costs of investigation, litigation, settlement,
judgment, interest and penalties). 
  
 “Materials” shall mean Intellectual Property and Software. 
  
 “MSA” shall mean the Master Services Agreement, including all exhibits and schedules attached thereto. 
  
 “Net Book Value” shall mean the original asset value less any accumulated amortization or depreciation (as calculated under the rules of
generally accepted accounting principles in the United States). 
  
 “Non-Solicitation Period” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Official Action” shall have the meaning given in Section 4.13.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Parties” shall mean Client and Supplier, collectively, and
each of Supplier and Client may be referred to as a “Party.” 
  
 “Performance” shall mean that the Transitioned Employee’s level of performance is at a level that would justify dismissal under the human resource policies of Supplier. 
  
 “Personal Information” shall mean any individually
identifiable information from or about an individual consumer, or information, when associated with other information in the hands of or available to, supplier, including, but not limited to (a) first & last name; (b) a home address or other
physical address, including street name and name of city or town; (c) an email address or other online contact information (e.g., instant messaging user identifier); (d) a telephone number; (e) a social security number or other government-issues
personal identifier such as a tax identification number; (f) an Internet Protocol address; (g) a persistent identifier (e.g., a unique customer number in a cookie); and (h) any other information that is combined with any of the above. 
  
 “Policy and Procedures Manual” shall have the meaning given
in Section 4.10.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Privileged Work Product” shall have the meaning given in Section 15.7 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Project Managers” shall mean the Client and Supplier project or systems operations managers for the applicable project or system.

  

 “Project Staff “ shall mean the individuals appointed by Supplier to provide the
Services. 
  
 “Receiving Party” shall have the
meaning given in Section 15.6.c. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Reduced Resource Credit” is the credit for reduced utilization of a predefined Service or resource below the defined Resource Baseline volume, as set forth in a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Renewal Term” shall have the meaning given in Section
2.2 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Resource
Baselines” are the annual volumes of specific resources or Services expected to be delivered or performed by Supplier under a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Resource Unit” means a particular unit of resource, as described in a Service Agreement, which is measured to determine Client’s
actual utilization of such resource compared to the applicable Resource Baseline for purposes of calculating Additional Resource Charges and Reduced Resource Credits under the applicable Service Agreement. 
  
 “Root Cause Analysis” is a formal process that diagnoses
systemic, catastrophic or other problems at the lowest reasonable level necessary to establish the cause of such problems. 
  
 “Service Agreement” shall mean an agreement entered into by Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party for the provision of
certain services that refers to and incorporates the MSA and the Terms and Conditions, and as may be amended during the Term. A Service Agreement shall consist of the Statement of Work (SOW) and its Schedules. 
  
 “Service Levels” shall have the meaning given in the
Statement of Work. 
  
 “Service Level Credits”
shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Services” shall mean the Designated Services and the Supplemental Services. 
  
 “Schedules” shall mean the Schedules expressly referenced in and attached to a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Sites” shall mean the Client Sites and the Supplier Sites,
collectively. 
  
 “Software” shall mean the
Source Code and object code versions of any applications programs, operating system software, computer software languages, utilities and other computer programs (i.e., any set of statements or instructions to be used directly or indirectly in a
computer in order to bring about a certain result), and documentation and supporting materials relating thereto, in whatever form or media, used or developed in connection with the provision of the Services, including the tangible media upon which
such applications programs, operating system software, computer software languages, utilities and other computer programs, and documentation and supporting materials relating thereto are recorded or printed, together with all corrections,
improvements, updates and releases thereof. 
  
 “Source
Code” means a human-readable copy of the source code (the computer instructions in human readable computer language) to the Software and the Developed Materials, plus any pertinent commentary or explanation that may be used by
Supplier’s programmers, although not necessarily those incorporating the program, and shall include Documentation, statements or principles of operation, and schematics, all as necessary or useful for the effective understanding, maintenance
and use of the Source Code. To the extent that the development environment employed by Supplier for the development, maintenance, compilation, and implementation of the Source Code includes any device, programming, or Documentation not commercially
available to Client on reasonable terms through readily 

  

 
known sources other than Supplier, the Source Code shall include all such devices, programming, or Documentation. The foregoing reference to such development
environment is intended to apply to any programs, including compilers, workbenches, tools, and high-level (or proprietary) languages, used by Supplier for the development, maintenance, and implementation of the Source Code. 
  
 “Specialized Services” shall have the meaning given in the
Statement of Work. 
  
 “Specifications”
shall mean any specifications for Services, Hardware or Materials that are agreed upon by Client and Supplier, as set forth in a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Supplemental Services” shall have the meaning given in Section 4.2.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Supplier” shall mean Supplier Contracting Party and any
related Entities that have entered into any applicable Service Agreements or that are providing any of the Services. 
  
 “Supplier Administered Agreements” shall have the meaning given in Section 7.3.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Supplier Agents” shall mean the subcontractors,
consultants, representatives, agents and suppliers of Supplier. 
  
 “Supplier Confidential Information” shall mean any information of a confidential or proprietary nature that is received and approved by Client in accordance with Section 15.6.d. of the Terms and Conditions.

  
 “Supplier Consents” shall have the meaning
given in Section 14.1.a.2. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Supplier Contract Manager” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Supplier Contracting Party” shall mean the Supplier Entity that enters into a Service Agreement and is identified as such therein.

  
 “Supplier Hardware” shall mean the Hardware
owned or leased by Supplier. 
  
 “Supplier
Materials” shall mean the Supplier Proprietary Materials and the Supplier Third Party Materials, collectively. 
  
 “Supplier’s Pension Plan” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Supplier Proprietary Materials” shall have the meaning
given in Section 13.2.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Supplier Reimbursement Account Plan” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Supplier Savings Plan” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Supplier Sites” shall mean the facilities or sites owned,
leased or under the control of, Supplier or a Supplier Agent. 
  
 “Supplier Third Party Materials” shall have the meaning given in Section 13.3.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  

 “Supplier Tools” shall mean Supplier and third party tool kits used by Supplier to
provide the Services and needed by Client for ongoing execution and delivery thereof. 
  
 “Taxes” shall mean any value-added, country or local sales, use or similar taxes imposed by and collected on behalf of any taxing authority and any telecommunications excise taxes, except taxes on net
income of a Party. 
  
 “Term” shall mean the
Initial Term and the Renewal Terms, if any, under a Service Agreement. 
  
 “Termination Assistance Period” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Termination Assistance Services” shall have the meaning given in Section 25.1 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Terms and Conditions” shall mean the Terms and Conditions
attached to the MSA as Exhibit B. 
  
 “Third Party
Agreements” shall have the meaning given in Section 7.1 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Third Party Approval” shall have the meaning given in Section 4.13.a. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Third Party Services” shall have the meaning given in
Section 5.1.a.4. of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “Transitioned Employees” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Transition Plan” shall have the meaning given in Section 8.1 of the Terms and Conditions. 
  
 “WARN Act” shall mean the federal Worker Adjustment and
Retraining Notification Act, as amended, together with all implementing regulations. 
  
 “Welfare Plans” shall have the meaning given in the Statement of Work. 
  
 “Work Product” shall mean all of the following: (a) patents, patent applications, inventions, designs, mask works, processes,
methodologies, copyrights and copyrightable works, trade secrets including confidential information, data, designs, manuals, training materials and documentation, formulas, knowledge of manufacturing processes, methods, prices, financial and
accounting data, products and product specifications and all other intellectual property rights, as the foregoing terms are understood under United States law (collectively “Intellectual Property”), created, developed or prepared,
documented and/or delivered by Supplier, pursuant to the provision of the Services, including, but not limited to, all modifications or enhancements to Client Confidential Information and Client Materials and all manuals, training materials and
documentation relating to the Materials; and (b) Developed Materials (including all Intellectual Property related thereto); but in each case excluding the skill and knowledge of Supplier’s employees and Supplier Agents resulting from the
provision of the Services. 
  

  
 EXHIBIT B 

 
 TERMS AND CONDITIONS 
 FOR 
 INCORPORATION INTO

 SERVICE AGREEMENTS 

  
 Table of Contents

  

					
	 Section

	  	 Headings

	  	Page

	 1.0
	  	GENERAL PROVISIONS	  	6
	 1.1
	  	 Incorporation into Service Agreements
	  	6
	 1.2
	  	 Conflicts
	  	6
			
	 2.0
	  	TERM AND RENEWAL	  	6
	 2.1
	  	 Initial Term
	  	6
	 2.2
	  	 Renewal Term
	  	6
	 2.3
	  	 Expiration of Term of Master Services Agreement
	  	6
			
	 3.0
	  	STRATEGIC CONTROL	  	7
	 3.1
	  	 Retention of Strategic Control
	  	7
	 3.2
	  	 Implementation of Strategic Control
	  	7
	 3.3
	  	 Supplier’s Obligations
	  	7
	 3.4
	  	 Technology Changes
	  	7
	 3.5
	  	 Architecture, Standards and Information Technology Planning
	  	7
			
	 4.0
	  	SERVICES	  	8
	 4.1
	  	 Designated Services
	  	8
	 4.2
	  	 Supplemental Services
	  	8
	 4.3
	  	 Provision of Services
	  	9
	 4.4
	  	 Changes to the Services
	  	9
	 4.5
	  	 Hardware
	  	9
	 4.6
	  	 Materials
	  	9
	 4.7
	  	 Communication Services
	  	10
	 4.8
	  	 Use of Client Hardware and Client Materials
	  	10
	 4.9
	  	 Productivity and Management Tools
	  	10
	 4.10
	  	 Policy and Procedures Manual
	  	10
	 4.11
	  	 Regulatory Licenses and Permits
	  	11
	 4.12
	  	 Laws
	  	11
	 4.13
	  	 Conditions Precedent
	  	12
			
	 5.0
	  	THIRD PARTY SERVICES	  	13
	 5.1
	  	 Third Party Services
	  	13
	 5.2
	  	 Access to Third Party Suppliers
	  	14
			
	 6.0
	  	MATERIALS DEVELOPMENT AND INTEGRATION SERVICES	  	14
	 6.1
	  	 Services
	  	14
	 6.2
	  	 Third Party Packages
	  	14
	 6.3
	  	 Additional Third Party Materials
	  	14
	 6.4
	  	 Delivery Requirements
	  	14
	 6.5
	  	 Acceptance of Developed Materials
	  	15
	 6.6
	  	 Development Metrics
	  	15
	 6.7
	  	 Reports
	  	15
			
	 7.0
	  	THIRD PARTY AGREEMENTS	  	15
	 7.1
	  	 Third Party Agreements
	  	15
	 7.2
	  	 Performance under Third Party Agreements
	  	16
	 7.3
	  	 Supplier Administered Agreements
	  	16
			
	 8.0
	  	TRANSITION	  	16
	 8.1
	  	 Contents of Transition Plan
	  	16
	 8.2
	  	 Reports
	  	16
	 8.3
	  	 Service Levels and Business Continuity
	  	17

  

					
			
	 9.0
	  	SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT	  	17
	 9.1
	  	 Service Level Agreement
	  	17
	 9.2
	  	 Service Level Credits
	  	17
	 9.3
	  	 Benchmarking
	  	17
			
	 10.0
	  	CONTRACT MANAGEMENT	  	17
	 10.1
	  	 Change Requests
	  	17
	 10.2
	  	 Change Control Procedures
	  	18
			
	 11.0
	  	Reserved	  	18
			
	 12.0
	  	CLIENT RESPONSIBILITIES AND ASSETS	  	18
	 12.1
	  	 Client Contract Manager
	  	18
	 12.2
	  	 Provision of Premises
	  	18
	 12.3
	  	 Client Assets
	  	18
			
	 13.0
	  	PROPRIETARY RIGHTS	  	19
	 13.1
	  	 Client Materials
	  	19
	 13.2
	  	 Supplier Proprietary Materials
	  	19
	 13.3
	  	 Supplier Third Party Materials
	  	20
	 13.4
	  	 Work Product
	  	20
	 13.5
	  	 Changes and Upgrades to Materials
	  	21
	 13.6
	  	 Supplier Tools
	  	21
			
	 14.0
	  	CONSENTS	  	22
	 14.1
	  	 Supplier and Client Consents
	  	22
			
	 15.0
	  	DATA PROTECTION AND SECURITY	  	22
	 15.1
	  	 Client Data
	  	22
	 15.2
	  	 Return or Destruction of Data
	  	22
	 15.3
	  	 Data Security
	  	23
	 15.4
	  	 Sites
	  	23
	 15.5
	  	 Security Procedures
	  	23
	 15.6
	  	 Confidentiality
	  	23
	 15.7
	  	 Legal Professional Privilege
	  	24
	 15.8
	  	 Media Releases/Publicity
	  	25
	 15.9
	  	 Unauthorized Access
	  	25
	 15.10
	  	 Direct Client Competitors
	  	25
			
	 16.0
	  	CONTINUED PROVISION OF SERVICES	  	26
	 16.1
	  	 Business Continuity
	  	26
	 16.2
	  	 Force Majeure
	  	27
	 16.3
	  	 Allocation of Resources
	  	27
			
	 17.0
	  	SUPPLIER COMPENSATION	  	27
	 17.1
	  	 Charges
	  	27
	 17.2
	  	 Expenses
	  	27
	 17.3
	  	 Pricing Methodology
	  	28
	 17.4
	  	 Cost of Living Adjustment
	  	28
	 17.5
	  	 Proration
	  	28
	 17.6
	  	 Recurring Costs
	  	28
	 17.7
	  	 Supplier’s Efforts to Minimize Charges
	  	28
			
	 18.0
	  	PAYMENT PROCEDURES	  	28
	 18.1
	  	 Pricing Detail
	  	28
	 18.2
	  	 Invoicing
	  	29

  

					
	 18.3
	  	 Supporting Documentation
	  	29
	 18.4
	  	 Payment
	  	29
	 18.5
	  	 Fee Disputes
	  	29
			
	 19.0
	  	TAXES FOR SERVICES PERFORMED IN THE U.S.	  	30
	 19.1
	  	 Information
	  	30
	 19.2
	  	 Taxes
	  	30
	 19.3
	  	 Structure
	  	30
	 19.4
	  	 Payment
	  	30
	 19.5
	  	 Tax Credit
	  	30
	 19.6
	  	 Cooperation
	  	31
	 19.7
	  	 Segregation of Payment Streams
	  	31
			
	 20.0
	  	TAXES FOR SERVICES PERFORMED OUTSIDE THE U.S.	  	31
	 20.1
	  	 Taxes
	  	31
	 20.2
	  	 Segregation of Payment Streams
	  	32
	 20.3
	  	 Cooperation
	  	32
			
	 21.0
	  	CLIENT REVIEW RIGHTS	  	32
	 21.1
	  	 Processing
	  	32
	 21.2
	  	 Supplier Non-compliance
	  	33
	 21.3
	  	 Record Retention
	  	33
	 21.4
	  	 Access and Reports
	  	34
	 21.5
	  	 Audit Software
	  	34
	 21.6
	  	 Facilities
	  	34
			
	 22.0
	  	VOLUME CHANGES AND ADDITIONAL BUSINESS UNITS	  	34
	 22.1
	  	 Substantial Change in Volume
	  	34
	 22.2
	  	 Additional Business Units
	  	34
			
	 23.0
	  	DISPUTES	  	35
	 23.1
	  	 Project Managers
	  	35
	 23.2
	  	 Contract Managers
	  	35
			
	 24.0
	  	TERMINATION	  	35
			
	 25.0
	  	TERMINATION ASSISTANCE	  	35
	 25.1
	  	 Termination Assistance Services
	  	35
			
	 26.0
	  	WARRANTIES	  	36
	 26.1
	  	 By Client
	  	36
	 26.2
	  	 By Supplier
	  	36
	 26.3
	  	 Disclaimer
	  	37
			
	 27.0
	  	INDEMNITIES AND LIABILITY	  	37
	 27.1
	  	 Indemnity by Client
	  	37
	 27.2
	  	 Indemnity by Supplier
	  	37
	 27.3
	  	 Cross-Indemnity
	  	38
	 27.4
	  	 Infringement
	  	38
	 27.5
	  	 Indemnification Procedures
	  	39
	 27.6
	  	 Direct Damages
	  	39
	 27.7
	  	 Consequential Damages
	  	40
	 27.8
	  	 Exclusions
	  	40
	 27.9
	  	 Injunctive Relief
	  	40
			
	 28.0
	  	INSURANCE	  	40
	 28.1
	  	 Insurance
	  	40
	 28.2
	  	 Insurance Documentation
	  	40

  

					
	 29.0
	  	MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS	  	41
	 29.1
	  	 Assignment
	  	41
	 29.2
	  	 Notices
	  	41
	 29.3
	  	 Counterparts
	  	41
	 29.4
	  	 Relationship
	  	41
	 29.5
	  	 Consents, Approvals, Notices and Requests
	  	41
	 29.6
	  	 Severability
	  	42
	 29.7
	  	 Waiver
	  	42
	 29.8
	  	 Entire Agreement
	  	42
	 29.9
	  	 Amendments
	  	42
	 29.10
	  	 Governing Law
	  	42
	 29.11
	  	 Survival
	  	42
	 29.12
	  	 Third Party Beneficiaries
	  	42
	 29.13
	  	 Covenant of Further Assurances
	  	42
	 29.14
	  	 Cumulative Remedies
	  	43

  

  
 ARTICLE I. 

 

	1.0	GENERAL PROVISIONS 

  

	1.1	Incorporation into Service Agreements. 

  
 These Terms and Conditions are incorporated by reference into all Service Agreements entered into between the Client Contracting Party and the Supplier Contracting Party
under the MSA. These Terms and Conditions shall apply unless stated to the contrary in a Service Agreement. 
  

	1.2	Conflicts. 

  
 In the event of a conflict between these Terms and Conditions and the terms of a Service Agreement, the terms of the Service Agreement shall prevail. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the order of precedence applies only
to the extent a conflict exists (and only for the purpose of resolving such conflict as it applies to the terms and conditions comprising a particular undertaking as defined by a Service Agreement). Any conflicting terms shall not be deemed to be
amended, modified, cancelled or waived with respect to any other Service Agreement or for any other purpose whatsoever. 
  
 ARTICLE II. 
  

	2.0	TERM AND RENEWAL 

  

	2.1	Initial Term. 

  
 The term of a Service Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date set forth in the Service Agreement and shall continue until the Expiration Date set forth in the Service Agreement, unless the Service Agreement is
renewed pursuant to Section 2.2 of these Terms and Conditions, or is terminated earlier pursuant to the applicable Services Agreement (the “Initial Term”). 
  

	2.2	Renewal Term. 

  
 The term of a Service Agreement shall automatically extend for the number of additional terms as set forth in the Service Agreement (each, a “Renewal Term”) following the conclusion of the Initial
Term and each Renewal Term, if any, thereafter, unless terminated prior to such extension as provided in this Section. If Client does not want this Agreement to automatically extend at the conclusion of the Initial Term (or any Renewal Term,
whichever is applicable), then Client shall give Supplier written notice to that effect not less than six (6) months before the expiration of the existing term (whether the Initial Term or a Renewal Term. In the event Client provides Supplier with
notice of non-renewal, Client may, by written notice delivered to Supplier at least ninety (90) days prior to the expiration of the then-current term, revoke such notice of non-renewal. 
  

	2.3	Expiration of Term of Master Services Agreement. 

  
 Any Service Agreement which provides for a Term which extends beyond the expiration date of the Master Services Agreement must be approved in advance by the Corporate
Contract Managers of the Parties. 
  

 ARTICLE III. 
  

	3.0	STRATEGIC CONTROL 

  

	3.1	Retention of Strategic Control. 

  
 Client shall retain strategic control of all aspects of the services, products and processes used in Client’s business, including decisions concerning the Services,
Hardware and Materials, architecture and technical standards. Changes to Services, Hardware and Materials not contemplated by a particular Service Agreement shall be subject to the Change Control Procedures and may result in additional costs to
Client. 
  

	3.2	Implementation of Strategic Control. 

  
 In connection with implementing such strategic control, as described in each Services Agreement, Client shall: (a) establish processes and designate decision-makers to
exercise strategic control over the Services; and (b) establish procedures to consult with Supplier and other vendors when and to the extent Client determines it to be appropriate. To the extent required by the applicable Services Agreement,
Supplier shall provide assistance and advice to Client pursuant to such procedures. 
  

	3.3	Supplier’s Obligations. 

  
 Supplier shall: (a) comply with Client’s information management, technical architecture and product standards as may be in effect during the Term, subject to the
Change Control Procedures; and (b) subject to the requirements of the applicable Service Agreement and upon Client’s request, provide to Client and Client Agents, assistance, training and Documentation in connection with the operation of the
Hardware, Materials and processes used to provide the Services. 
  

	3.4	Technology Changes. 

  
 Supplier and Client shall cooperate in order to identify the least cost, or highest benefit, or both methods, to implement technology changes. Any change of technology in the Hardware or Materials (as it affects
Client’s execution environment or the execution of the Services), other than a change to the products listed in the Standards Schedule included as part of a Services Agreement, shall be subject to Client’s written approval prior to it
being implemented or incorporated into the Services. 
  

	3.5	Architecture, Standards and Information Technology Planning. 

  

	a.	Supplier Assistance. As requested by Client, Supplier shall assist Client in defining information technology architectures and standards on an ongoing basis and in preparing
long-term strategic information technology plans and short-term implementation plans on an annual basis. The assistance to be provided by Supplier shall include (1) active participation with Client representatives on permanent and ad-hoc committees
and working groups addressing such issues; (2) assessments of the then-current information technology architectures, standards and systems; (3) analyses of the appropriate direction for such architectures, standards and systems in light of business
priorities, business strategies and competitive market forces; and (4) recommendations regarding information technology architectures and platforms, software and hardware products, information technology strategies and directions, and other enabling
technologies. With respect to each recommendation, Supplier shall provide: (A) cost projections and cost/benefit analyses; (B) the changes, if any, in the personnel and other resources required to operate and support the changed environment; (C) the
resulting impact on Client’s information technology costs; (D) the expected performance, quality, responsiveness, efficiency, reliability and other service levels; and (E) high level plans and high level projected time schedules for development
and implementation. To the extent the foregoing Services are not defined as being in- scope under a Service Agreement, such Services may be subject to the payment of additional Charges by Client. 

  

	b.	Final Authority. Client shall have final authority to promulgate information technology architectures, standards and plans and to modify or grant waivers from such
architectures, standards or plans. Supplier shall (1) comply with and enforce the information technology architectures, standards and plans established by Client, (2) modify the Services as and to the extent necessary to conform to such
architectures, standards and plans, and (3) obtain Client’s prior approval for any deviations from such architectures, standards or plans. Modification of the Services and changes to the information technology architectures, standards and plans
not contemplated by a particular Service Agreement shall be subject to the Change Control Procedures and may result in additional charges to Client. 

  

	c.	Forecasting and Budgeting. Supplier shall provide the following information to Client for its forecasting and budgeting processes: (1) base utilization; (2) changes to the
environment impacting known Client costs or resource utilization; and (3) opportunities to modify or improve the Services to reduce the Charges (e.g., through reductions in resource utilization, process improvements or increases in productivity) and
pass-through expenses incurred by Client. Such information shall be provided at Client’s request and in accordance with a reasonable schedule established under the applicable Service Agreement. To the extent the foregoing Services are not
defined as being in-scope under a Service Agreement, such Services may be subject to the payment of additional Charges by Client. 

  
 ARTICLE IV. 
  

	4.0	SERVICES 

  

	4.1	Designated Services. 

  

	a.	Service Agreements. During the Term, Supplier shall provide the services, functions and responsibilities described in the applicable Service Agreement to Client (the
“Designated Services”). 

  

	b.	Collateral Services. If any collateral services, functions or responsibilities not specifically described in the applicable Service Agreement are an inherent and customary
part of the Designated Services or are required for proper performance or provision of the Designated Services in accordance with the applicable Service Agreement, they shall be deemed to be included within the scope of the Services to be delivered
for the Charges, as if such services, functions or responsibilities were specifically described in the applicable Service Agreement. 

  

	c.	Provision of Facilities, Hardware and Software. Except as otherwise expressly provided in the applicable Service Agreement and subject to Section 12.2, Supplier shall
be responsible for providing the facilities, personnel, Supplier Hardware, Supplier Software and other resources necessary to provide the Designated Services. The Designated Services shall be performed at the Client Sites and the Supplier Sites
designated in the applicable Service Agreement. 

  

	4.2	Supplemental Services. 

  

	a.	Client’s Request and Supplier’s Response. During the Term, Client may wish to obtain services that are logically related to, or closely integrated with, the
Designated Services (the “Supplemental Services”). Client shall communicate to Supplier its request for any Supplemental Services, and Supplier shall respond to such request, pursuant to the Change Control Procedures. As soon as
reasonably practicable after Supplier’s receipt of Client’s request, Supplier shall inform Client as to whether Supplier desires to perform such Supplemental Services and shall provide Client, as and when appropriate, with:

  

	 	1.	a written description of the work Supplier anticipates performing in connection with such Supplemental Services; 

  

	 	2.	a schedule for commencing and completing the Supplemental Services; 

  

	 	3.	Supplier’s prospective non-recurring Charges for such Supplemental Services; 

  

	 	4.	any increase or decrease in the recurring Charges as a result of the implementation of the Supplemental Services; 

  

	 	5.	a description of any Materials to be developed or modified by Supplier or Hardware to be provided by Supplier in connection with such Supplemental Services;

  

	 	6.	the Materials, Hardware, and other resources and run-time requirements necessary to develop and operate any new applications; 

  

	 	7.	the human resources necessary to develop and operate any new applications or provide the Supplemental Services; 

  

	 	8.	a list of any existing Materials, Hardware and other resources included in or to be used in connection with such Supplemental Services; and 

  

	 	9.	assistance in the development of acceptance test criteria and procedures in respect of any new applications or any products or services. 

  

	b.	Amendments. In the event Client elects to have Supplier perform the Supplemental Services, Client and Supplier shall amend the applicable Service Agreement(s) pursuant to
Section 29.9 or as otherwise set forth in the Change Control Procedures. Client shall not be responsible for payment to Supplier and Supplier shall not be responsible for rendering of the Supplemental Services until the applicable Service
Agreement(s) have been amended to include such Supplemental Services. 

  

	4.3	Provision of Services. 

  
 Subject to the Service Agreement and any agreed notification periods and any forecasting processes agreed therein, Supplier shall increase or decrease the amount of the
Services according to Client’s demand for the Services. All of Supplier’s activities in connection with providing the Services shall be included in the Charges. 
  

	4.4	Changes to the Services. 

  
 Subject to the Service Agreement and except as may be necessary on an emergency basis to maintain the continuity of the Services, Supplier shall not, without
Client’s written consent, modify the Services. 
  

	4.5	Hardware. 

  

	a.	Use of Hardware. Supplier shall provide the Services using the Client Hardware and the Supplier Hardware as set forth in the applicable Service Agreement.

  

	b.	Inventory. Supplier shall provide to Client in January of each year of the Term an inventory, effective January 1 in any given year, of all Supplier Hardware located on the
Client Sites and utilized by Supplier in the provision of the Services. Such inventory shall identify, in respect of each major Supplier Hardware component, whether the Supplier Hardware is: (1) leased or owned and, if leased, who the lessor and
lessee are; and (2) dedicated to Client or shared with third parties. 

  

	4.6	Materials. 

  

	a.	Use of Materials. Supplier shall provide the Services using the Client Materials and the Supplier Materials as set forth in the applicable Service Agreement and in accordance
with Article XIII. 

  

	b.	 Inventory. Supplier shall provide to Client in January of each year of the term, an inventory, effective January 1 in any given year, of all Materials
located on the Client Sites and utilized by Supplier in connection with the provision of the Services. Such inventory shall identify, in respect of each Software 

  

	 	 
program, the version or release number and whether the copy of the Software program is: (1) Client Materials or Supplier Materials; and (2) dedicated to
Client or shared with third parties. 

  

	c.	Materials. The Developed Materials and Supplier Proprietary Materials:  

  

	 	1.	shall not contain Illicit Code; and 

  

	 	2.	shall not, except as expressly contemplated by the Services Agreement, alter, damage or erase any data or Materials without control of a person operating the computing equipment on
which it resides. 

  
 To the extent that Illicit Code is found in
the Developed Materials or Supplier Proprietary Materials, Supplier, at its expense, shall immediately undertake to remove such Illicit Code, and to correct and repair any damage to Client Data or Materials caused by such Illicit Code.
Supplier’s obligations to restore damaged, corrupt or erased Client Data or Materials shall be subject to Client abiding by its published data backup and recovery procedures. 
  
 Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to Supplier Third Party Materials which may be embedded into Client Materials or Developed
Materials, Supplier’s obligations with respect to any Illicit Code which may be contained in any Supplier Third Party Materials is limited to (A) at Supplier’s expense, immediately undertake to remove such Illicit Code, and (B) at
Client’s expense, assist Client in correcting and repairing any damage to Client Data or Materials caused by such Illicit Code. 
  

	4.7	Communication Services. 

  
 Supplier shall provide the Services using the communication lines and associated services specified in the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

	4.8	Use of Client Hardware and Client Materials. 

  
 Supplier shall use any Client Hardware and Client Materials solely for Client’s use and benefit in the provision of the Services. 
  

	4.9	Productivity and Management Tools. 

  
 Supplier shall consult with Client regarding the use of project management tools, including productivity aids and project management systems. Supplier shall use mutually
acceptable project management tools in all major projects and employ a regular reporting mechanism to identify project tasks, present current status reports and identify potential problems. 
  

	4.10	Policy and Procedures Manual. 

  

	a.	Development of Manual. As part of the Services, and at no additional cost to Client, Supplier shall deliver to Client within the time periods specified in the applicable
Services Agreement, for its review, comment and approval (1) an outline of the topics to be addressed in the Policy and Procedures Manual, and (2) an initial draft of the Policy and Procedures Manual (the “Policy and Procedures
Manual”). Client shall provide reasonable cooperation to Supplier in connection with Supplier’s preparation of the Policy and Procedures Manual. At a minimum, the Policy and Procedures Manual shall include the following:

  

	 	1.	a detailed description of the Services and the manner in which each will be performed by Supplier, including (A) the Hardware, Software, and systems to be procured, operated,
supported or used together with related Documentation; (B) Documentation providing further details regarding such Services; (C) the specific activities to be undertaken by Supplier in connection with each Service, including, where appropriate, the
direction, supervision, monitoring, staffing, reporting, planning and oversight activities to be performed by Supplier under the applicable Service Agreement; (D) the Change Control Procedures; and 

  

	 	2.	the procedures for Client/Supplier interaction and communication, including (A) call lists; (B) procedures for and limits on direct communication by Supplier with Client personnel;
(C) problem management and escalation procedures; (D) priority and project procedures; (E) acceptance testing; (F) quality assurance procedures and checkpoint reviews; and (G) annual and quarterly financial objectives, budgets, and performance
goals. 

  
 Supplier shall consider any comments or suggestions of
Client for incorporation into the Policy and Procedures Manual and shall deliver a final version to Client within fifteen (15) days after its receipt of such comments and suggestions. The Parties shall agree on the final form of the Policy and
Procedures Manual. The Policy and Procedures Manual will be delivered and maintained by Supplier in web-enabled format and will be accessible electronically. 
  

	b.	Compliance. Supplier shall perform the Services in accordance with the Policy and Procedures Manual. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of the applicable
Service Agreement and the Policy and Procedures Manual, the provisions of the Service Agreement shall control unless the Parties expressly agree otherwise and such agreement is set forth in the relevant portion of the Policy and Procedures Manual
approved by Client in writing. 

  

	c.	Current Activities. Supplier shall perform the Services in accordance with Client’s then current policies and procedures, which shall be presented to Supplier prior to
the Effective Date of the applicable Service Agreement, until the Policy and Procedures Manual is finalized and agreed upon by the Parties. Thereafter, Supplier shall perform the Services in accordance with the Policy and Procedures Manual.

  

	d.	Updates. Supplier shall promptly modify and update the Policy and Procedures Manual to reflect changes in the operations or procedures described therein, and shall provide
the proposed changes in the manual to Client for review, comment, and approval. 

  

	4.11	Regulatory Licenses and Permits. 

  

	a.	Supplier Responsibility. Supplier shall be responsible for obtaining the licenses, authorizations and permits that Supplier is required to have in relation to the Supplier
Hardware, Supplier Materials and Supplier’s obligations pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement in order to perform the Services (excluding items provided by the Client or the Client Agents). Supplier shall have financial and
administrative responsibility for the charges and Taxes associated with such licenses, authorizations and permits. 

  

	b.	Client Responsibility. Unless otherwise provided in the applicable Service Agreement, Client shall be responsible for obtaining the licenses, authorizations and permits that
Client is required to have in relation to the Client Hardware, Client Materials and Client’s obligations pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement in order to perform the Services (excluding items provided by the Supplier or the Supplier
Agents). Except to the extent provided in the applicable Service Agreement, Client shall have financial and administrative responsibility for the charges and Taxes associated with such licenses, authorizations and permits. 

 

	4.12	Laws. 

  

	a.	Compliance. Supplier shall be responsible for complying with Laws applicable to Supplier or as specified in the applicable Service Agreement relating to the delivery or
receipt of the Services. 

  

	b.	Notification of Changes. Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to identify and notify Client of any changes in applicable Laws that may relate to the delivery or
receipt of the Services. Supplier shall be responsible for any fines and penalties arising from any noncompliance by Supplier or Supplier Agents with Laws applicable to Supplier or the delivery of the Services. 

  

	c.	Continuity. Subject to subsections d. and e. below, in the event changes in Laws prevent or impair Supplier from delivering the Services under a Service
Agreement, Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to develop and, upon Client’s approval, implement a suitable work-around until such time as Supplier can perform the Services under the applicable Service Agreement without such
work-around. 

  

	d.	Changes Applicable to Supplier. If the changes are to Laws primarily applicable to Supplier and not to Client, then (1) Supplier shall develop and implement a work-around at
its own expense; and (2) pay to Client an amount equal to Client’s actual and direct costs associated with the work around, if any. 

  

	e.	Changes Applicable to Client. If the changes are due to Laws primarily applicable to Client and not to Supplier, then (1) Supplier shall develop and implement a work-around
at Client’s expense; and (2) Client and Supplier shall, in accordance with the Change Control Procedures, re-negotiate the applicable terms pursuant to Section 10.2 to account for the increase in the Charges associated with the work-around, if
any. 

  

	f.	Changes Applicable to Both. If the changes are due to Laws applicable to both Client and Supplier, then: (1) Supplier shall develop and implement a work-around, the expense
of which shall be shared by Client and Supplier as mutually agreed; and (2) Client and Supplier shall re-negotiate the applicable terms pursuant to Section 10.2 to account for the increase in Supplier’s costs associated with the work-around, if
any, and Client’s actual and direct costs associated with the work-around, if any. 

  

	g.	Amendments. Client and Supplier shall amend the applicable Service Agreement(s) as necessary to comply with local legal and regulatory requirements. 

 

	h.	Information. Notwithstanding any other provisions herein, Supplier agrees to provide to Client data and, other information regarding the Services requested by Client that
Client believes is necessary for Client to comply with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (the “Act”), including but not limited to the internal control structure and procedures required in Section 404 of the Act. The parties
acknowledge that to the extent the provision of such information or data is not in the scope of work of an applicable Service Agreement or readily available to Supplier, additional charges may apply. 

  

	4.13	Conditions Precedent. 

  

	a.	Official Action and Third-Party Approval. Neither Party shall be obligated to perform its obligations under any Service Agreement: (1) to the extent that there is issued and
outstanding any official action of a court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction (each, an “Official Action”) restraining or enforcing the performance of either Party’s obligations hereunder; or (2) until all licenses,
authorizations or permits of any person or Entity, the granting of which is required by an Official Action (each, a “Third Party Approval”), and which is necessary for the performance of such obligations hereunder, have been
obtained. 

  

	b.	Continuing Obligations. In the event that any such Official Action is issued and outstanding or any such Third Party Approval has not been obtained, Client and Supplier
shall: (1) perform that portion of its obligations under the applicable Service Agreement as to which such Official Action or Third Party Approval is not applicable; and (2) each continue to use commercially reasonable efforts to cause to have
lifted or stayed such Official Action or to obtain such Third Party Approval. 

  

	c.	Supplier’s Obligations and Continuity. Subject to subsections d. and e. below, in the event the performance of obligations is or becomes prohibited or
delayed by an Official Action or lack of a Third Party Approval, Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to develop and, upon Client’s approval, implement a suitable work-around until such time as Supplier can perform its obligations
under the applicable Service Agreement without such work-around. Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to minimize the cost of, and requirement for, such a work-around. Client shall be responsible for all such documented, out-of-pocket
costs, except to the extent that Supplier has responsibility for such costs as described in paragraph d. below. 

  

	d.	Official Action Applicable to Supplier. If the Official Action is applicable to Supplier and not to Client or the Third Party Approval is one which Supplier is obligated to
obtain, then Supplier shall: (1) develop and implement a work-around at its own expense; and (2) pay to Client an amount equal to Client’s actual and direct costs associated with the work-around, if any. 

  

	e.	Official Action Applicable to Client. If the Official Action is applicable to Client and not to Supplier or the Third Party Approval is one which Client is obligated to
obtain, then: (1) Supplier shall develop and implement a work-around at Client’s expense; and (2) Client and Supplier shall re-negotiate the applicable terms pursuant to Article X to account for the increase in Supplier’s costs
associated with the work-around, if any, and Client’s actual and direct costs associated with the work-around, if any. 

  

	f.	Official Action Applicable to Both. If the Official Action is applicable to both Client and Supplier, then: (1) Supplier shall develop and implement a work-around, the
expense of which shall be shared by Client and Supplier as mutually agreed; and (2) Client and Supplier shall re-negotiate the applicable terms pursuant to Article X to account for the increase in Supplier’s costs associated with the
work-around, if any, and Client’s actual and direct costs associated with the work-around, if any. 

  
 ARTICLE V. 
  

	5.0	THIRD PARTY SERVICES 

  

	5.1	Third Party Services. 

  

	a.	Client’s Rights. Client shall have the right to contract with a third party to perform: 

  

	 	1.	subject to the obligations to pay any minimum charges under the Services Agreement, any services (Supplier acknowledging and agreeing that services, including services that may
comprise part of the Services may be provided by multiple vendors); 

  

	 	2.	services in respect of business processes related to specific applications and corporate-wide initiatives; 

  

	 	3.	any services to the extent required by applicable Laws; and 

  

	 	4.	consulting services relating to general industry information or systems or benchmarking or auditing services ((1), (2), (3) and (4) collectively, the “Third Party
Services”). 

  

	b.	Supplier’s Cooperation and Obligations. In the event Client contracts with a third party to perform any Third Party Services, Supplier shall (at Client’s expense)
cooperate with Client and any such third party to the extent reasonably required by Client, including: 

  

	 	1.	providing written requirements, standards and policies for systems operations so that the developments of such third party may be operated by Supplier and providing such third party
with the written requirements, standards and procedures applicable to Client’s business environment as requested by Client; 

  

	 	2.	providing assistance, integration and support services to such third party at the rates set forth in the applicable Service Agreement; 

  

	 	3.	to the extent permitted by the applicable third party agreements, providing third party access to the Hardware and Materials in connection with such Third Party Services and as may
reasonably be required by such third party and approved by Client; and 

  

	 	4.	participating in, and complying with, multiple-vendor problem resolution and interface procedures established by Client. 

  

	c.	Client’s and Third Party’s Obligations. Client shall require any such third party to comply with Supplier’s reasonable requirements regarding operations,
confidentiality, licensing and security. Supplier shall not be liable for Client’s failure to comply with agreements relating to Third Party Services. Alternatively, upon Client’s request, Client and Supplier may jointly negotiate with a
third party the terms and conditions relating to the Services Supplier will be providing to Client through such third party. 

  

	5.2	Access to Third Party Suppliers. 

  
 Client may contact, and have access to information from, third party suppliers of services. 
  
 ARTICLE VI. 
  

	6.0	MATERIALS DEVELOPMENT AND INTEGRATION SERVICES 

  

	6.1	Services. 

  
 Supplier shall provide Services for materials development and integration described in the applicable Service Agreement in accordance with the applicable Specifications. 
  

	6.2	Third Party Packages. 

  
 Client shall retain the right to substitute a third party package for any functionality included in the Materials. Such changes shall be subject to the Change Control
Procedures. If Client exercises this right: (a) Supplier shall provide to Client a proposal describing the financial and operational impacts of the substitution; (b) Client and Supplier shall negotiate the appropriate adjustments to each
Party’s performance and financial obligations that are affected by such substitution; and (c) the Parties shall amend the applicable Service Agreement accordingly. 
  

	6.3	Additional Third Party Materials. 

  
 Any additional third party Materials requested by Client pursuant to Section 6.2 shall, at Client’s option and subject to Section 13.3, be: (a)
licensed in Supplier’s name and be transferable to Client or its designee upon expiration or termination of the Services in connection with which the Materials are being used; or (b) licensed in Client’s name, with Supplier having the
right to have access to, and use of such Materials solely to the extent contemplated by the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

	6.4	Delivery Requirements. 

  

	a.	Development of Criteria. Supplier, together with Client, shall develop a list of acceptance criteria, Specifications, deliverables, deliverable and payment criteria to be
included in the applicable Service Agreement that Supplier must meet as part of providing the Services. 

  

	b.	Delivery of New Systems and Releases. Supplier shall deliver new systems and releases and versions, together with any other deliverables specified in the applicable Service
Agreement, to Client, at the location(s) and in the manner specified in the applicable Service Agreement or, if not so specified, as agreed by the Client Contract Manager and the Supplier Contract Manager. Supplier shall deliver new systems and
releases or versions so that they run within the context of relevant design criteria and the runtime caps, as set forth in the applicable Service Agreement. 

  

	c.	Plan for Testing. Supplier shall propose for Client’s review and approval a plan for testing new systems and releases or versions prior to such systems, releases or
versions being placed in production, including the type and responsibility for providing a testing environment. Subject to Client’s approval and where testing with data representative of the production environment is necessary, Supplier may use
a copy of Client production data with Client’s prior written approval; provided, however, that Client shall remove all information prohibited by statutory or regulatory requirements of the applicable country from such data or made
unrecognizable in accordance with such requirements. 

  

	6.5	Acceptance of Developed Materials. 

  

	a.	Satisfaction of Acceptance Criteria. Client shall accept the Developed Materials when such Materials satisfy the criteria for acceptance testing set forth in the applicable Service
Agreement. On or prior to the completion of such acceptance tests, Client shall provide notice to Supplier of either: (1) satisfactory performance and Client’s acceptance of the Developed Materials as delivered under the applicable Service
Agreement; or (2) unsatisfactory performance and Client’s rejection of the Developed Materials together with a description of how it fails to meet the performance criteria. Additionally, during the acceptance testing, Client shall give Supplier
notice as soon as practicable of any failure identified. Supplier shall supply the appropriate personnel to investigate the cause of the failure and make such corrections as are necessary to fulfill Supplier’s obligations under the applicable
Service Agreement. 

  

	b.	Deemed Acceptance. “Acceptance” of the Developed Materials shall be deemed to have occurred upon the earliest to occur of the following: (1) passing of previously
agreed written acceptance tests; (2) expiry of the period specified in the applicable Services Agreement after receipt of notice from Supplier of successful implementation without notification of failure by Client to Supplier; (3) use of the
Developed Materials for anything except testing; or (4) modification of the Developed Materials by Client or any third party without written consent of Supplier. 

  

	6.6	Development Metrics. 

  
 The metrics applicable to the materials development and integration services, if any, to be provided by Supplier under a Services Agreement will be described in such Services Agreement. 
  

	6.7	Reports. 

  
 During the Term, Supplier shall provide to Client a quarterly report (or at such other interval as agreed in the applicable Service Agreement or by the Client in writing from time to time) specifying: (a) the amount
of work expended to date by project; and (b) the anticipated expenditure necessary to complete each such project. 
  
 ARTICLE VII. 
  

	7.0	THIRD PARTY AGREEMENTS 

  

	7.1	Third Party Agreements. 

  
 Client and Supplier shall agree and shall identify in the applicable Service Agreement those third party agreements to which Client is a party that will affect or be
affected by the provision of the Services (the “Third Party Agreements”), and Client shall provide Supplier with copies of the same to the extent permitted by the terms thereof. Client shall inform Supplier of all changes/amendments
to such Third Party Agreements from time to time. Supplier shall abide by, and comply with, the terms of the Third Party Agreements and any changes thereto insofar as Supplier has agreed to, and has been made aware of, the same. Supplier’s
agreement to such changes shall not be unreasonably withheld. For the avoidance of doubt, Client retains responsibility for acts and omissions of all Client Agents. Unless otherwise 

  

 
provided in the Services Agreement, Client shall be responsible for and shall pay any associated costs in obtaining all consents, approvals, authorization
notices, requests and acknowledgments that are necessary to allow Supplier to use, if required, the Third Party Agreements. Third Party Agreements, if any, will be set forth in a schedule to the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

	7.2	Performance under Third Party Agreements. 

  
 Each Party shall promptly upon discovery inform the other of any breach of, or misuse or fraud in connection with any Third Party Agreements and shall cooperate with each
other to prevent or stay any such breach, misuse or fraud. 
  

	7.3	Supplier Administered Agreements. 

  

	a.	Identification of Supplier Administered Agreements. Client and Supplier shall identify in the applicable Service Agreement those Third Party Agreements for which Supplier
shall be responsible for administering, managing and maintaining (the “Supplier Administered Agreements”). Supplier Administered Agreements, if any, will be set forth in a schedule to the applicable Service Agreement.

  

	b.	Supplier Responsibilities. Subject to Supplier being informed of the terms of the Supplier Administered Agreements and subject to Client obtaining authorization for Supplier
to do all of the following, Supplier shall be responsible for: (1) notifying Client of any performance obligations, and maintaining any warranties, under the Supplier Administered Agreements; (2) interfacing with the supplier, including problem
resolution in respect of the services provided under the Supplier Administered Agreements; and (3) providing Client reasonable notice of any renewal, termination or cancellation dates and charges in respect of the Supplier Administered Agreements.
At Supplier’s request and with Client’s written consent, Supplier shall, to the extent permitted by the Supplier Administered Agreements, modify, terminate or cancel any such Supplier Administered Agreements. Any modification, termination
or cancellation charges or charges imposed upon Client in connection with any such modification, termination or cancellation shall be borne by Client. 

  
 ARTICLE VIII. 
  

	8.0	TRANSITION 

  

	8.1	Contents of Transition Plan. 

  
 Supplier shall develop and implement a transition plan as may be necessary to deliver the Services set forth in the Service Agreement that describes how Supplier shall
assume responsibility for all functions and services necessary to accomplish the transition of the responsibility of the Designated Services to Supplier (the “Transition Plan”). 
  

	8.2	Reports. 

  
 Supplier shall report to Client not less frequently than weekly on its progress in performing its responsibilities and meeting the transition milestones set forth in the Transition Plan. Promptly upon receiving any
information indicating that Supplier may not perform its responsibilities or meet the transition milestones set forth in the Transition Plan, Supplier shall disclose such information to Client and shall identify for Client consideration and approval
specific measures to address such delay and mitigate the risks associated therewith. 
  

	8.3	Service Levels and Business Continuity. 

  
 During the implementation of the Transition Plan, Supplier shall provide the Services in accordance with the Service Levels. Supplier shall implement the Transition Plan
without causing a material disruption of the Client’s operations and capabilities. The Client resources to be devoted to transitional activities shall be set forth in the applicable Transition Plan. Supplier shall develop and implement a
transition plan similar to the Transition Plan in accordance with this Article VIII as may be necessary to transition responsibility of any of the Supplemental Services to Supplier. 
  
 ARTICLE IX. 
  

	9.0	SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT 

  

	9.1	Service Level Agreement. 

  
 Supplier represents and warrants that the Services shall be rendered with promptness and diligence and shall be executed in a diligent, professional and workmanlike
manner, in accordance with the performance standards and service levels set forth in the Service Level Agreement included as part of each Service Agreement. 
  

	9.2	Service Level Credits. 

  
 Supplier recognizes that its failure to meet the performance standards and service levels set forth in a Service Agreement will have a material adverse impact on the
business and operations of Client and that the damages resulting from Supplier’s failure to meet such performance standards and service levels are not capable of precise determination. Accordingly, if Supplier fails to meet the performance
standards or service levels set forth in a Service Agreement, then Supplier shall pay Client the Service Level Credits specified in the applicable Services Agreement. 
  

	9.3	Benchmarking. 

  
 Client’s Benchmarking rights with respect to the Services will be as set forth in an applicable Service Agreement. 
  
 ARTICLE X. 
  

	10.0	CONTRACT MANAGEMENT 

  

	10.1	Change Requests. 

  

	a.	Supplier Evaluation of Client’s Change Requests. Supplier shall evaluate as soon as practicable all requests by Client for changes to the scope or composition of the
Services or the manner in which the Services are provided, delivered or charged. Supplier shall promptly advise Client of the potential implications of such changes on the Services, Service Levels and Charges. With the information that Supplier has
provided to Client, Client shall make an initial decision regarding whether to proceed with the changes and their requirements. Upon Client’s initial decision to proceed with the changes, Supplier and Client shall proceed in accordance with the
Change Control Procedures. 

  

	b.	Client Evaluation of Supplier’s Change Requests. Supplier may make suggestions for changes to the scope or composition of the Services or the manner in which the
Services are provided, delivered or charged, together with potential implications of such changes, on the Services, Service Levels, and Charges. Client may in its sole discretion choose to proceed or act upon such proposals. Any refusal to proceed
will not affect the Services, Service Levels or Charges. 

  

	10.2	Change Control Procedures. 

  
 The Policy and Procedures Manual prepared in accordance with the applicable Service Agreement will set forth the change control procedures (“Change Control
Procedures”) that shall be applicable to any change to the Services, Software and Hardware that would materially alter the Service Levels or the functionality, performance standards or technical environment of the Software or the
Hardware, or the manner in which the Services are provided or the composition of the Services (each, a “Change”). Supplier shall, with Client’s approval, update the Change Control Procedures as and when appropriate and shall
incorporate therein any reasonable comments and suggestions made by Client. 
  
 ARTICLE XI. 
  

	11.0	Reserved. 

  
 ARTICLE XII. 
  

	12.0	CLIENT RESPONSIBILITIES AND ASSETS 

  

	12.1	Client Contract Manager. 

  
 The Client Contracting Party shall be responsible for assigning an individual who will act as the primary point of contact for Supplier with respect to each Party’s
obligations under a Service Agreement (the “Client Contract Manager”). 
  

	12.2	Provision of Premises. 

  
 Client shall be responsible for providing to those members of the Project Staff to whom Client consents to be located on Client’s premises in connection with the
performance of the Services, office space and office furnishings, office/janitorial services and utilities in connection with such office space. All such space, furnishings and utilities shall be consistent with those that Client provides to its own
similarly situated employees. Supplier may not provide services to other customers from space provided by Client without Client’s prior written consent which consent may be withheld in Client’s sole discretion. Client shall have the option
during the Term to relocate Project Staff located on Client’s premises to another comparable location or facility. 
  

	12.3	Client Assets. 

  
 All assets owned, leased or otherwise held by Client during the Term and to be used in connection with the Services as set forth in the applicable Service Agreement (the “Client Assets”) shall at all
times remain the property of Client. Supplier shall have access to and use of the Client Assets set forth in the applicable Service Agreement, and such ability to manage the Client Assets as may be necessary or appropriate to enable Supplier to
properly perform its obligations pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement. As and when any Client Assets are no longer required for the Services, Supplier shall return such Client Assets to Client, in good condition and repair, ordinary wear and
tear excepted. 
  

 ARTICLE XIII. 
  

	13.0	PROPRIETARY RIGHTS 

  

	13.1	Client Materials. 

  

	a.	License to Supplier. Client, at no cost to Supplier, hereby grants to Supplier for the limited purpose of providing the Services in any relevant jurisdiction, a nonexclusive,
nontransferable, royalty-free right to do the following in respect of any Materials owned by Client (the “Client Proprietary Materials”) and any Materials licensed or leased by Client from a third party to the extent permitted by
such licenses and leases (the “Client Third Party Materials”): (1) have access to or use, operate and maintain the Client Materials where appropriate; (2) copy the Client Materials for archival, backup and testing purposes or as may
otherwise be required by the applicable Service Agreement; (3) to the extent permitted by the licenses or leases in respect of the Client Third Party Materials, modify and create derivative works of the Client Materials, but only for such purposes
as may be required by the applicable Service Agreement; and (4) sublicense Supplier Agents to do any of the foregoing; provided, however, that Supplier shall not reverse engineer or decompile the Client Materials except to the extent permitted, by
relevant Law. 

  

	b.	Expiration or Termination of Services. Upon expiration or termination of all or part of the Services, the rights granted to the Supplier in Section 13.1.a. shall
immediately revert to Client in respect of the Client Materials used in connection with the expired or terminated Services and Supplier shall, at no cost to Client: (1) deliver to Client: (A) a complete and accurate list of Client Materials in use
as of the date of such expiration or the termination of the Services, and (B) complete copies of all of the Client Materials (including any related Source Code in Supplier’s possession) in the form in use as of the effective date of such
expiration or termination; and (2) destroy or erase all other copies of the Client Materials in its possession or the possession of Supplier and Supplier Agents, unless otherwise instructed by Client. 

  

	13.2	Supplier Proprietary Materials. 

  

	a.	Definition. All Materials owned or developed by or on behalf of Supplier that are not Client Materials (the “Supplier Proprietary Materials”) shall be and
shall remain the property of Supplier, and Client shall have no rights or interests in the Supplier Proprietary Materials except as described in this Section 13.2. 

  

	b.	Use of Supplier Proprietary Materials. Subject to Client’s written consent to the contrary, Supplier shall: 

  

	 	1.	use the Supplier Proprietary Materials identified or used by Supplier to provide the Services pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement; 

  

	 	2.	make available to Client the Supplier Proprietary Materials for use by or on behalf of Client solely in connection with the Services. 

  

	c.	License and Delivery to Client. In relation to the Supplier Proprietary Materials which may be embedded into any Client Materials or Developed Materials, unless otherwise
agreed in writing by Client prior to any such utilization, incorporation, embedding or involvement, Supplier shall do the following: 

  

	 	1.	 Grant of License. Supplier shall grant to Client an irrevocable, perpetual, non-exclusive, non-transferable, world-wide, royalty-free license to do the
following in respect of such Supplier Proprietary Materials : (A) have access to or use, operate and maintain the Supplier Proprietary Materials; (B) copy the Supplier Proprietary Materials for archival, backup and testing purposes or as may
otherwise be required by the applicable Service Agreement; (C) modify and create derivative works of the Supplier Proprietary Materials; and (D) grant the right to do any of the foregoing to 

  

	 	 
third parties engaged by Client solely for Client’s business operations. This license may incorporate other standard industry terms but none which would
in any way affect the validity or enforceability of the terms outlined above. 

  

	 	2.	Delivery of Supplier Proprietary Materials. Supplier shall deliver to Client complete and correct copies of all such Supplier Proprietary Materials in the form and the media
being used by Supplier in connection with the Services as of the effective date of such expiration or termination. 

  

	13.3	Supplier Third Party Materials. 

  

	a.	Definition. All Materials licensed or leased from a third party by Supplier (the “Supplier Third Party Materials”) shall be and shall remain the exclusive
property of such third party licensors and Client shall have no rights or interests in the Supplier Third Party Materials except as described in this Section 13.3. 

  

	b.	Use of Supplier Third Party Materials. Subject to Client’s written consent to the contrary, Supplier shall: 

  

	 	1.	use the Supplier Third Party Materials identified or used by Supplier to provide the Services pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement; 

  

	 	2.	make available to Client such Supplier Third Party Materials for use by Client solely in connection with the Services; and 

  

	 	3.	maintain on Client’s premises, and make available to Client upon Client’s request to the extent permitted by such third party license agreements, a copy of the Supplier
Third Party Materials for archival purposes only. 

  

	c.	Incorporation and Embedding of Supplier Third Party Materials. Supplier shall not utilize, incorporate, embed or otherwise involve any Supplier Third Party Materials in any
Client Materials or Developed Materials without Client’s prior consent in writing. 

  

	d.	License and Delivery to Client. In relation to Supplier Third Party Materials referred to in subsection b.3. above, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Client prior
to any such utilization, incorporation, embedding or involvement, Supplier shall do the following: 

  

	 	1.	Transfer or License. Supplier shall either: 

  

	 	(a)	transfer or assign to Client, effective upon the expiration or termination of all or part of the Services, the licenses for the Supplier Third Party Materials being used by Supplier
to provide the expired or terminated Services as of the effective date of such expiration or termination; or 

  

	 	(b)	grant Client a non-exclusive, irrevocable, non-transferable, world-wide, royalty-free sub-license or obtain a non-exclusive, irrevocable, non-transferable, royalty-free license, to
use, operate, maintain, copy, modify and create derivative works of the Supplier Third Party Materials, to the extent permitted by such third party license agreements, and to grant the right to do the foregoing, to the extent granted to Client, to
third parties engaged by Client for Client’s business operations. 

  

	 	2.	Delivery. Supplier shall deliver to Client complete and correct copies of such Supplier Third Party Materials (including any related Source Code unless agreed otherwise by
Client in writing) in the form and media being used by Supplier in connection with the Services. 

  

	13.4	Work Product. 

  

	a.	Ownership. With respect to any Work Product developed by Supplier, unless otherwise expressly provided in the applicable Service Agreement Supplier shall own such Work
Product and all Intellectual Property rights therein. 

  

	b.	Client License to Work Product. Client shall have the following license rights in and to all Work Product: 

  

	 	1.	an irrevocable, nonexclusive, worldwide, paid-up license to use, execute, reproduce, display, perform, distribute copies of and create Derivative Works of such Work Product
internally within Client; 

  

	 	2.	the right to sublicense to successors to Client, affiliates of Client and acquirers of some or part of Client’s business or operations the right to do any or all of the
foregoing; and 

  

	 	3.	grant the right to do any of the foregoing to third parties engaged by Client solely for Client’s business operations. 

  

	c.	Expiration or Termination of Service Agreement. 

  

	 	1.	At the expiration or earlier termination of a Service Agreement, Supplier will deliver to Client complete and correct copies of all Work Product (including any related Source Code)
utilized in performing the Services under such Service Agreement, in the form and on the media in use as of such expiration or termination, as the case may be, and Supplier shall grant to Client the following license rights in and to such Work
Product: 

  

	 	(a)	an irrevocable, nonexclusive, non-transferable (except as set forth below), worldwide, paid-up license to use, execute, reproduce, display, perform and distribute such Work Product
internally within Client and to prepare Derivative Works from such Work Product; 

  

	 	(b)	the right to sublicense to successors to Client, affiliates of Client and acquirers of some or part of Client’s business or operations the right to do any or all of the
foregoing; and 

  

	 	(c)	grant the right to do any of the foregoing to third parties engaged by Client solely for Client’s business operations. 

  

	d.	Limitation on Supplier’s Use of Work Product for Direct Client Competitors. For a period of twenty four (24) months following the development and implementation of Work
Product into the Services provided by Supplier under a Services Agreement, Supplier shall not use, or license the right to use, any such Work Product on behalf of a Direct Client Competitor. 

  

	13.5	Changes and Upgrades to Materials. 

  
 Except as may be approved by Client, Supplier shall not make any changes or modifications to the Materials that would adversely affect Supplier’s ability to provide
the Services or alter the functionality of the Hardware or Materials or materially degrade the performance of the Hardware or Materials, except as may be necessary on a temporary basis to maintain the continuity of the Services. 
  

	13.6	Supplier Tools. 

  
 Supplier or its licensor shall own all Supplier Tools. Supplier shall provide Client, for the limited purpose of providing the Services, with access to and use of Supplier Tools. Upon expiration or termination of all
or part of the Services, Supplier and Client may enter into a license agreement pursuant to which Supplier shall deliver to Client at no additional charge to Client other than that identified (if any) in the applicable Service Agreement the Supplier
Tools, including software if not licensed separately, in the form and on the media in use as of the date of such expiration or termination, solely for purposes of maintaining Developed Materials created with the aid of such Supplier Tools. Materials
provided with a Supplier Tool for which a separate license is necessary shall be treated as Supplier Proprietary Materials or Supplier Third Party Materials, as appropriate. 
  

 ARTICLE XIV. 
  

	14.0	CONSENTS 

  

	14.1	Supplier and Client Consents. 

  

	a.	Supplier Obligations. Supplier shall be responsible for and shall pay any associated costs in obtaining all consents, approvals, authorization notices, requests and
acknowledgments that are necessary to allow: 

  

	 	1.	Supplier to use Supplier Materials and Supplier Hardware to provide the Services; and 

  

	 	2.	Client to use Work Product, Supplier Materials and Supplier Tools during the Term and upon expiration or termination of the applicable Service Agreement pursuant to Article
XXIV (the “Supplier Consents”). Client shall cooperate with Supplier in obtaining the Supplier Consents. 

  

	b.	Client Obligations. Client shall be responsible for and shall pay any associated costs in obtaining all consents, approvals, authorization notices, requests and
acknowledgments that are necessary to allow: 

  

	 	1.	Supplier to use Client Materials and Client Hardware during the Term; 

  

	 	2.	Supplier to use the services under Third Party Services and related service contracts; and 

  

	 	3.	Supplier to use Client Materials and Client Hardware during the Term and as required to perform Termination Assistance Services and perform obligations under any outstanding
warranty agreement pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement (the “Client Consents”). Supplier shall cooperate with Client in obtaining the Client Consents. 

  
 ARTICLE XV. 
  

	15.0	DATA PROTECTION AND SECURITY 

  

	15.1	Client Data. 

  
 All data and information submitted by or on behalf of Client to Supplier or otherwise in Supplier’s possession or accessible by Supplier pursuant to provision of the Services, including without limitation all
Personal Information (“Client Data”), are and shall remain the property of Client or applicable third parties. The Client Data shall not be: (a) used by Supplier or any Supplier Agent other than in connection with providing the
Services; (b) disclosed, sold, assigned, leased or otherwise provided to third parties or to anyone not having a specific need to know if the information for providing the Services, by Supplier or any Supplier Agent; or (c) commercially exploited by
or on behalf of Supplier or any Supplier Agent. 
  

	15.2	Return or Destruction of Data. 

  
 Upon Client’s request at any time and upon the cessation of the Services or Termination Assistance Services, whichever is later, Supplier shall, as directed by
Client: (a) promptly return to Client, in the format and on the media in use as of the date of the request, all, or the portion requested, of the Client Data; or (b) erase or destroy all or a portion of the Client Data in Supplier’s possession
prior to the cessation of the Termination Assistance Services and destroy all media containing Client Data. If Client directs Supplier to erase or destroy all or a portion of the Client Data, Supplier shall promptly confirm to Client in writing that
such erasure or destruction has occurred. Archival tapes containing any Client Data shall be used solely for back-up purposes and shall be returned or destroyed pursuant to this Section 15.2. 
  

	15.3	Data Security. 

  
 Supplier shall establish and maintain safeguards against the destruction, loss, alteration or unauthorized disclosure of the Client Data in the possession of Supplier or any Supplier Agent in accordance with
Client’s security standards set out in the applicable Service Agreement or as notified by Client to Supplier from time to time. Client shall be responsible for reasonable costs incurred by Supplier in the event of changes to such standards
after the Effective Date of the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

	15.4	Sites. 

  
 Client or Client Agents shall be permitted access to any Supplier Site, subject to Supplier’s consent (not to be unreasonably withheld), and subject to any reasonable security provisions of Supplier in effect at
the time of such access, and subject to the following: (a) upon receipt of Supplier’s consent, access to Supplier Sites by Client or Client Agents may only be permitted subject to reasonable prior notice (specifying details of personnel that
require access) during normal business hours of the Supplier Site and only to those Supplier Sites where Services are being developed or carried out; (b) Supplier shall be entitled to deny access to Client Agents where in Supplier’s reasonable
opinion such Client Agent is a Direct Supplier Competitor; and (c) access by Client or Client Agents is to be conducted in such a manner as not to adversely affect Supplier’s performance of the Services or services to other customers of
Supplier. 
  

	15.5	Security Procedures. 

  
 Supplier shall maintain and enforce data and physical security standards and procedures at each of the Sites in accordance with the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

	15.6	Confidentiality. 

  

	a.	Standard of Care. Each Party shall protect all Confidential Information of the other Party with the same degree of care as it uses to avoid unauthorized use, disclosure,
publication or dissemination of its own confidential information of a similar nature, but in no event less than a reasonable degree of care. For purposes of this Agreement, Confidential Information of Client shall mean Client Confidential
Information and Confidential Information of Supplier shall mean Supplier Confidential Information. 

  

	b.	Restricted Disclosure. Each Party shall not use for its own benefit or the benefit of any third party, or disclose, publish, release, transfer or otherwise make available to
any third party, any Confidential Information of the other Party without the other Party’s prior written consent. Each of Client and Supplier, however, shall be permitted to disclose Confidential Information of the other to Client Agents and
Supplier Agents, respectively, and its accountants, attorneys and other agents and its affiliates or subsidiaries to the extent such disclosure is reasonably necessary for the performance of its duties and obligations hereunder or, with respect to
Client, its use and enjoyment of the Services, Hardware and Materials; provided, however, that each of Supplier and Client shall be responsible for any violation of the confidentiality obligations set forth herein by any of the foregoing.

  

	c.	Exclusions. The obligations in this Section 15.6 shall not restrict any disclosure of Confidential Information received by one Party (the “Receiving
Party”) from the other Party (the “Disclosing Party”) where the Receiving Party can demonstrate that: 

  

	 	1.	such Confidential Information was independently developed by the Receiving Party prior to its receipt thereof without violating its obligations hereunder or any of the Disclosing
Party’s proprietary rights; 

  

	 	2.	such Confidential Information is or becomes publicly known (other than through unauthorized disclosure by the Receiving Party); 

  

	 	3.	such Confidential Information is disclosed by the Disclosing Party to a third party without any obligation of confidentiality; 

  

	 	4.	such Confidential Information was already known to the Receiving Party prior to its receipt thereof without any obligation of confidentiality; 

  

	 	5.	such Confidential Information is received by the Receiving Party from a third party without any obligation of confidentiality; 

  

	 	6.	the Receiving Party is required to do so pursuant to any applicable Law (provided that the Receiving Party shall provide reasonable prior written notice to the Disclosing Party of
such disclosure); or 

  

	 	7.	if Client is the Receiving Party, such Confidential Information was developed by Supplier at Client’s expense. 

  

	d.	Supplier Confidential Information.  

  

	 	1.	Approval Process. Any information disclosed by Supplier to Client shall not be deemed or considered Supplier Confidential Information unless: (A) Supplier believes in good
faith that such information is of a confidential or proprietary nature; and (B) Client Project Manager deems such information to be of a confidential or proprietary nature and agrees to accept such information on a confidential basis after receiving
a non-confidential written description of such information from Supplier. All such information accepted by Client Project Manager pursuant to the foregoing shall be deemed “Supplier Confidential Information”.

  

	 	2.	Limitation. Any information disclosed to Client by Supplier not accepted by Client Project Manager pursuant to the process set forth above shall not be deemed or considered
Supplier Confidential Information and Client shall have no obligation to protect or not to use such information. To the extent a decision not to accept such information on a confidential basis jeopardizes Supplier’s ability to perform its
obligations under the applicable Service Agreement, Supplier shall be relieved of adverse consequences, solely and to the extent its performance is materially and adversely affected thereby; provided, however, that Supplier shall promptly notify
Client of the possibility of such adverse consequences and both parties shall attempt to reach a mutually satisfactory solution to alleviate or prevent such adverse consequences. 

  

	e.	Non-Proprietary Know-How. For the avoidance of doubt neither Client nor Supplier shall be prevented from making use of ideas, concepts know-how and principles learned or
experience gained during the performance of services that relate to such party’s core business. This does not grant a party any license to information of the other party that is not generally known to the public, including, but not limited to,
planning information, marketing strategies, finance, operations, customer relationships, customer profiles, sales estimates, business plans, and internal performance results relating to the past, present or future business activities, and their
customers, clients, and suppliers, nor any search algorithms (or combinations). To avoid the potential for dispute, Client will not make available and Supplier will not accept any information regarding unannounced or potential products or
technologies. Further, this section does not provide a license to any patients or copyrights to Supplier. 

  

	15.7	Legal Professional Privilege. 

  
 Supplier acknowledges that certain documents, data and databases to which Supplier has access or created by Supplier for Client and all associated communications thereto
may be subject to the legal professional client privilege (“Privileged Work Product”) and that Supplier is performing the services in respect of Privileged Work Product as an agent of Client. Client shall notify Supplier of any
Privileged Work Product to which Supplier has or may have access. After the Supplier Contract Manager is notified or otherwise becomes aware that such documents, data, database or communications are Privileged Work Product, only Project Staff for
whom such access is necessary for the purpose of providing Services to Client as provided in the applicable Service Agreement may have access to Privileged Work Product. Should Supplier ever be notified of any judicial or other proceeding seeking to
obtain access to Privileged Work Product, Supplier shall: (a) immediately notify Client; and (b) take such reasonable actions (at Client’s cost) as may be specified by Client to resist providing such access. Client shall have the right to
approve any legal representation selected by Supplier in such resistance. 
  

 If Supplier is ultimately required, pursuant to an order of a court of competent jurisdiction, to produce documents,
disclose data or otherwise act in contravention of the confidentiality obligations imposed in the applicable Service Agreement or otherwise with respect to maintaining the confidentiality, proprietary nature and secrecy of Privileged Work Product,
Supplier shall not be liable for breach of such obligation. Client shall indemnify Supplier against any liability of expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) arising out of Supplier’s compliance with obligations
pursuant to this Section 15.7). 
  

	15.8	Media Releases/Publicity. 

  
 Neither Party shall use the other Party’s name or refer to the other Party directly or indirectly in any media release, public announcement or public disclosure
relating to the MSA or their subject matter, including in any promotional or marketing materials, customer lists, referral lists or business presentations without written consent from the other Party for each such use or release. Neither Party may
use any trademark or service mark of the other Party without that Party’s written consent, which consent shall be given in that Party’s sole discretion. 
  

	15.9	Unauthorized Access. 

  

	a.	Notification of Unauthorized Access. Each Party shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify the other Party of any unauthorized possession, disclosure, use or knowledge,
or attempt thereof, of the other Party’s Confidential Information of which it is or becomes aware, including any material breach or potential material breach of security on a system or network which contains, processes or transmits Confidential
Information. 

  

	b.	Furnishing Details of Unauthorized Access. Each Party shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, furnish to the other full details of the unauthorized possession, disclosure,
use or knowledge, or attempt thereof, and use reasonable efforts to assist the other in investigating or preventing the recurrence of any unauthorized possession, use or knowledge, or attempt thereof, of Confidential Information of the other Party.

  

	c.	Cooperation. Each Party shall use reasonable efforts to cooperate with the other Party in any litigation and investigation against third parties deemed necessary by the other
Party to protect its proprietary rights. Each Party shall have the right to conduct and control any investigation relating to such breach or potential breach of its Confidential Information that it determines is appropriate.

  

	d.	Recurrence. Each Party shall use all reasonable efforts to prevent a recurrence of any such unauthorized possession, use or knowledge of the other Party’s Confidential
Information. 

  

	e.	Return of Confidential Information. Each Party shall, in the event of the expiration or termination of the applicable Service Agreement, return to the other Party all
Confidential Information of the other Party disclosed and all copies thereof, or at the other Party’s option, destroy such Confidential Information and provide to the other certificates evidencing such return or destruction.

  

	15.10 	Direct Client Competitors. 

  
 Supplier shall not provide any of the Services to Client from within a site or facility of any person or Entity that is now or in the future a Direct Client Competitor
without Client’s written consent. Subject to Section 4.8, if: (a) Supplier provides services to Client from a Supplier Site that is shared with a third party or third parties; and (b) any part of the business of Supplier or any such
third party is now or in the future a Direct Client Competitor, then Supplier shall develop a process, subject to Client’s approval, to restrict access in any such shared environment so that Supplier and Supplier Agents providing services to
such Direct Client Competitor shall have no access to Client Confidential Information. Supplier may not provide or market services to a third party from a Client Site without Client’s written consent. Direct Client Competitors will be set forth
in a schedule to the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

  
 ARTICLE XVI.

  

	16.0	CONTINUED PROVISION OF SERVICES 

  

	16.1	Business Continuity. 

  

	a.	Minimum Planning Requirements. In relation to disaster recovery at each Client Site at which Services are being performed, Supplier shall be responsible for the following
minimum requirements for which Supplier shall not charge Client any additional usage charges (in addition to any other applicable requirements pursuant to subsection b. below): 

  

	 	1.	participate in an assessment of Client’s disaster recovery requirements and provide for Client’s approval a reasonable set of alternatives for the development of an
executable Client disaster recovery program and the estimated Charges associated with each alternative; 

  

	 	2.	upon Client’s request, participate in the certification of the disaster recovery plan then in effect for each Client Site. 

  

	b.	Supplier Performance Responsibilities at Client Sites. Supplier shall perform the following if the Services include business continuity or disaster recovery services at a Client
Site: 

  

	 	1.	within 30 days after the Effective Date submit to Client for Client’s approval a disaster recovery plan; 

  

	 	2.	update the disaster recovery plan (upon Client’s approval) to reflect changes in technology and industry standards; 

  

	 	3.	upon Client’s request but in any event at least once during each twelve (12) month period of the Term, test and certify the disaster recovery plan then in effect;

  

	 	4.	upon the occurrence of a disaster at a Client Site, implement Supplier’s tasks under the disaster recovery plan for such Client Site; 

  

	 	5.	use best efforts to reinstate the Critical Systems as soon as practicable but in any event within any period of time set out in the applicable Service Agreement; and

  

	 	6.	upon Client’s request, certify the disaster recovery plan then in effect for each Client Site. 

  

	c.	Supplier Performance Responsibilities at Supplier Sites. Supplier shall perform the following business continuity or disaster recovery services at each Supplier Site at which
Services are being performed: 

  

	 	1.	within 30 days after the Effective Date submit to Client a copy of Supplier’s disaster recovery plan for such Supplier Site; 

  

	 	2.	Regularly update the disaster recovery plan to reflect changes in technology and industry standards; 

  

	 	3.	At least once during each twelve (12) month period of the Term, test and certify the disaster recovery plan then in effect; 

  

	 	4.	upon the occurrence of a disaster at a Supplier Site, implement Supplier’s disaster recovery plan for such Supplier Site; 

  

	 	5.	use best efforts to reinstate the Critical Systems as soon as practicable but in any event within any period of time set out in the applicable Service Agreement; and

  

	 	6.	upon Client’s request, certify the disaster recovery plan then in effect for each Supplier Site. 

  

	d.	Change Control Procedures. All changes pursuant to subsection b. above shall be subject to the Change Control Procedures where appropriate. 

  

	16.2	Force Majeure. 

  
 Any failure or delay by Client or Supplier in the performance of its obligations pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement shall not be deemed a default under the applicable Service Agreement or grounds for
termination hereunder (except as provided in this Section 16.2), provided that such failure or delay could not have been prevented by reasonable precautions and cannot reasonably be circumvented by the non-performing Party through the use of
alternate sources, work-around plans or other means to the extent such failure or delay is caused by fire, flood, earthquake, elements of nature or acts of God, public utility electrical failure, acts of war, terrorism, riots, civil disorders,
rebellions or revolutions, strikes, lockouts, or labor difficulties, court order, third party nonperformance (except the non-performing Party’s subcontractors, suppliers or agents) or any other similar cause beyond the reasonable control of
such Party and without the fault or negligence of such Party (each, a “Force Majeure Event”). The occurrence of a Force Majeure Event does not limit or otherwise affect Supplier’s obligation to provide either normal recovery
procedures or any disaster recovery services described in Section 16.1 to the extent practicable in the circumstances. The Party delayed by a Force Majeure Event shall, as soon as practicable, notify the other Party by telephone (to be
confirmed in a notice within five (5) days of the inception of such delay) of the occurrence of a Force Majeure Event and describe in reasonable detail the nature of the Force Majeure Event. If any Force Majeure Event results in a failure to
reinstitute the Critical Systems which lasts for more than the period of time specified in the applicable Service Agreement, Client may, upon notice to Supplier: 
  

	a.	cease payment of the Charges applicable to the non-performing Critical Systems (other than those already accrued and due under the applicable Service Agreement) until the recovery
from such Force Majeure Event has been completed and procure the Services from an alternate source; or 

  

	b.	terminate the affected portion of the Services as of a date specified by Client without regard to Section 24.3. 

  

	16.3	Allocation of Resources. 

  
 Whenever a Force Majeure Event or a disaster causes Supplier to allocate limited resources between or among Supplier’s customers and affiliates, Client shall receive
no less priority in respect of such allocation as any of Supplier’s other customers where taking into account the scope and nature of the Services. 
  
 ARTICLE XVII. 
  

	17.0	SUPPLIER COMPENSATION 

  

	17.1	Charges. 

  
 In consideration of Supplier providing the Services, Client shall pay to Supplier the charges (at the rates and on the basis) set forth in the applicable Service Agreement in the currency specified in the Service
Contract (the “Charges”). All of Supplier’s obligations and services described in a Service Agreement are included in the Charges and no additional compensation shall be due to Supplier other than the Charges. 
  

	17.2	Expenses. 

  

	a.	Non-Travel Expenses. Except for expenses for travel and communication lines covered by subsection b., all expenses relating to the Services are included in the Charges
and shall not be reimbursed by Client unless otherwise agreed to by Client in writing. 

  

	b.	Travel and Communication Expenses. Supplier shall itemize expenses for travel and communication lines. Client shall reimburse Supplier for its out-of-pocket expenditures for
such travel and communication lines pursuant to subsection c. below. 

  

	c.	Reimbursement Guidelines. To the extent Client agrees to reimburse Supplier for any out-of-pocket expenditures, such expenditures shall be passed through to Client at actual
cost with no markup. To be eligible for reimbursement, such expenses must be properly documented and incurred by Supplier in connection with providing the Services in accordance with Client’s corporate travel policies or other Client expense
guidelines which shall be provided to Supplier prior to the Effective Date of the applicable Service Agreement; provided, however, that Supplier shall be responsible for travel expenses relating to Supplier’s internal operations that are not
directly related to performing Services for Client, including account management, training for Supplier’s staff, meetings and seminars. 

  

	17.3	Pricing Methodology. 

  
 The pricing methodology shall be established in the applicable Service Agreement. Supplier shall change the pricing methodology applicable to the Services upon Client’s request. If Client requests a change to the
pricing methodology and such change results in a change to the underlying Services, Client and Supplier shall negotiate an appropriate adjustment to the Services and the Charges, and the change to the pricing methodology shall not become effective
until such adjustment is agreed upon between Client and Supplier. 
  

	17.4	Cost of Living Adjustment. 

  
 Except as otherwise expressly provided in the applicable Service Agreement, there shall be no adjustment in the pricing terms to reflect any price increases, including,
without limitation, a cost of living adjustment. 
  

	17.5	Proration. 

  
 All Charges are to be computed on a calendar month basis and shall be prorated on a per diem basis for any partial month. 
  

	17.6	Recurring Costs. 

  
 If general conditions or technology changes materially reduce Supplier’s recurring costs in providing the Services, without prejudice to Service Agreements executed prior to such general conditions or technology
changes, Supplier shall negotiate with Client with a view to potential sharing of those reduced costs with Client. This provision is not intended to provide a mechanism for reducing Charges as the price/performance characteristics of technology
continue to improve over time, but only to the extent that such improvements could not have been reasonably anticipated as of the Effective Date of an applicable Service Agreement. 
  

	17.7	Supplier’s Efforts to Minimize Charges. 

  
 To the extent any Services are rendered on a time and materials basis or cost basis under any Service Agreement, Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to
complete each assigned task in as economical a manner as practicable and to minimize the time and materials charges or costs and other charges or charges and expenses incurred in connection therewith, to the maximum extent practicable, consistent
with Supplier’s other obligations under the applicable Service Agreement. 
  
 ARTICLE XVIII. 
  

	18.0	PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

  

	18.1	Pricing Detail. 

  
 Supplier shall provide Client with detailed price, delivery, cost to Client and utilization information in the format set forth in the applicable Service Agreement. Supplier shall use a pricing methodology and 

  

 
provide billing detail that will permit a commercial understanding of the price of the Services and compliance with the applicable pricing terms and shall
enable Client to assess from such information the reasonableness of the price of the Services. Pricing detail shall be constructed to reflect the content of Services (e.g., hardware units, software units, person-hours) and the impact of performance
levels. 
  

	18.2	Invoicing. 

  
 As set forth in an applicable Service Agreement, Supplier shall issue invoices to the Entities and units specified by the Client Contract Manager with the pricing detail and in a format and on the media agreed upon by
Client and Supplier. 
  

	18.3	Supporting Documentation. 

  
 Supplier shall provide Client with such supporting documentation and other information as reasonably requested by Client to verify the accuracy of any invoice.

  

	18.4	Payment. 

  

	a.	Client will pay Supplier’s invoices as set forth in the applicable Services Agreement. Client will pay Supplier’s invoices on or before thirty (30) days after
Client’s receipt of such invoice. 

  

	b.	Client will pay each invoice by wire funds transfer or other electronic means acceptable to both Parties to an account specified by Supplier. 

  

	c.	Payment will be made in US dollars. 

  

	d.	If any payments or portions thereof are not received by Supplier within five days after the due date, Client will also pay Supplier a late fee for each day between and including the
sixth day after the due date and the date Supplier receives such late payment in full. The amount of the late fee will be invoiced to Client and payable in accordance with Section 18.4.a. above. The late fee will be based on a rate equal to
the lesser of: 

  

	 	1.	one percent of such payments per every thirty days or portion thereof; or 

  

	 	2.	the maximum amount permissible by the applicable law. 

  

	18.5	Fee Disputes. 

  

	a.	Continuing Obligation of Parties. Each of Client and Supplier acknowledges that the performance of each Service Agreement is critical to the business and operations of Client
and Supplier. Therefore, in the event Client disputes all or any portion of an invoice submitted by Supplier, Client may withhold payment of the amount subject to the dispute; provided, however, that: (1) Client shall continue to pay any undisputed
amount when it becomes due and payable in accordance with the applicable Service Agreement; and (2) Supplier shall continue to provide the Services or otherwise perform its obligations under the applicable Service Agreement. However, in no event may
Client withhold more than one (1) months fee. 

  

	b.	Resolution of Disputes. The Parties shall resolve the dispute in accordance with the audit or dispute resolution procedures set forth in the applicable Service Agreement. No
failure by Client to identify a contested Charge or charges prior to payment of the invoiced amount shall limit or waive any of Client’s rights or remedies with respect to such Charges, including Client’s right to withhold such disputed
amounts from subsequent Charges or charges due to Supplier. Unpaid Charges or charges that are in dispute shall not be considered a basis for default under the applicable Service Agreement. 

  

	c.	Payment of Disputed Amount. In the event that it is determined that one Party should pay all or part of a disputed amount to the other, such Party shall pay such amount plus
interest at a rate per annum equal to the base rate established by LIBOR as of the date the disputed amount would otherwise have been due or a comparable financial institution mutually agreed to by Client and Supplier. Unpaid Charges or charges that
are in dispute shall not be considered a basis for termination under the applicable Service Agreement. 

  

 ARTICLE XIX. 
  

	19.0	TAXES FOR SERVICES PERFORMED IN THE U.S. 

  

	19.1	Information. 

  
 Each Party shall provide and make available to the other Party any applicable resale certificates, information regarding out-of-jurisdiction sales or use of products or services, and other exemption certificates or
information reasonably requested by the other Party. The Parties will work together to pay the correct amount of tax. 
  

	19.2	Taxes. 

  
 Each Party shall be responsible for any real or personal property Taxes, assessments or levies on property it owns or leases, for any franchise, business and occupation and privilege Taxes on its business and for any
Taxes based on its net income or gross receipts. Supplier shall be responsible for any sales, use, excise, value-added, services, consumption and other Taxes and duties payable by Supplier on any goods or services used or consumed by Supplier in
providing the Services where the tax is imposed on Supplier’s acquisition or use of such goods or services and the amount of tax is measured by Supplier’s costs in acquiring such goods or services. Client shall be financially responsible
and liable to Supplier for the amount of any sales, use, excise, value-added, services, consumption or other tax during the Term that is imposed on the provision of the Services as a whole, on any particular Service provided by Supplier, or on
Supplier’s charges for some or all of the Services. 
  

	19.3	Structure. 

  
 The Parties agree to utilize reasonable efforts to structure the provision and receipt of Services, as the case may be, in such a fashion as to minimize, to the extent legally permissible, any sales, use, value-added,
withholding, and similar Taxes payable by the Client. 
  

	19.4	Payment. 

  
 The applicable Service Agreement shall specify whether the Charges include all Taxes and, if not, allocate responsibility for payment of Taxes between Client and Supplier. 
  

	19.5	Tax Credit. 

  
 In the event that the Supplier has incurred a creditable foreign tax with regard to withholding Taxes associated with cross border payments under any Service Agreement, the Parties agree that the Client shall not be
charged or otherwise billed for such Taxes, provided Client furnishes Supplier with a valid receipt for such Taxes. 
  

	19.6	Cooperation. 

  
 Client and Supplier shall work together to pay the correct amount of tax and reasonably cooperate with each other in connection with the other Party’s efforts to minimize its liability for Taxes, to the extent
legally permissible, and to support the other Party upon audit by applicable taxing authorities in the following manner: 
  

	a.	Audit. In the event that a taxing authority does not agree to audit the charges payable in connection with the applicable Service Agreement for sales and use tax purposes, as
part of Supplier’s sales and use tax audits, and proposes to assess sales and use Taxes directly against Client on the aggregate charges for Services provided to Client for which Taxes are not collected, Supplier shall work directly with the
taxing authority to address audit concerns as they pertain to the charges or sales and use Taxes payable in connection with the applicable Service Agreement. In the event that the taxing authority requires any documentation to be submitted directly
by Client, Supplier agrees to cooperate with Client in providing the necessary documentation. 

  

	b.	Payment of Penalties. Supplier agrees to pay and to hold Client harmless against any penalty, interest, or additional tax that may be assessed or levied as a result of the
failure or delay of Supplier or its agents to file any return or information required by law, rule or regulation. Supplier agrees to provide reasonable assistance to Client should Client contest any Taxes imposed on it that results from the Service
Agreement. 

  

	19.7	Segregation of Payment Streams. 

  
 Client and Supplier shall cooperate to segregate the Charges into the following separate payment streams: (a) those for taxable Services; (b) those for nontaxable
Services; (c) those for which a sales, use or other similar Taxes have already been paid by the Supplier; and (d) those for which Supplier functions merely as a paying agent for Client in receiving goods, supplies or services (including leasing and
licensing arrangements) that otherwise are nontaxable or have previously been subject to tax. 
  
 ARTICLE XX. 
  

	20.0	TAXES FOR SERVICES PERFORMED OUTSIDE THE U.S. 

  

	20.1	Taxes. 

  

	a.	Supplier shall be responsible for any sales, use, excise, value-added, services, consumption and other Taxes and duties payable by Supplier on any goods or services used or consumed
by Supplier in providing the Services where the tax is imposed on Supplier’s acquisition or use of such goods or services and the amount of tax is measured by Supplier’s costs in acquiring such goods or services. 

 

	b.	Sales, Use or Excise Taxes. In the event that a sales, use, excise, VAT, consumption or services tax is assessed on the provision of the Services by Supplier to Client or on
Supplier’s charges to Client under any Service Agreement, however levied or assessed, Client shall be responsible for and pay the amount of any such tax. 

  

	c.	Taxes on Relocation/Rerouting of Delivery of Services. Any increase in Taxes assessed as determined by Client, including a gross-up thereon, on the provision of the Services
resulting from Supplier relocating or rerouting the delivery of Services for Supplier’s convenience to, from or through a location other than the Site used to provide the Services as of the Effective Date, shall be paid by Client and Client
shall receive a credit with respect to the Charges invoiced under the applicable Service Agreement equal to such payments made pursuant to this Article XX. 

  

	d.	Personal Property or Use Taxes. Client will also be responsible for paying all personal property or use Taxes due on or with respect to Client Hardware and Client Materials.

  

	e.	Real Property Taxes. Client and Supplier each shall bear sole responsibility for all Taxes, assessments and other real property-related levies on its owned or leased real
property. 

  

	20.2	Segregation of Payment Streams. 

  
 Client and Supplier shall cooperate to segregate the Charges into the following separate payment streams: (a) those for taxable Services; (b) those for nontaxable
Services; (c) those for which a sales, use or other similar Taxes have already been paid by the Supplier; and (d) those for which Supplier functions merely as a paying agent for Client in receiving goods, supplies or services (including leasing and
licensing arrangements) that otherwise are nontaxable or have previously been subject to tax. 
  

	20.3	Cooperation. 

  
 Client and Supplier shall work together to pay the correct amount of tax and reasonably cooperate with each other to minimize such liability to the extent legally permissible. Client and Supplier shall provide and
make available to the other any resale certificates, information regarding out-of-jurisdiction sales or use of equipment, materials or services, and other exemption certificates or information reasonably requested by either party. 
  
 ARTICLE XXI. 
  

	21.0	CLIENT REVIEW RIGHTS 

  

	21.1	Processing. 

  

	a.	Access and Audit Procedure. Supplier will provide Client with commercially reasonable assistance in meeting its audit requirements as set forth in this Section.

  

	 	1.	Supplier will provide access to routinely prepared records and reports to enable Client to conduct appropriate audits (“Audits”) of Supplier’s operations
relating to the performance of Services. The Audits will be limited to verifying that: 

  

	 	(a)	the Charges are accurate; 

  

	 	(b)	Supplier is exercising reasonable care to control the resources provided by Client such as heat, light, and utilities used in providing the Services; 

  

	 	(c)	the Services are being provided in accordance with the Service Level Agreement; 

  

	 	(d)	Supplier is complying with the security requirements set forth in the applicable Service Agreement; and 

  

	 	(e)	Client is in compliance with Client regulatory requirements. 

  

	b.	Audits will: 

  

	 	1.	occur no more than once each calendar year, unless required to meet Client Regulatory Requirements; 

  

	 	2.	not be permitted if it unreasonably interferes with Supplier’s ability to perform the Services in accordance with the Service Levels, unless Client relieves Supplier from
meeting the applicable Service Levels; 

  

	 	3.	be conducted expeditiously, efficiently, and at reasonable business hours; and 

  

	 	4.	be conducted upon reasonable prior written notice, which normally will be at least 30 days, but may be less if Supplier and Client agree in the Policy and Procedures Manual that
certain Audits, such as physical security Audits, may be conducted upon shorter notice. 

  

	c.	Client may request that a mutually agreeable Third Party auditor perform the Audit, at Client’s expense on a non-contingent basis, provided such Third Party auditor executes a
confidentiality agreement reasonably acceptable to Supplier. 

  

	d.	If an Audit demonstrates that Supplier’s invoices for the Services for the audited period were not correct, Supplier will promptly credit Client for the amount of any paid
overcharges, or Client will promptly pay Supplier for the amount of any undercharges. If Supplier disagrees with the findings of an Audit, such disagreement will be addressed by the dispute resolution process set forth in Article XXIII.

  

	21.2	Supplier Non-compliance. 

  
 If any audit by an auditor designated by Client or a regulatory authority results in Supplier being notified that it is not in compliance with any Law or related audit
requirement or accounting principle relating to the Services, Supplier shall take actions to comply with such audit: 
  

	a.	Client Expense. Client shall bear the expense of any such compliance that is: 

  

	 	1.	required by a Law or other audit requirement relating to provision of the Services that relates to Client’s business irrespective of Supplier’s obligations hereunder; or

  

	 	2.	necessary due to Client’s noncompliance with any Law or audit requirement imposed on Client. 

  

	b.	Supplier Expense. Supplier shall bear the expense of any such response that is: 

  

	 	1.	required by a Law or other audit requirement relating to Supplier’s business; 

  

	 	2.	performed by Supplier as part of the Services; or 

  

	 	3.	necessary due to Supplier’s noncompliance with any Law or audit requirement imposed on Supplier. Supplier shall provide to Client a copy or extracts of those portions of
Supplier’s internal audit reports relating to the deficiencies in Services provided to Client under any Service Agreement, and where issues exist, Supplier’s proposals to rectify the same. 

  

	21.3	Record Retention. 

  

	a.	Retention Periods. Supplier shall retain the relevant records (to include all media types) for the following periods: 

  

	 	1.	retain operational and design records and supporting documentation relating to the Services for at least a period of six (6) years from the date of termination of the applicable
Service Agreement; and 

  

	 	2.	retain financial records and supporting documentation relating to the Charges paid or payable by Client for at least a period of six (6) years from the date of relevant invoice.

  

	b.	Storage and Return of Records. Supplier shall provide the storage space and media required for proper storage of the records and documentation described in this Section
21.3. At the expiry or termination of the applicable Service Agreement at the Client’s discretion, Client may request that the Supplier hand over to Client the records and supporting documentation referred to in subsection a.1.
above. 

  

	21.4	Access and Reports. 

  

	a.	Access. Upon reasonable prior notice, Supplier shall provide to Client access to: (1) records and supporting documentation (including Source Code to the extent permitted by
Law or under the applicable third party agreements) relating to the Services and the Charges as may be necessary for Client to perform the audits described in and subject to Section 21.1. 

  

	b.	Status Reports. Supplier shall provide to Client periodic status reports in accordance with the Client’s audit procedures of which Supplier has been notified in advance
regarding Supplier’s resolution of any audit-related compliance activity for which Supplier is responsible. 

  

	21.5	Audit Software. 

  
 Supplier shall, as specified in the applicable Service Agreement to the extent permitted under the applicable third party agreements and to the extent such audit software will not materially degrade Supplier’s
performance under any of the Service Agreements or for any of its other customers, operate and maintain such audit software as Client may provide to Supplier during the Term. 
  

	21.6	Facilities. 

  
 Upon reasonable prior notice, Supplier shall provide to Client and such independent auditors and inspectors as Client may designate in writing and which Supplier agrees, on Supplier’s premises (or if the audit is
being performed of a Supplier Agent, the Supplier Agent’s premises if necessary) space, office furnishings (including lockable cabinets), telephone and facsimile services, utilities and office-related equipment and duplicating services as
Client or such auditors and inspectors may reasonably require to perform the audits described in this Article XXI. 
  
 ARTICLE XXII. 
  

	22.0	VOLUME CHANGES AND ADDITIONAL BUSINESS UNITS 

  

	22.1	Substantial Change in Volume. 

  
 In the event that Client’s use of the Services decreases or increases by more than the volume percentage set forth in the applicable Service Agreement, Client and
Supplier shall negotiate and implement an appropriate reduction or increase to the Charges. 
  

	22.2	Additional Business Units. 

  
 The Client Contract Manager, in consultation with the Supplier Contract Manager, shall have the right to add additional sites, Entities or units under a Service Agreement
and shall amend the appropriate Service Agreement accordingly. Client shall share information with Supplier to allow Supplier to determine which resources will be required to meet Client’s needs. Supplier shall: (a) formulate a plan to
accommodate Client’s needs, without a disruption in service to Client, in a cost-effective manner; and (b) submit such plan, including any adjustments to the Charges, for Client to review. Upon Client’s acceptance of the plan, Supplier may
adjust the Charges. Client shall not be obligated to obtain the Services from Supplier with respect to any additional site, Entity or unit (whether acquired or formed by Client). 
  

 ARTICLE XXIII. 
  

	23.0	DISPUTES 

  

	23.1	Project Managers. 

  
 All disputes relating to the applicable Service Agreement shall initially be referred by either Party to the Client and Supplier Project Managers. If the Project Managers are unable to resolve the dispute within five
(5) business day(s) (or such other date agreed upon by the Project Managers) after referral of the matter to them, notice shall be given to the Client Contract Manager and the Supplier Contract Manager. 
  

	23.2	Contract Managers. 

  
 If the Client Contract Manager and the Supplier Contract Manager are unable to resolve the dispute within ten (10) business days (or such other date agreed upon by the Contract Managers) after referral of the matter
to them, the Parties shall notify their respective senior management of the dispute. Upon notification to senior management, senior management may, if both Parties agree, meet to resolve the dispute, but if senior management is unable to resolve the
dispute then (whether or not such a meeting takes place) within ten (10) business days of referral (or such other period as the Parties may agree), the Parties may pursue available legal and equitable remedies or if mutually agreeable an independent
dispute resolution mediator. 
  
 ARTICLE XXIV. 

 

	24.0	TERMINATION 

  
 Client’s Termination rights with respect to the Services will be as set forth in an applicable Service Agreement. 
  
 ARTICLE XXV. 
  

	25.0	TERMINATION ASSISTANCE 

  

	25.1	Termination Assistance Services. 

  
 In the event of the expiration or termination of all or of part of the Services being provided under any Service Agreement, Supplier shall, upon Client’s request,
continue to provide the Services which were provided by Supplier prior thereto and any new services requested by Client that may be required to facilitate the transfer of the affected Services to Client or a third party service provider, as
applicable, or Client’s designee, including, providing to Client or third party personnel training in the performance of the affected Services, as set forth in the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

 ARTICLE XXVI. 
  

	26.0	WARRANTIES 

  

	26.1	By Client. 

  
 The Client Contracting Party represents and warrants as follows: 
  

	a.	Authority. Client Contracting Party is as an organization duly organized, validly existing and in good standing, and has all requisite power and authority to execute, deliver
and perform its obligations under the Service Agreement. Client is duly licensed, authorized or qualified to do business and is in good standing in every jurisdiction in which a license, authorization or qualification is required for the ownership
or leasing of its assets or the transaction of business of the character transacted by it except where the failure to be so licensed, authorized or qualified would not have a material adverse effect on Client’s ability to fulfill its
obligations under the Service Agreement. The execution, delivery and performance of the Service Agreement have been duly authorized by Client Contracting Party. 

  

	b.	Compliance with Laws. Client shall comply with all applicable Laws applicable to Client and shall obtain all applicable permits and licenses required of Client in connection
with its obligations under the Service Agreement. 

  

	c.	Right to Grant Licenses. Client has the right to grant to Supplier any license to use the Client Materials and Client Data utilized by Supplier pursuant to the Service
Agreement. 

  

	26.2	By Supplier. 

  
 The Supplier Contracting Party represents and warrants as follows: 
  

	a.	Authority. Supplier Contracting Party is an organization duly organized, validly existing and in good standing, and has all requisite power and authority to execute, deliver
and perform its obligations under the Service Agreement. Supplier is duly licensed, authorized or qualified to do business and is in good standing in every jurisdiction in which a license, authorization or qualification is required for the ownership
or leasing of its assets or the transaction of business of the character transacted by it except where the failure to be so licensed, authorized or qualified would not have a material adverse effect on Supplier’s ability to fulfill its
obligations under the Service Agreement. The execution, delivery and performance of the Service Agreement have been duly authorized by Supplier Contracting Party. 

  

	b.	Compliance with Laws. Supplier shall comply with all Laws applicable to Supplier where failure to do so would have a material adverse effect on Client’s business or on
the Services. 

  

	c.	Right to Grant Licenses. Subject to Client’s compliance with the licenses granted in Section 12.3 with respect to Supplier Third Party Materials, Supplier has the
right to grant to Client any license to use the Supplier Materials and the Supplier Tools provided under the Service Agreement. 

  

	d.	Ownership of Hardware. With respect to all Hardware sold to Client pursuant to a Service Agreement, Supplier can and shall deliver good and marketable title free from any
claim or encumbrance, except as otherwise agreed. 

  

	e.	Open Source. Except as expressly approved in writing by the Client Project Manager, any Work Product or Developed Materials do not contain, and shall not have been developed
or modified through the use of, any open source or public library software licensed pursuant to any GNU public license. Supplier and Client agree that activities performed by Supplier and Client under the MSA and attendant documents does not
constitute a transfer or distribution of any software from Client to Supplier. In consideration of the mutual promises set forth in the MSA and elsewhere, the Parties agree that neither will take a position contrary to the previous sentence in any
forum in the future. The terms of the Agreement supercede all other agreements between the Parties, whether written or oral. 

  

	26.3	Disclaimer. 

  
 EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN SECTION 26.1 AND SECTION 26.2, NEITHER THE CLIENT CONTRACTING PARTY NOR THE SUPPLIER CONTRACTING PARTY MAKES ANY OTHER REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES IN RESPECT OF THE SERVICES, THE
SOFTWARE OR THE HARDWARE AND EACH EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN RESPECT OF THE SERVICES, THE MATERIALS
OR THE HARDWARE. 
  
 ARTICLE XXVII. 
  

	27.0	INDEMNITIES AND LIABILITY 

  

	27.1	Indemnity by Client. 

  
 Subject to the exclusions set forth in Section 27.8 herein, Client shall indemnify Supplier, and its successors and assigns and its officers, directors, employees, subcontractors, consultants, representatives
and agents, from and against any and all losses, damages, injuries (including death), causes of action, claims, penalties, interest, additional Taxes, demands and expenses, including reasonable legal fees and expenses, of any kind or nature arising
out or on account of, or resulting from, any claim or allegation of a third party: 
  

	a.	that the Client Materials, the Client Hardware and the Client Data or any other resources or items provided to Supplier by Client under the Service Agreement infringe upon or
misappropriate the proprietary rights of any third party (except as may have been caused by a modification by Supplier or Supplier Agents or Supplier’s or Supplier Agents’ combination, operation or use with devices, data or programs
furnished by Supplier or any other modification made by Supplier or Supplier Agents); 

  

	b.	relating to the inaccuracy or untruthfulness of any representation or warranty made by the Client Contracting Party under the Service Agreement; 

  

	c.	relating to the Client’s non-compliance with contracts relating to the provision of Third Party Services; 

  

	d.	relating to Client’s failure to obtain Client Consents; or 

  

	e.	relating to any duties or obligations to Client Agents under the Service Agreement. 

  
 Client shall indemnify Supplier from any costs and expenses incurred in connection with the enforcement of this Section 27.1.

  

	27.2	Indemnity by Supplier. 

  
 Subject to the exclusions set forth in Section 27.8 herein, Supplier shall indemnify Client, its successors and assigns and its officers, directors, employees,
subcontractors, representatives and agents, from and against any and all losses, damages, injuries (including death), causes of action, claims, penalties, interest, including reasonable legal fees and expenses, of any kind or nature arising out or
on account of, or resulting from, any claim or allegation of a third party: 
  

	a.	that the Supplier Materials, the Developed Materials, the Supplier Tools, Work Product, the Supplier Hardware, (collectively “Product”), any modifications to Client
Materials performed by Supplier or any other resources or items provided to Client by Supplier pursuant to the Service Agreement infringe upon or misappropriate the proprietary rights of any third party except to the extent that Supplier has no
responsibility for: 

  

	 	1.	anything Client supplies that is incorporated into the Product; 

  

	 	2.	modification of Product by Client; 

  

	 	3.	the combination operation or use of Product with other materials, hardware or software not provided by Supplier and the claim relates to such combination use; and

  

	 	4.	Infringement of Client Materials alone, as opposed to its combination with Product provided by Supplier; 

  

	b.	relating to any duties or obligations of the Supplier to Supplier Agents arising under the Service Agreement; 

  

	c.	relating to Supplier’s failure to obtain the Supplier Consents; 

  

	d.	relating to non-compliance by Supplier with the Third Party Agreements; 

  

	e.	relating to Supplier’s breach of the warranties contained in Sections 26.2. a., b., c., d., and e.; 

  

	f.	relating to any liability of Client arising out of Supplier’s failure to comply with any relevant data protection or similar legislation in any jurisdiction where Services are
being provided or which data is being transported or transmitted or Client’s failure so to comply to the extent that such failure was caused by Supplier’s negligent acts or omissions; or 

  

	g.	relating to Supplier’s failure to implement physical or data security controls imposed by the Service Agreement. 

  
 Supplier shall indemnify Client from any costs and expenses incurred in connection with the
enforcement of this Section 27.2. 
  

	27.3	Cross-Indemnity. 

  
 Each of Client and Supplier shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the other Party, its directors, officers and employees, from any and all claims, actions, damages, liabilities, costs and expenses, including
reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, for: 
  

	a.	the death or personal injury of third parties, including invitees or employees of the indemnitor, arising out of, or in any way resulting from, the negligent or willful acts or
omissions of the indemnitor or any of its agents, employees or representatives; or 

  

	b.	the damage, loss or destruction of real or tangible personal property of the other Party or third parties, including invitees or employees of the indemnitor, arising out of, or in
any way resulting from, the negligent or willful acts or omissions of the indemnitor or its agents, employees or representatives. 

  
 The Indemnifying Party shall indemnify the Indemnified Party from any costs and expenses incurred in connection with the enforcement of this Section 27.3.

  

	27.4	Infringement. 

  
 In the event of any claim pursuant to Section 26.2.c or Section 27.2.a, or if in Client’s and Supplier’s jointly agreed opinion, any portion of the Materials (other than Client Materials) is
likely to become the subject of any such claim, then Client shall do one of the following: 
  

	a.	Right to Continue Use. Client shall, at Supplier’s request, attempt to obtain the right to continue to use the Materials in question on reasonable commercial terms, such
terms to be agreed by Supplier. If so obtained, then Supplier shall reimburse Client the costs of obtaining or securing the continued right to use such Materials. 

  

	b.	Right to Continue Use, Modification or Substitution. If subsection a. above does not apply either due to Client’s failure to obtain the right to continue to use
the Materials in question after reasonably diligent effort or Supplier’s reasonable failure to agree to such terms, then Supplier shall (in its discretion): 

  

	 	1.	obtain the right to continue the use of the Materials in question; 

  

	 	2.	modify the Materials in question so that it does not infringe but remains equivalent; or 

  

	 	3.	substitute equivalent, non-infringing items for the Materials in question, or substitute non-infringing items for the Materials without material loss of functionality.

  
 The costs relating to Supplier providing any of 1., 2. and
3. above shall be borne by Client unless Supplier is proven to be in breach of warranty pursuant to Section 26.2.c or a claim is made by Client pursuant to Section 27.2.a. This provision is without prejudice to Client’s or
Supplier’s rights to any claim for any amounts due relating to any breach of warranty pursuant to this Article XXVII. 
  

	27.5	Indemnification Procedures. 

  
 If any civil, criminal, administrative or investigative action or proceeding (each, a “Claim”) is commenced against a Party entitled to indemnification
under Section 27.1, Section 27.2 or Section 27.3 (an “Indemnified Party”), notice thereof shall be given to the Party that is obligated to provide indemnification (the “Indemnifying Party”) as
promptly as practicable. After such notice, if the Indemnifying Party shall acknowledge in writing to such Indemnified Party that the Service Agreement applies with respect to such Claim, then the Indemnifying Party shall be entitled, if it so
elects, in a notice delivered to the Indemnified Party not less than ten (10) days prior to the date on which a response to such Claim is due, to immediately take control of the defense and investigation of such Claim and to employ and engage
attorneys of its sole choice to handle and defend the same, at the Indemnifying Party’s sole cost and expense. The Indemnified Party shall cooperate in all reasonable respects with the Indemnifying Party and its attorneys in the investigation,
trial and defense of such Claim and any appeal arising therefrom; provided, however, that the Indemnified Party may, at its own cost and expense, participate, through its attorneys or otherwise, in such investigation, trial and defense of such Claim
and any appeal arising therefrom. No settlement of a Claim that involves a remedy other than the payment of money by the Indemnifying Party shall be entered into without the written consent of the Indemnified Party. After notice by the Indemnifying
Party to the Indemnified Party of its election to assume full control of the defense of any such Claim, the Indemnifying Party shall not be liable to the Indemnified Party for any legal expenses incurred thereafter by such Indemnified Party in
connection with the defense of that Claim. 
  
 If the Indemnifying Party does not
assume full control over the defense of a Claim subject to such defense as provided in this Section 27.5, the Indemnifying Party may participate in such defense, at its sole cost and expense, and the Indemnified Party shall have the right to
defend the Claim in such manner as it may deem appropriate, at the cost and expense of the Indemnifying Party. 
  

	27.6	Direct Damages. 

  
 Neither Client nor Supplier shall be liable to the other Party for any direct damages arising out of or relating to its performance under any Service Agreement, whether based on an action or claim in contract, equity,
negligence, tort or otherwise, for all events, acts or omissions, in an amount to exceed in the aggregate for all claims and causes of action under a Services Agreement an amount equal to the Charges payable to Supplier pursuant to the affected
Service Agreement during the nine (9) month period immediately preceding the occurrence of the event, act or omission in question (the “Direct Damages Cap”). In the event a Party is liable under the Service Agreement for damages in
excess of the Direct Damages Cap, the other Party reserves the right to demand the higher amount or may terminate the MSA and all Service Agreements upon immediate notice to the liable Party notwithstanding the cure period set forth in a Service
Agreement. The following (without limitation) shall be considered direct damages and Supplier shall not assert that they are consequential damages pursuant to Section 27.7 to the extent they result from Supplier’s failure to provide the
Services in accordance with the Service Agreement: 
  

	a.	costs and expenses of recreating or reloading any of Client’s lost, stolen or damaged information; 

  

	b.	costs and expenses of implementing a work-around in respect of Supplier’s or Supplier Agents’ failure to provide all or a portion of the Services or any part thereof;

  

	c.	costs and expenses of replacing lost, stolen or damaged Hardware and Materials; 

  

	d.	costs and expenses incurred by Client to correct errors in software maintenance and enhancements provided as part of the Services or any part thereof; 

  

	e.	regulatory fines imposed against Client directly attributed to Supplier’s failure to perform its duties under the Agreement; 

  

	f.	costs and expenses incurred by Client to procure from an alternate vendor, or to perform itself, all or any part of Services the performance of which is the obligation of Supplier
hereunder, to the extent in excess of Supplier’s charges under the Service Agreement; and 

  

	g.	straight time, overtime or related expenses incurred by Client, travel expenses, overtime expenses, telecommunications charges and similar charges, due to failure of Supplier to
provide all or a portion of the Services incurred in connection with a. through e. above and all of the foregoing subject to Client’s duty to mitigate damages. 

  
 To the extent any amount is paid to Client pursuant to this Section 27.6, the payment
shall be in the currency specified in the Service Agreement, utilizing a rate of exchange equal to the closing mid point spot rate published in the “Financial Times” for the first Monday of the month in which the event occurred.

  

	27.7	Consequential Damages. 

  
 Neither Client nor Supplier shall be liable for, nor will the measure of damages include, any indirect, special or consequential damages or amounts for loss of income,
profits or savings arising out of or relating to Client’s or Supplier’s performance under any Service Agreement. 
  

	27.8	Exclusions. 

  
 The exclusions of liability set forth in Section 27.6 and Section 27.7 are not applicable to: (a) indemnification claims as set forth in Sections 28.1, 28.2, 28.3; (b) Supplier’s liability
under Article XIII and Sections 15.1, 15.3, 15.6; and (d) Client’s liability under Article XIII and Sections 15.6 and 15.2. 
  

	27.9	Injunctive Relief. 

  
 Both parties acknowledge and agree that a breach of Article XIII and Article XV may give rise to irreparable injury that may not adequately compensable in monetary damages. Accordingly, either Party may
seek injunctive relief against the breach or threatened breach of Article XIII and Article XV in addition to any such legal and equitable remedies available. 
  
 ARTICLE XXVIII. 
  

	28.0	INSURANCE 

  

	28.1	Insurance. 

  
 During the Term, Supplier shall maintain insurance coverage with carriers acceptable to Client and in the amounts set forth in the Service Agreement as would be required to cover Supplier’s obligations and
liabilities pursuant to the applicable Service Agreement. 
  

	28.2	Insurance Documentation. 

  
 The Supplier Contracting Party shall furnish to Client either a certificate showing compliance with the insurance requirements set forth in the applicable Service
Agreement, or certified copies of all insurance policies within ten (10) days of Client’s written request. The certificate will provide that Client will receive thirty (30) days prior written notice from the insurer of any termination or
reduction in the amount or scope of coverage. Supplier’s furnishing of certificates of insurance or purchase of insurance shall not release Supplier of its obligations or liabilities under this contract. 
  

 ARTICLE XXIX. 
  

	29.0	MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 

  

	29.1	Assignment. 

  
 The Supplier Contracting Party shall not assign the MSA or any Service Agreement (or any portion thereof) without Client’s written consent. Upon notice to Supplier, the Client Contracting Party may assign the MSA
and any Service Agreement (or any portion thereof) without Supplier’s consent to any affiliate or subsidiary of the Client Contracting Party or pursuant to a merger, reorganization, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Client
Contracting Party or sale of sufficient stock to constitute a change of control. The Service Agreement shall be binding on the parties and their respective successors and permitted assigns. Any assignment in violation of this Section 29.1
shall be void. 
  

	29.2	Notices. 

  
 All notices, requests, consents, approvals and other communications required or permitted under any Service Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed given when delivered in hand or when mailed by a reliable
national mail service, registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, and addressed to the address stated in the applicable Service Agreement. Either Party may change its address for notification purposes by giving the
other Party notice of the new address and the date upon which it will become effective. 
  

	29.3	Counterparts. 

  
 The Service Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, all of which taken together shall constitute the agreement between the parties for the purpose of the MSA. 
  

	29.4	Relationship. 

  
 The parties intend to create an independent contractor relationship and nothing contained in the MSA shall be construed to make either Supplier or Client partners, joint venturers, principals, agents or employees of
the other. No officer, director, employee, agent, affiliate or contractor retained by Supplier to perform work on Client’s behalf hereunder shall be deemed to be an employee, agent or contractor of Client. Neither Party shall have any right,
power or authority, express or implied, to bind the other. Supplier shall be responsible for compliance with all Laws involving, but not limited to, employment of labor, hours of labor, working conditions, payment of wages, and payment of Taxes, and
Client shall have no responsibility in relation thereto. Supplier is solely responsible for payment of: 
  

	a.	all income, disability, withholding, and other employment Taxes relating to Supplier’s officers, directors, employees, agents, affiliates or contractors where applicable; and

  

	b.	all medical benefit premiums, vacation pay, sick pay or other fringe benefits resulting from Supplier’s retention of any such officers, directors, employees, agents, affiliates
or contractors. 

  

	29.5	Consents, Approvals, Notices and Requests. 

  
 Unless otherwise specified in the Service Agreement, all consents, approvals, notices, and requests, acceptances or similar actions to be given by either Party under the
Service Agreement shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed and each Party shall make only reasonable requests under the Service Agreement. 
  

	29.6	Severability. 

  
 If any term or provision of the Service Agreement, or of any document incorporated therein by reference is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, then the remaining provisions of the Service
Agreement or the application of such provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is invalid or unenforceable shall not be affected thereby, and each such provision of the Service Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to
the extent granted by law and such term or provision shall be deemed to be deleted. 
  

	29.7	Waiver. 

  
 No term or condition of the Service Agreement or of any document incorporated therein by reference shall be deemed waived and no breach shall be deemed excused unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and
signed by the Party claimed to have waived or consented. No consent by any Party to, or waiver of, a breach by the other, whether express or implied, shall constitute a consent to, waiver of, or excuse for any different or subsequent breach.

  

	29.8	Entire Agreement. 

  
 The MSA and the Service Agreements entered into pursuant thereto are the entire agreement between the parties with respect to its subject matter, and there are no other representations, understandings or agreements
between the parties relative to such subject matter. 
  

	29.9	Amendments. 

  
 No amendment to, or change, waiver or discharge of any provision of the Service Agreement shall be valid unless in writing and signed by an authorized representative of Client Contracting Party and Supplier
Contracting Party against which such amendment, change, waiver or discharge is sought to be enforced. 
  

	29.10 	Governing Law. 

  
 The Service Agreement shall be interpreted in accordance with and governed by the laws specified in the Service Agreement, except in relation to the interpretation of definition of Work Product, and excluding the
provisions of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and any conflict of law provisions which would require application of another choice of law. 
  

	29.11 	Survival. 

  
 The terms of the Service Agreement that by their sense and context are intended to survive shall survive termination or expiration of the Service Agreement, in whole or in part, for any reason whatsoever, including,
without limitation, the terms of Article XIII, Article XIV, Article XXI, Article XXV, Article XXVI, Article XXVII, Section 11.1, Section 11.2, Section 11.3, Section 11.5.f.,
Section 11.12, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 15.6, Section 15.7, Section 15.8, this Section 29.11 and Section 29.13 of these Terms and Conditions. 
  

	29.12 	Third Party Beneficiaries. 

  
 Each of the Client Contracting Party and the Supplier Contracting Party intends that the Service Agreement shall not benefit any person or Entity other than Client
Contracting Party and the Supplier Contracting Party, or create any right or cause of action in or on behalf of, any person or Entity other than the Client Contracting Party or the Supplier Contracting Party. 
  

	29.13 	Covenant of Further Assurances. 

  
 The Client Contracting Party and the Supplier Contracting Party covenant and agree that, subsequent to the Effective Date and without any additional consideration, each
of Client and Supplier shall execute and deliver any further legal instruments and perform any acts which are or may become necessary to effectuate the purposes of the Service Agreement. 
  

	29.14 	Cumulative Remedies. 

  
 Except as specifically provided herein, including but not limited to the effectiveness any limitation of liability set forth herein, no remedy made available to Client or Supplier hereunder is intended to be exclusive
of any other remedy, and each and every remedy shall be cumulative and shall be in addition to every other remedy provided hereunder or available at law or in equity. 
  

  
 EXHIBIT C 

 
 to the 
  
 MASTER SERVICES AGREEMENT 
  
 [FORM OF] 
 SERVICE AGREEMENT

 Number              
  
 THIS SERVICE AGREEMENT (“Service Agreement”) is
effective as of                      ,              (the
“Effective Date”) by and between                     , a
             corporation, (“Client Contracting Party”), with offices at
                        , and
                        , a              corporation,
(“Supplier Contracting Party”), with offices at                         . 
  
 RECITALS 
  
 WHEREAS, Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party have entered into a Master Services Agreement dated as of
                     ,              (the “MSA”);

  
 WHEREAS, in accordance with the MSA, Client Contracting Party
wishes to obtain from Supplier Contracting Party, and Supplier Contracting Party wishes to provide to Client Contracting Party, certain information technology and related services as described in this Service Agreement; and 
  
 WHEREAS, each of Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party
desires that the Terms and Conditions, attached as Exhibit B to the MSA, as modified by this Service Agreement (collectively, the “Terms and Conditions”) be incorporated by reference into this Service Agreement; 

 
 NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the covenants and agreements
set forth below and in the MSA, Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party hereby agree as follows. 
  
 ARTICLE I. 
  
 INTRODUCTORY PROVISIONS 
  
 1.1
Definitions. Terms used in this Service Agreement with initial capital letters shall have the respective meanings set forth herein or, if not set forth herein, in Exhibit A to the MSA, or, if not set forth in either of the foregoing, in
the Statement of Work attached hereto. 
  
 1.2 Exhibits.
This Service Agreement hereby incorporates by reference the following exhibits: 
  

			
	Exhibit 1	  	Statement of Work
	Exhibit 2	  	Notices

  
 1.3 Terms and
Conditions. All references in the Service Agreement to the Terms and Conditions shall refer to the Terms and Conditions as modified by the Statement of Work. 
  

 1.4 Hierarchy of Terms. 
  
 (a) Terms and Conditions and Service Agreement. Section 1.2 of the Terms and Conditions sets
forth the hierarchy among the Terms and Conditions and the Service Agreement. 
  
 (b) Body of Service Agreement and Exhibits. In the event of any conflict between the terms of the body of this Service Agreement and the Terms and Conditions, on the one hand, and the terms in any of the
exhibits attached hereto, on the other hand, the terms in the body of this Service Agreement or the Terms and Conditions shall prevail. 
  
 1.5 Cross-References. This Service Agreement may provide parenthetical cross-references to one or more provisions in the Terms and Conditions.
These cross-references are provided for convenience of reference only. 
  
 1.6 Client and Supplier. For purposes of this Service Agreement, unless otherwise expressly set forth in this Agreement, the term “Supplier” shall mean only Supplier Contracting Party and the term
“Client” shall mean only Client Contracting Party. 
  
 ARTICLE II. 
  
 TERM 
  
 2.1 Initial Term. The Initial Term of this Service Agreement shall
commence on the Effective Date and shall continue until the later of: (a) the Expiration Date, and (b) the last date during which Supplier is obligated to provide any Termination Assistance Services. The Expiration Date of this Service Agreement is
                             ,
            . 
  
 2.2 Renewal. This Service Agreement shall automatically be renewed for a least one (1) successive Renewal Terms, each having a duration of twelve (12) months, unless Client gives written notice to the contrary
at least six (6) months before the expiration of the Initial Term or any Renewal Term, however, this provision shall not apply after the expiration of the last Renewal Term. (See Terms and Conditions, Section 2.2) 
  
 ARTICLE III. 
  
 SERVICES 
  
 3.1 Designated Services. The Statement of Work describes the Services which Supplier shall provide to Client under
this Service Agreement. The following Schedules are incorporated in and made part of the Statement of Work: 
  
 Schedule A - Client Software 
 Schedule B -
Service Levels 
 Schedule C - Charges 
 Schedule D - Transition 
 Schedule E - Employees and Human Resources 
 Schedule F - Benchmarking 
 Schedule G -
Standards 
 Schedule H - Governance 
 Schedule I - Client Direct Competitors 
 Schedule J - Customer Satisfaction 
 Schedule K - In-Flight Projects 
 Schedule L -
Termination and Termination Assistance 
  
 3.2 Third Party
Service Providers. Subject to Section 5.1.a. of the Terms and Conditions, Client may, now or in the future, use one or more third-party service providers to provide information technology and related services that relate to, interact
with, or depend upon the Services. Supplier shall 

  

 
provide all reasonable cooperation to Client and such third-party service providers in connection with the provision of such Third Party Services.

  
 ARTICLE IV. 
  
 MISCELLANEOUS 
  
 4.1 Notices. All notices, requests, consents and other communications
required or permitted under this Service Agreement shall be addressed as set forth in Exhibit 2. 
  
 4.2 Governing Law. This Service Agreement shall be interpreted in accordance with, and governed by, the laws of the United States of America and
the State of                     . Each Party hereby consents to the exclusive jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in the
State of Michigan. 
  
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Service Agreement has been
executed by the Parties as of the Effective Date. 
  

									
	Supplier Contracting Party	 	 	 	Client Contracting Party
					
	By:	 	 	 	 	 	By:	 	 
	(Print):	 	 	 	 	 	(Print):	 	 
	Title:	 	 	 	 	 	Title:	 	 

  

  
 EXHIBIT 1 

 
 to the 
  
 SERVICE AGREEMENT 
  
 Statement of Work 
  

  
 Table of Contents

  

					
	 1.0
	  	 Executive Summary
	  	3
			
	 2.0
	  	 List of Schedules
	  	3
			
	 3.0
	  	 Scope
	  	3
	 3.1
	  	 Policy and Procedures Manual
	  	3
	 3.2
	  	 Supplier will perform
	  	4
	 3.3
	  	 Production Support
	  	4
	 3.4
	  	 Development and QA
	  	5
			
	 4.0
	  	 General Assumptions
	  	5
			
	 5.0
	  	 Development Responsibilities
	  	6
	 5.1
	  	 Activities and Procedures
	  	6
	 5.2
	  	 Supplier Application Development Responsibilities
	  	8
	 5.3
	  	 Client Application Development Responsibilities
	  	9
	 5.4
	  	 In-Flight Projects
	  	10
			
	 6.0
	  	 Organizational Roles and Responsibilities
	  	10
	 6.1
	  	 Supplier Roles and Responsibilities
	  	10
	 6.2
	  	 Client Roles and Responsibilities
	  	11
			
	 7.0
	  	 Supplier Tasks, Deliverables and Completion Criteria
	  	12
	 7.1
	  	 Assessment and Planning
	  	12
	 7.2
	  	 Application Support Migration
	  	12
	 7.3
	  	 Development Migration
	  	13
	 7.4
	  	 Steady State
	  	14
	 7.5
	  	 Transformation
	  	15
	 7.6
	  	 Stakeholder Change Management
	  	16
			
	 8.0
	  	 Additional Client Responsibilities
	  	17
	 8.1
	  	 Change Management
	  	17
	 8.2
	  	 Office Space and Other Facilities
	  	17
			
	 9.0
	  	 Deliverable Materials Review and Acceptance Procedure
	  	18
			
	 10.0
	  	 Deliverable Materials
	  	18
			
	 11.0
	  	 Roles and Responsibilities Matrix
	  	21

  

	1.0	Executive Summary 

  
 This Statement of Work describes the Application Development and Application Maintenance/Enhancement Services Supplier is providing to Client under the MSA. 
  
 The Services provided under this Statement of Work include application support, programming
and technical development services for the Client Information and Learning environment. 
  
 Supplier will: 
  

	a.	Assume responsibility for production support, enhancement, and development of the Client Software set forth in Schedule A to this Statement of Work; 

 

	b.	Implement (for 1 & 2, Supplier is the installer, trainer of Client applications management staff and Agents for tools, processes and methodology): 

  

	 	1.	A governance model with applicable supporting tools; 

  

	 	2.	Support processes with applicable supporting tools; and 

  

	 	3.	Development methods and tools. 

  

	c.	Deliver year-over-year performance enhancements and productivity improvements; 

  

	d.	For the transitioned areas and the Client Business Area Analysts interfacing with the transitioned areas, achieve CMMI SEI Level 3 proficiency within twelve (12) months following
the completion of Transition; 

  

	e.	Drive down the cost of maintaining existing applications to allow increased investment on strategic product and development initiatives; and 

  

	f.	Improve development cycle times and time to market for new products. 

  

	2.0	List of Schedules 

  
 The following Schedules are incorporated in and made part of this Statement of Work: 
  
 Schedule A - Client Software 
 Schedule B -
Service Levels 
 Schedule C - Charges 
 Schedule D - Transition 
 Schedule E - Employees and Human Resources 
 Schedule F - Benchmarking 
 Schedule G -
Standards 
 Schedule H - Governance 
 Schedule I - Client Direct Competitors 
 Schedule J - Customer Satisfaction 
 Schedule K - In-Flight Projects 
 Schedule L -
Termination and Termination Assistance 
  

	3.0	Scope 

  
 In accordance with the provisions included in the final version of the Policy and Procedures Manual to be developed and delivered by Supplier as part of Transition, Supplier will perform the development, testing, and
support activities, as well as the maintenance of supporting documentation, for the Client Software set forth in Schedule A, as amended from time to time in accordance with the Change Control Procedures. 
  

	3.1	Policy and Procedures Manual 

  

	a.	 Client and Supplier agree that the Policy and Procedures Manual will incorporate appropriate implementation details, including a roles and responsibilities matrix,
and detailed procedures for the Services. An outline of the Policy and Procedures Manual is included in Schedule H (Governance). The Policy and Procedures Manual will be developed as part of the Transition Plan, and the first draft will be
delivered to Client for review and comment no later than ninety (90) days after the Effective Date. 

  

	 	 
Following delivery of comments by Client to Supplier, Supplier shall undertake to revise the Policy and Procedures Manual to address Client’s comments.
The final version of the Policy and Procedures Manual shall be delivered by Supplier to Client for review and approval sixty (60) days prior to the completion of Transition. 

  

	b.	Once the final Policy and Procedures Manual has been approved by Client, the approved Policy and Procedures Manual shall govern Supplier’s performance of the Services under
this Statement of Work. 

  

	3.2	Supplier will perform 

  

	a.	2nd Level support functions; 

  

	b.	Incident problem management; 

  

	c.	Break/fix; 

  

	d.	Minor enhancements; 

  

	e.	Project – estimate/design/management; 

  

	f.	Test – design/management; 

  

	g.	Test – execution; 

  

	h.	Work requests – log, prioritize, track; 

  

	i.	Interface – design, build, run; 

  

	j.	Define/establish ADM policies and processes; 

  

	k.	Metrics and reporting; and 

  

	l.	Content platform advisory services. 

  

	3.3	Production Support 

  
 “Production Support” consists of Level 2 support Services (queries, non-programming fixes and workarounds) and Level 3 support Services involving defect fixes and sustaining tasks for break/fix. The
Client Level 1 support help desk will generally log the problem in the Service Request Management Software with relevant details. For problems received directly into Level 2, the Client support personnel will log the problem into Service Request
Management Software. 
  

	a.	Level 2 non-programming Services will include: 

  

	 	1.	Fixes to problems and requests for services raised in the Service Request Management software; 

  

	 	2.	Answers to queries received through email; 

  

	 	3.	Responses to phone inquiries and voice messages; and 

  

	 	4.	Detailed problem analysis. 

  

	b.	Level 3 code fix Services will be invoked by the Level 2 team, as required, applying fixes required for resolution of production defects. 

  

	c.	The Services related to Production Support are as follows, and shall be provided in accordance with the processes and procedures set forth in the Policy and Procedures Manual:

  

	 	1.	Severity 1 Defects 

  
 Severity 1 defects are categorized as a problem resulting in the failure of the complete Software system, of a subsystem, or of a Software unit within the
system which causes a critical business impact, and for which there is no workaround available. Production cannot proceed or is adversely impacted and an immediate solution will be required. The following requirements apply to Severity 1 defect fix
activity: 
  
 (a) 24x7 on-call support for Client Software;

  

 (b) Business Day telephone support for Client Software; 
  
 (c) Fifteen (15) minute response time to the Level 1 team;

  
 (d) Response team to work around the clock until a
satisfactory workaround or fix is supplied, with such workaround and fix to be supplied by Supplier in accordance with the processes and within the time frames specified in the Policy and Procedures Manual; 
  
 (e) Response team to provide a fully integrated and tested patch to the
Client Software in accordance with the processes and within the time frames specified in the Policy and Procedures Manual; and 
  
 (f) Hourly status updates to Service Request Management Software. 
  

	 	2.	Severity 2 Defects 

  
 Severity 2 defects represent non-conformance to existing requirements however there are satisfactory workaround alternative(s) available to continue
processing transactions. The following are the requirements related to Severity 2 defects: 
  
 (a) Next Business Day response to the Level 1 team; 
  
 (b) Response team to provide a fix in accordance with the processes and within the time frames specified in the Policy and Procedures Manual; 
  
 (c) Response team to provide a fully integrated and tested patch to the Client Software in accordance with the processes and
within the time frames specified in the Policy and Procedures Manual; and 
  
 (d) Daily status updates to Service Request Management Software. 
  

	 	3.	Severity 3 Defects 

  
 Severity 3 defects represent nice to have requirements that have no impact on usage of the system in production. The following are the requirements
related to Severity 3 defects: 
  
 (a) Second Business Day
response to the Level 1 team; 
  
 (b) Response team to provide a
solution in accordance with the processes and within the time frames specified in the Policy and Procedures Manual; and 
  
 (c) Weekly status updates to Service Request Management Software. 
  

	3.4	Development and QA 

  
 “Development and QA” includes maintenance, enhancements and development projects. A pool of hours will be allocated to development and enhancement activities that will be monitored and adjusted
monthly. 
  

	4.0	General Assumptions 

  

	a.	Services (on or off Client premises) under this Statement of Work will be generally performed during normal business hours in the country in which they are performed, 8:00 a.m. to
5:00 p.m. (the “Business Hours”) Monday through Friday, except Client holidays (the “Business Days”). It is anticipated, however, that work will also be performed outside of normal Business Hours and Business Days.

  

	b.	Client business, application and technical subject matter experts will be available as identified by the Project Plan and informally on an as needed basis. In the event such Client
personnel are not available to Supplier as required, Supplier shall promptly notify the Client and advise the Client of the potential impact that such failure will have on Supplier’s performance of Services and the ability of Supplier to meet
the Service Levels. 

  

	c.	Following completion of scheduled activities, Client personnel will be available as required for follow up questions. Client personnel will be able to provide the required
information within three (3) Business Days unless the Project Plan or Policy and Procedures Manual states otherwise. Client personnel will also be available to review intermediate work products. In the event such Client personnel are not available
to Supplier as required, Supplier shall promptly notify the Client and advise Client of the potential impact that such failure will have on Supplier’s performance of Services and the ability of Supplier to meet the Service Levels.

  

	d.	Approval of all deliverables will be provided per the approval process described in Section 9.0 below. 

  

	e.	Client will be responsible for setting priorities for work execution. 

  

	f.	Client will be responsible for the cost of the setup and ongoing cost of the communications line(s) required to connect the Client facilities to the Supplier US-based onshore
network node. Supplier will carry traffic to their offshore delivery center on the Supplier network. 

  

	g.	Client will be responsible for the cost of the setup and any ongoing cost for equipment, software, facilities or operation required to conform to Client’s security
requirements, which exceed Supplier Corporate Standards. 

  

	h.	Supplier will provide Supplier personnel with licenses for the Rational Integrated Global Development Environment and 5 years of maintenance on Rational. Supplier will also provide
and support the Supplier Tools (PMOffice and AMS Management System). Supplier will not be responsible for the ownership or management of any Client Software licenses and Client Rational licenses, including licenses for the Supplier staff to perform
their responsibilities under this Statement of Work. Client will maintain currency on all software licenses for the Client Software and Client Rational licenses necessary to execute this Statement of Work. 

  

	i.	Supplier is providing a level of staffing resources based on its completed assessment of the scope of work and expertise in sizing outsourcing activities. The initial staffing level
is based on Supplier’s due diligence of Client’s operations and workload to be assumed by Supplier, which due diligence has been completed by Supplier. The required staffing level may change over time and will be managed through the Change
Control Procedures. 

  

	j.	Supplier will utilize resources in a Supplier offshore delivery center to perform a portion of the Services. The initial offshore delivery center will be a Supplier delivery center
in India. Supplier shall be responsible for any adverse impact(s) in the event Supplier is unable to perform the Services at the Supplier delivery center in India. 

  

	k.	For planning purposes, Supplier estimates that this Statement of Work start date will be ten (10) Business Days after the Effective Date, with members of Supplier Transition Team
beginning at various stages during Transition. 

  
 Supplier may use
proprietary Supplier Tools approved by Client, to perform Supplier responsibilities in this Statement of Work. These Supplier Tools remain the property of Supplier, subject to the right of Client to license the use of such Supplier Tools upon
expiration or termination of this Statement of Work, as provided in the Terms and Conditions. 
  

	5.0	Development Responsibilities 

  

	5.1	Activities and Procedures 

  
 The Policy and Procedures Manual will describe these procedures in detail, which will include: 
  

	a.	Work management activities 

  
 Supplier will organize, plan, track, and report tasks associated with Application Development projects and maintenance and with releases of installed
applications including the following: 
  

	 	1.	Project management activities 

  
 (a) Supplier will select standard project management methodology, which shall be integrated with Client’s methodology and approved by Client, to
assist in the planning, tracking, and reporting of 

  

 
activities required for the successful completion of development project tasks which members of the development team and application owners, users, and
members of support staffs will perform; 
  
 (b) Supplier will
develop a project plan (as more fully described herein and in the Policy and Procedures Manual, (the “Project Plan”) for, and estimate the cost of, Application Development projects to be performed for Client. Supplier will present
such Project Plans and estimates to Client for comment and approval, and Supplier will commence work on such Application Development projects only after receiving notice of Client’s approval. At the request of Client, Supplier shall provide
Client with fixed prices for Application Development projects; 
  
 (c) Project Plans will describe the process to be undertaken, the deliverables to be produced, the specifications for the deliverables, acceptance testing to be performed, the applicable costs and charges, the estimated schedule for
completion, and the effect, if any, of the project on other ongoing or projected work; and 
  
 (d) Supplier will monitor Supplier Application Development projects to determine whether each project is being performed in accordance with the schedules and estimates in the applicable Project Plan and will promptly
notify Client in the event any information comes to Supplier’s attention that a Supplier Application Development project may not be completed within the time frames or cost estimates previously approved by Client. Any work to be performed in
excess of the approved estimates must be approved in advance by Client in accordance with the Change Control Procedures. 
  

	 	2.	Release management activities 

  
 Client will establish and approve the frequency with which Supplier implements new releases of the Client Software. Supplier will organize such work
requests into logical units and control the planning, tracking, and reporting of the work. 
  

	 	3.	Estimating, planning, and scheduling activities 

  
 Supplier will establish procedures and supporting tools that will assist members of project and release teams and owners, users, and members of support
staffs in improving the accuracy and consistency of their estimates, plans, and schedules and comparing the same with actual results so that Supplier can improve plan accuracy over time. 
  

	 	4.	Risk management activities 

  
 Supplier will work with Client to identify the risks associated with projects and releases and develop detailed plans to manage and contain those risks.

  

	 	5.	Dependency management activities 

  
 Supplier will work with Client to identify other projects and releases that may impact on the current project or release and will develop detailed plans
to manage those dependencies. 
  

	b.	Capabilities management 

  

	 	1.	Skills planning and skills balancing activities 

  
 Supplier will plan education and training of Supplier employees for current and anticipated projects and releases and balance the required skills across
projects. 
  

	 	2.	Technical vitality activities 

  
 Supplier will cross-train Supplier’s employees and Supplier subcontractors working on the Client account, assuring that such training does not
interfere with Supplier’s performance of the Services. 
  

	 	3.	 Upon completion of Transition, Supplier will perform a GAP analysis of the then-existing delivery processes and standards to CMMI SEI Level 3 processes and
standards. Supplier will, within 

  

	 	 
twelve (12) months following Transition, improve such processes and standards to achieve CMMI SEI Level 3 proficiency and shall maintain a minimum of Level 3
for the duration of the Term. 

  

	 	4.	Supplier shall, as necessary, provide accent training to Project Staff to assure that all Project Staff are proficient in English. Supplier shall, at the request of Client, replace
Project Staff which, in Client’s discretion, do not demonstrate adequate proficiency in English. 

  

	c.	Tools, techniques, and methods activities 

  
 Supplier will evaluate, select, and acquire tools, techniques, and methods for Supplier’s employees and subcontractors, consistent with the Policy
and Procedures Manual and Client standards, and maintain an inventory of such tools for use by all Supplier’s employees and subcontractors as specified in the Policy and Procedures Manual. 
  

	d.	Assurance activities 

  
 Consistent with the requirements set forth in the Policy and Procedures Manual, each Project Plan will set forth procedures and standards to be followed
by Supplier for project and release deliverables. Supplier will conduct technical reviews, project reviews, inspections, walkthroughs, and JAR and JAD sessions as necessary (which will all be specified in the Project Plan) as follows: 
  

	 	1.	Members of the project or release team, with the assistance of experts when appropriate, will perform formal or informal technical reviews; 

  

	 	2.	Project reviews will be performed by Client and Supplier on a schedule that is appropriate for the project’s scope, complexity, cost, and risk; 

  

	 	3.	Inspections and walkthroughs will be performed for project or release deliverables such as requirements and design documents, code, test plans, and test results as well as project
and release plans; 

  

	 	4.	Early in the project or release cycle, members of the development team and representative users that Client selects will jointly conduct JAR and JAD sessions to verify the
completeness, accuracy, and appropriateness of application requirements and design; and 

  

	 	5.	Process assurance activities will include periodic assessments of standards and project and release methodologies in terms of currency and appropriateness in light of what was
learned from completed projects and releases. 

  

	e.	Documentation and training 

  
 Supplier will provide Client with the training, subject matter expertise and documentation defined in the Project Plan to make use of the Client
application systems including the following when applicable: 
  

	 	1.	Supplier will provide training for selected Client employees and its subcontractors in the use of the Client system, so that such Client employees and its subcontractors can in turn
train end users in the appropriate use of the Services. Supplier will conduct training at times and locations Client reasonably requests; and 

  

	 	2.	Supplier will provide complete applications documentation (in both hard copy and soft copy), in English, explaining the use of the Client system. Supplier will assist Client in
preparing user documentation for Client trainers to use in training end users. 

  

	5.2	Supplier Application Development Responsibilities 

  
 Supplier will perform the following Application Development responsibilities for the Client Software set forth in Schedule A and as otherwise specified in an
agreed to Project Plan (if any): 
  

	a.	As requested by Client, support opportunity identification and assist with initial business proposals and service requests; 

  

	b.	As requested by Client, assist Client in assessing fit of service requests with IT strategy; 

  

	c.	As requested by Client, assist Client in the definition, evaluation and prioritization of business requirements and service requests; 

  

	d.	Develop a high-level overview of the solution and, if requested by Client, conduct a feasibility study; 

  

	e.	Perform project management; 

  

	f.	Perform data modeling; 

  

	g.	Prepare technical and migration designs; 

  

	h.	Develop and change configuration where applicable for packaged applications; 

  

	i.	Develop program code; 

  

	j.	Develop conduct unit, system and stress test cases and any required retesting; 

  

	k.	Assist with and facilitate user acceptance tests; 

  

	l.	Prepare system documentation; 

  

	m.	Prepare user documentation for Supplier created, enhanced or changed software; 

  

	n.	Provide and support user training in the English language; 

  

	o.	Assist with post implementation reviews; 

  

	p.	Perform the principle technical functions associated with the retirement of Client Software that has been replaced or superseded by newly developed Client Software or Client
Software package; and 

  

	q.	As requested by Client, prepare newly developed Client Software or packaged Client Software versions and upgrades for production. 

  

	5.3	Client Application Development Responsibilities 

  
 Client will develop plans to perform the activities described in this Section and will maintain appropriate levels of skilled employees and subcontractors to perform
these activities. 
  
 Client will perform the following responsibilities:

  

	a.	Monitor trends within Client’s industry and related industries and work with Supplier in developing strategic plans for IT; 

  

	b.	Define business requirements. Supplier maintains responsibility for confirming business requirements with business analysts and then transferring requirements into design
specifications; 

  

	c.	Prioritize and approve activities including those recommended by Supplier which may result in increased or decreased levels of service and/or efficiency with respect to the current
application set; 

  

	d.	Prepare and prioritize work requests, manage the Client employees or Client subcontractors associated with the project (e.g. business groups, requester groups, end users), and work
with Supplier to align the work requests with the tactical and strategic goals of Client; 

  

	e.	Periodically participate in working sessions with Supplier to establish task plans for work items that Client will perform, include those tasks in a master plan for the project or
release, and report progress against the plan in a timely and accurate manner; 

  

	f.	Participate in the development of detailed requirements and design for applications during JAR and JAD sessions for all Projects or Enhancements; 

  

	g.	Provide timely notification of all governmental and regulatory changes to Supplier in the form of work requests and include Supplier in planning activities;

  

	h.	Assist Supplier with the preparation of technical and migration design; 

  

	i.	In conjunction with Supplier, develop test criteria for all projects and changes (described in business terms) before the project is undertaken so that user acceptance tests can be
conducted to verify the completeness and correctness of the business function provided by the new or changed application; 

  

	j.	Jointly prepare all necessary end user or business operations documentation, with Client having ultimate responsibility for the final product; 

  

	k.	Plan for the education and training of Client employees and its subcontractors for current and anticipated projects and releases; 

  

	l.	Provide end user training for all new or changed application functions and include the training plans for those activities in the master plan for the project or release (Supplier
will train Client’s trainers who will in turn implement end user training); 

  

	m.	Assist Supplier in the creation of the test cases and planning user acceptance tests; 

  

	n.	Conduct user acceptance tests for all application changes before the change is introduced into the production environment; 

  

	o.	Perform necessary end user or business functions associated with the retirement of applications; 

  

	p.	Ensure Client employees participate with Supplier in reviews of completed projects and releases and in periodic reviews of installed applications and assess the completeness and
accuracy of the business function provided, the adherence to established business controls and the audit ability of the application (i.e., so that applications are written in a manner that is not overly difficult to audit, understand, and maintain);
and 

  

	q.	Assign Severity Levels and escalate or decrease Severity Levels, as appropriate. 

  

	5.4	In-Flight Projects 

  
 Supplier will assess project schedules and budgets of In-Flight Projects in progress for completeness and viability within forty-five (45) days of the Migration start date and will adjust these accordingly, as agreed
with Client. 
  

	a.	Supplier will continue to perform In-Flight Projects based upon the existing prioritization until Client reassesses and/or reprioritizes such projects; and 

 

	b.	Supplier will provide the original deliverables specified in the technical design in accordance with the revised schedules and budgets. 

  

	c.	Supplier will complete In-Flight Projects on time and on budget. 

  

	6.0	Organizational Roles and Responsibilities 

  

	6.1	Supplier Roles and Responsibilities 

  
 This section describes Supplier’s responsibilities for the Services as identified in this Statement of Work. Supplier personnel or Supplier subcontractor personnel
will perform these tasks. 
  

	a.	Supplier Contract Manager 

  
 The Supplier Contract Manager is Supplier’s primary contact to the Client, and has ultimate responsibility for the delivery of the Services. The
responsibilities of the Contract Manager are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	b.	Project Manager 

  
 The Supplier Project Manager is responsible for the day to day operational aspects of service delivery and has responsibility for the planning and
execution of all approved work requests. The responsibilities of the Project Manager are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	c.	Development Leads 

  
 The “Supplier Development Leads” are primarily responsible for resolving Development service incidents and/or service requests. The
responsibilities of the Development Leads are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	d.	Quality Leads 

  
 The “Supplier Quality Leads” are primarily responsible for defining quality processes and testing. The responsibilities of the Quality
Leads are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	e.	Support Leads 

  
 The “Supplier Support Leads” are primarily responsible for resolving support service incidents and/or service requests. The
responsibilities of the Support Leads are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	f.	Transition Manager 

  
 The Supplier Transition Manager will work with Client during the Transition Period to facilitate the contract initiation, knowledge transfer, definition
of procedures, and the transfer of maintenance to Supplier. 
  

	g.	Displaced Employees. 

  
 Supplier shall perform Application Management Services related services, functions and responsibilities performed by Client personnel who were displaced
or whose functions were displaced as a result of this Statement of Work, even if the service, function, or responsibility is not specifically described in this Statement of Work. 
  

	6.2	Client Roles and Responsibilities 

  
 This section describes Client responsibilities related to Client support. The successful completion of the proposed effort depends on the full commitment and
participation of Client management and personnel. 
  
 The responsibilities listed
in this section are in addition to those responsibilities specified in the MSA and are to be provided at no charge to Supplier. Supplier’s performance is predicated upon the following responsibilities being fulfilled by Client. In the event
Supplier believes such responsibilities are not being fulfilled by Client, Supplier shall promptly notify the Client Contract Manager and advise the Client Contract Manager of the potential impact that such failure will have on Supplier’s
performance of Services and the ability of Supplier to meet the Service Levels. 
  

	a.	Client Support During Transition 

  
 Initially, Client’s current support structure will remain in place. The composition of the Client support team during the Transition Period will vary
and is based on the Services provided under this Service Agreement and their responsibilities will be further defined in the Transition Plan. Throughout the Transition Period, the time required for each resource will diminish. 
  

	b.	Client Contract Manager 

  
 Prior to the Effective Date, Client will designate a person, called Client Contract Manager, to whom all Supplier communications will be addressed and who
has the authority to act for Client in all aspects of the project. The responsibilities of the Client Contract Manager are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	c.	Client Support Team 

  
 The composition of the Client support team will vary during the Transition Period and their responsibilities will be further defined in the Transition
Plan. In addition to their responsibilities described in the Transition Plan, the responsibilities of the client support team are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	d.	Program Steering Committee 

  
 The program steering committee will prioritize the work efforts in conjunction with the Client Contract Manager and the Supplier Contract Manager.

  

	e.	Business Area Analysts 

  
 Client will provide business area analysts with appropriate authority, business unit knowledge and process knowledge of the existing and required Client
business environment (the “Business Area Analysts”). The responsibilities of the Business Area Analysts are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	f.	Client User Acceptance Test (UAT) Coordinators 

  
 Client will provide UAT coordinators with appropriate experience, business unit knowledge and process knowledge of the existing and required Client
business environment (the “User Acceptance Test Coordinators”). The responsibilities of the Client User Acceptance Test Coordinators are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	g.	Client Help Desk 

  
 Client will provide Level 1 help desk support to answer help calls and route them to the appropriate resources. The responsibilities of the Client help
desk are set forth in Section 11.0 below. 
  

	7.0	Supplier Tasks, Deliverables and Completion Criteria 

  

	7.1	Assessment and Planning 

  

	a.	Task Objective: 

  
 The objective of this task is to review the proposal assumptions and establish a baseline and plan for further project execution. The following tasks
would be performed during this phase. Supplier will: 
  

	 	1.	Conduct a portfolio assessment on the suite of applications within scope to get an assessment of the size of the applications and all the interfaces from the applications;

  

	 	2.	Document the service requirements based upon the reviewing of information available on past service performance and any statutory and security related procedures to be fulfilled;
and 

  

	 	3.	Supplier will provide a detailed Migration Plan approved by Client defining roles and responsibilities of Client and Supplier based on the portfolio assessment.

  

	b.	Supplier Deliverables: 

  

	 	1.	Portfolio Assessment Report; 

  

	 	2.	Service Requirements Document; and 

  

	 	3.	Migration Plan. 

  

	c.	Completion Criteria: 

  
 This task is considered complete when the Migration Plan has been delivered to and accepted by the Client Contract Manager. 
  

	7.2	Application Support Migration 

  

	a.	Task Objective: 

  
 The purpose of this activity is to gain knowledge of the application and the environment, assume the maintenance responsibilities in a phased manner and
establish service levels for ongoing support. Supplier will designate an application support migration manager. Supplier will periodically review progress of migration activities related to the applications being assumed Supplier and for
implementing corrective actions. 
  

 The Supplier “Application Support Migration Manager” will be responsible for migration
of applications that were identified during migration planning. This migration process would apply for applications, or part thereof, that are migrated after the Effective Date. The tasks involved are: 
  

	 	1.	Knowledge transfer; 

  

	 	2.	Guided perform; 

  

	 	3.	Assisted perform; 

  

	 	4.	Independent support perform; and 

  

	 	5.	Cut over assessment. 

  

	b.	Supplier Deliverables: 

  

	 	1.	Application Support Control Plan; 

  

	 	2.	Training for new project members based on existing documentation from Client; and 

  

	 	3.	Cut over readiness report. 

  

	c.	Completion Criteria: 

  
 This activity will be complete when the migration activities have been accepted by the Client Contract Manager and formal application take over is
complete. 
  

	d.	Task Outcome: 

  
 Reliable application availability. As set forth in Schedule B (Service Levels), Supplier will: 
  

	 	1.	maintain, and improve, existing Application Availability particularly for Critical Applications; and 

  

	 	2.	provide Application Availability by executing a high quality Application Support Migration, responding to all Severity 1 and Severity 2 errors, and performing root-cause analysis on
all Critical Service Levels. 

  

	7.3	Development Migration 

  

	a.	Task Objective: 

  
 The purpose of this activity is to gain knowledge of the application and the environment, assume development and design responsibilities in a phased
manner and to establish service levels for ongoing enhancements and projects. Supplier will designate a Development Migration Manager. Supplier will also periodically review progress of migration activities related to the applications being assumed
by Supplier and to implement corrective actions. 
  
 The Supplier
“Development Migration Manager” will be responsible for In-Flight Projects as identified and set forth in Schedule K (In-Flight Projects). Supplier will continue to perform In-Flight Projects based upon the existing
prioritization until Client reassesses and/or reprioritizes such projects. The tasks involved are: 
  

	 	1.	Knowledge transfer; 

  

	 	2.	Coding and unit testing tasks; 

  

	 	3.	Analysis and design tasks; 

  

	 	4.	Independent development; and 

  

	 	5.	Cut over assessment. 

  

	b.	Task Outcome 

  
 Client is migrating Application Development to Supplier in order to achieve the following outcomes: 
  

	 	1.	Improved development productivity. Client and Supplier agree that use of a CMM Level 5 software factory coupled with onshore CMM SEI Level 3 processes should lead to ongoing
productivity improvements; and 

  

	 	2.	On-schedule project delivery. A key improvement for Client will be increased on-schedule delivery of Application Development projects. 

  

	c.	Supplier Deliverables: 

  

	 	1.	Estimation template; 

  

	 	2.	Quality plan; 

  

	 	3.	Training for new project members based on existing documentation with Client; and 

  

	 	4.	Cut over readiness report. 

  

	d.	Completion Criteria: 

  
 This activity will be complete when the migration activities have been accepted by the Client Contract Manager and formal application take over is
complete. 
  

	7.4	Steady State 

  

	a.	Task Outcomes: 

  
 The outcome of this activity is to provide Application Support/Maintenance services and Application Development services in accordance with the Service
Levels on an ongoing basis. The service delivery process will be documented in detail in the Application Support Control Plan. The Application Support Control Plan will be developed during Transition. In brief, it has the following processes, which
will be approved and adapted to the Client processes: 
  

	 	1.	2nd level support functions; 

  

	 	2.	Incident problem management; 

  

	 	3.	Break/fix; 

  

	 	4.	Minor enhancements; 

  

	 	5.	Project estimation, design and management; 

  

	 	6.	Test design and management; 

  

	 	7.	Test execution; 

  

	 	8.	Work request logging, prioritization, and tracking; and 

  

	 	9.	Defining and reviewing Service Levels - this includes service level definitions, collection and collation of metrics, review of service levels, causal analysis and corrective
actions, 

  

	b.	Supplier Deliverables: 

  
 Application Support Control Plan 
  

	c.	Completion Criteria: 

  
 This is an on-going activity throughout the Term of the Service Agreement. 
  

	7.5	Transformation 

  

	a.	Task Outcomes: 

  
 The outcome of this activity is to drive continuous process improvement through the attainment of CMMI SEI Level 3 readiness within twelve (12) months
after the completion of Transition. In brief, it has the following processes: 
  

	 	1.	Prepare and train; 

  

	 	2.	Kickoff CMMI transformation project at Client facility; 

  

	 	3.	Implement organizational process definition; 

  

	 	4.	Identify and deploy support tools for the CMMI transformation project; 

  

	 	5.	Disclose service request management for CMMI transformation; 

  

	 	6.	Implement requirements development and management; 

  

	 	7.	Establish process and product quality assurance; 

  

	 	8.	Implement organizational training; 

  

	 	9.	Conduct CMMI method enablement; 

  

	 	10.	Implement metrics management framework; 

  

	 	11.	Implement configuration management; 

  

	 	12.	Implement Supplier contract management; 

  

	 	13.	Implement defect management; 

  

	 	14.	Define the process take-up plan for the CMMI transformation; 

  

	 	15.	Conduct the CMMI transformation orientation and training; 

  

	 	16.	Implement and institutionalize; 

  

	 	17.	Initiate, track, and report progress on the CMMI take-up plan; 

  

	 	18.	Implement CMMI process assurance; 

  

	 	19.	Perform objective evaluation of PPQA process; 

  

	 	20.	Prepare for CMMI compliance; 

  

	 	21.	Conduct CMMI readiness review; 

  

	 	22.	Develop and execute CMMI Action Plan; and 

  

	 	23.	Conduct formal SCAMPI appraisal. 

  

	b.	Supplier Deliverables: 

  

	 	1.	Process Take-up Plan; 

  

	 	2.	CMMI transformation orientation materials; and 

  

	 	3.	CMMI action plan. 

  

	c.	Completion Criteria: 

  
 This is an on-going activity throughout the Term of the Service Agreement. 
  

	7.6	Stakeholder Change Management 

  

	a.	Task Outcomes: 

  
 The outcomes of this activity are to assist the Client in managing change in the retained organization. Change management refers to the management of
organizational change across all stakeholder groups impacted by the outsourcing initiative. In brief, it has the following processes: 
  

	 	1.	Change strategy and vision; 

  

	 	2.	Development of change vision; 

  

	 	3.	Development of change program strategy; 

  

	 	4.	Linkage to value realization; 

  

	 	5.	Stakeholder management; 

  

	 	6.	Identification and analysis of stakeholders; 

  

	 	7.	Assessment of change impacts; 

  

	 	8.	Development of Stakeholder Management Plans; 

  

	 	9.	Communication; 

  

	 	10.	Development of communication strategy and plans; 

  

	 	11.	Execution of communication plans; 

  

	 	12.	Organization and job design; 

  

	 	13.	Competency / capability assessments; 

  

	 	14.	Organization redesign in retained organization; 

  

	 	15.	Job requirements definition / job description development; 

  

	 	16.	New ways of working (policies, practices, processes, systems data); 

  

	 	17.	Policies and practices assessment; 

  

	 	18.	Alignment of policies / practices in retained organization; 

  

	 	19.	Business processes, systems and data architectures; 

  

	 	20.	Training / competency development; 

  

	 	21.	Training audience analysis; 

  

	 	22.	Training Strategy; and 

  

	 	23.	Training course development and delivery; 

  

	b.	Supplier Deliverables: 

  

	 	1.	Change Program Strategy; 

  

	 	2.	Stakeholder Management Plan; 

  

	 	3.	Communications Plan; 

  

	 	4.	Training Strategy; and 

  

	 	5.	Perform training. 

  

	c.	Client Responsibilities 

  
 None 

	d.	Completion Criteria: 

  
 This activity will be complete when the Change Management activities have been completed the deliverables are accepted by the Client Contract Manager.

  

	8.0	Additional Client Responsibilities 

  

	8.1	Change Management 

  
 Client agrees to provide the following services and deliverables at no cost to the Supplier. Client will retain responsibility for: 
  

	a.	Technology strategy; 

  

	b.	Contract management; 

  

	c.	Relationship and contract management with internal and external Client customers; 

  

	d.	New product development direction; 

  

	e.	Business analysis and relationship with the business units; 

  

	f.	Test acceptance and approval; 

  

	g.	Client content expertise; 

  

	h.	Key publishing technology SMEs; 

  

	i.	Identifying a single point contact during the application migration to get the required time commitment from Client employees; 

  

	j.	Ensuring Client’s employees and subcontractors will fully participate in the knowledge transfer project as defined in the detailed Migration Plan; 

  

	k.	Organize required additional training on third-party packages, frameworks and tools; 

  

	l.	Providing the development workstations with applicable software required to interface with Client’s systems and other tools during Transition for Supplier on-site personnel;

  

	m.	Based on Client’s requirements and approval, provide the required software, hardware and support to access Client’s test environment; 

  

	n.	Procuring the required connectivity to the Boulder or Southbury Global Resource Network access points and providing required accesses to the Client network through these access
points; 

  

	o.	Providing access to their systems to perform the project tasks; 

  

	p.	Stating Client’s security requirements in advance to enable Supplier to determine/establish compliance; 

  

	q.	Carrying out the required communication to the Level 1 help desk, regional centers and key personnel regarding the revised support arrangement; and 

  

	r.	During Steady State operations, Client will identify a single point of contact for prioritizing the service requests across all geographies and to review projection of staffing
requirements. 

  

	8.2	Office Space and Other Facilities 

  
 Client will: 
  

	a.	Provide suitable office space, office supplies, furniture, telephone, and other facilities for the Supplier project team while working on Client premises; 

 

	b.	Provide reasonable clerical and reproduction services to support Supplier personnel (in a manner consistent with business practices at Client) while working on Client premises;

  

	c.	Provide related services, and supplies for project planning, tracking, documentation, and reporting activities; 

  

	d.	Provide all necessary Client computer resources to support the Services including, but not limited to, mainframe logons and LAN (Local Area Network) ID’s (Identification);

  

	e.	Provide the proper security access for use by Supplier, along with LAN access, printers, and one analog telephone line for each Supplier resource; and 

  

	f.	Provide all necessary security badges and security clearance for access to Client facilities to Supplier personnel subject to Client’s standard security processes and
requirements. 

  

	9.0	Deliverable Materials Review and Acceptance Procedure 

  
 Except for Monthly Status Reports, each deliverable document will be approved in accordance with the following procedures: 
  

	a.	One (1) printed draft and (1) electronic copy of the deliverable document will be submitted to the Client Contract Manager. It is the Client Contract Manager’s responsibility
to make and distribute additional copies to any other reviewers. 

  

	b.	Within ten (10) business days the Client Contract Manager will either approve the deliverable or provide the Supplier Contract Manager a written list of requested changes. If no
response is received from the Client Contract Manager within ten (10) business days the deliverable review process will be escalated to the Client Executive Sponsor and Supplier’s Executive Sponsor. 

  

	c.	Once a written list of requested changes is received within ten (10) business days, the Supplier Contract Manager will make the appropriate revisions and will, within ten (10)
business days, re-submit the updated final version to the Client Contract Manager. The Client will either approve the updated deliverable or provide the Supplier Contract Manager a written list of requested changes within ten (10) business days. The
Client will review the updated deliverable and either approve it or submit a written list of changes per this procedure. 

  

	d.	If agreement cannot be reached within two iterations of the review process, the issue will be escalated to Client Executive Sponsor and Supplier’s Executive Sponsor.

  

	10.0	Deliverable Materials 

  
 The following Materials will be delivered to Client under this Statement of Work. 
  

	a.	Monthly Status Reports 

  
 A “Monthly Status Report” describing the activities which took place during the previous month. Such report will include significant
accomplishments, milestones, and problems. 
  

	b.	Portfolio Assessment Report 

  
 The “Portfolio Assessment Report” will document the applications and support processes that are included in the scope of the Client
development and support activities. It will also document the interfaces that are incorporated into Client application suite. 
  

	c.	Service Requirements Document 

  
 The “Service Requirements Document” will describe the existing services being performed by the current Client staff supporting the Client
applications. It will also document any statutory and/or security related procedures to be incorporated into the Client support services. 
  

	d.	Migration Plan 

  
 The “Migration Plan” will consist of the planned migration activities for the Client suite of applications. It will detail the activities
of Supplier and Client during the migration process and any associated dependencies. It will also identify the development lab and/or communications requirements to support the on-going Client related activities. 
  

	e.	Application Control Support Plan 

  
 The “Application Control Support Plan” document will include the following items: 
  

	 	1.	Desired service levels; 

  

	 	2.	Support hours; 

  

	 	3.	Escalation procedures; 

  

	 	4.	Off-hours coverage model; 

  

	 	5.	Required metrics; 

  

	 	6.	Logging and control process; 

  

	 	7.	Development standards; 

  

	 	8.	Review and approval guidelines for development activities; 

  

	 	9.	Testing standards; and 

  

	 	10.	Development promotion process. 

  

	f.	Estimation Template 

  
 The “Estimation Template” will be a standardized spreadsheet used to document the effort required for development activities. 

 

	g.	Quality Plan 

  
 The “Quality Plan” will document the testing and review process and establish the quality metrics for the development process.

  

	h.	Cut Over Readiness Report 

  
 The “Cut Over Readiness Report” will document the state of readiness for cutover of the Applications. It will identify any issues
remaining to be addressed prior to cut over. 
  

	i.	Process Take-up Plan 

  
 The “Process Take-up Plan” will include the details of how the Standard Delivery Framework (SDF) processes will be implemented at the
Client. It will document the tasks and milestones for implementing the process improvements necessary to achieve CMMI Level 3 and will track the progress against the tasks and milestones and manage the process improvement. 
  

	j.	CMMI Transformation Orientation Materials 

  
 The “CMMI Transformation Orientation Materials” will inform interested parties and train participants in the CMMI Transformation project.

  

	k.	CMMI Action Plan 

  
 The “CMMI Action Plan” will document the actions identified in the CMMI readiness review. These actions will be implemented and tracked
to manage the process of final preparation for the SCAMPI appraisal. 
  

	l.	Cultural Action Plan 

  
 The “Cultural Action Plan” will identify cultural change and integration activities as identified in the cultural analysis and planning
task. 
  

	m.	Communications Plan 

  
 The “Communications Plan” will identify the audiences, messages, and communication modes that will be employed to communicate the human
resource transition actions that will affect the current staff. It will be updated to include the Change Management messaging that will be created in the Change Management activity. 
  

	n.	Change Program Strategy 

  
 The “Change Program Strategy” will document the results of the Change Strategy and Vision subtask. This will include a description of the
change vision and strategy. It will also include a description of Value Realization and the linkage to change strategy. 
  

	o.	Stakeholder Management Plan 

  
 The “Stakeholder Management Plan” will include a description and analysis of the stakeholders. It will show the assessment of change
impacts and action plans by stakeholder group. 
  

	p.	Training Strategy 

  
 The “Training Strategy” will be based on an audience analysis. Each audience group will be identified with their needs. The courses will
be identified, developed and delivered. 
  

	11.0	Roles and Responsibilities Matrix 

  

			
	Legend:	  	 
		
	 CM = Contract Manager
	  	CST = Client Support Team
		
	 PM = Project Manager
	  	BAA = Business Area Analyst
		
	 DL = Development Lead
	  	UATC = User Acceptance Test Coordinator
		
	 QL = Quality Lead
	  	CHD = Client Level 1 Help Desk
		
	SL = Support Lead	  	 

  

									
	 Responsibility

	  	Supplier

	  	Supplier
Role

	  	Client

	  	Client
Role

	Be responsible for the execution of the project	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Customer Relationship Management	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Participate in Steering Committee meetings and all management review meetings	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Conduct regular monthly status meetings with the Client Contract Manager	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Create and deliver Monthly Status Reports electronically	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Resolve deviations in the Statement of Work in conjunction with the Client Contract Manager	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Interface with Client’s PMO	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Serve as the single point of contact during the execution of this Statement of Work	  	Perform	  	CM	  	 	  	 
					
	Monitor assignment of resources for delivery of the Services within this Statement of Work and provide the first level of quality assurance	  	Perform	  	PM	  	 	  	 
					
	In conjunction with the Client Contract Manager, administer the Change Control Procedure	  	Perform	  	PE	  	 	  	 
					
	Monitor resolution of service incidents and close service incidents when resolved	  	Perform	  	PM	  	 	  	 
					
	Perform problem management, and maintain and communicate escalation procedures with Client Level 1 help desk	  	Perform	  	PM	  	 	  	 
					
	Track service incidents and service requests for analysis and reporting	  	Perform	  	PM	  	 	  	 
					
	Collect, track, report, and age service requests, respond to those requests with priorities consistent with the tactical and strategic goals of Client (i.e., Client prioritizes the backlog), and
within the available resources, schedule and budget constraints.	  	Perform	  	PM / DL	  	 	  	 

  

									
	 Responsibility

	  	Supplier

	  	Supplier
Role

	  	Client

	  	Client
Role

	Execute the development, implementation, and integration of Client’s business application software, including design, specification development, prototype, develop, test, and
implement	  	Perform	  	DL	  	 	  	 
					
	Create quality processes based on CMMI best practices for User Acceptance Test, System Testing, and Stress Testing using Rational	  	Perform	  	QL	  	 	  	 
					
	Execute tests as scheduled documenting results per established procedures	  	Perform	  	QL	  	 	  	 
					
	Communicate appropriately with Client to determine the nature and severity level of service incidents and/or service requests	  	Perform	  	SL	  	 	  	 
					
	Appropriately analyze Client service incidents to obtain resolution or work around	  	Perform	  	SL	  	 	  	 
					
	Effectively communicate service incident resolutions to Client	  	Perform	  	SL	  	 	  	 
					
	Resolve and/or complete the service incident and/or service request	  	Perform	  	SL	  	 	  	 
					
	Document the service incident work-around and/or resolution	  	Perform	  	SL	  	 	  	 
					
	Identify a Client support team whose responsibilities are noted below	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Ensure the availability of subject matter experts on a timely ad-hoc basis, to resolve or answer questions relevant to Client business processes, open service incidents and service
requests	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Maintain overall program schedules to comply with the Statement of Work and/or Project Plan	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	PE
					
	Provide sign-off on program deliverables	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Along with the Contract Managers, administer the Project Change Request	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Participate in program status meetings	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Resolve deviations from the Statement of Work in conjunction with the Contract Managers	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Assist with the resolution of program issues and escalate issues within the Client organization, as necessary	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Verify that all tasks assigned to Client are performed according to the agreed upon Statement of Work and/or Project Plan	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Resolve program management and program coordination issues as required	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Facilitate access to the existing applications and technical infrastructure	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM

  

									
	 Responsibility

	  	Supplier

	  	Supplier
Role

	  	Client

	  	Client
Role

	Authorize tasks that impact target availability in a timely manner	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Authorize test of vendor supplied software patches	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Submit written approval for work to commence	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Empower Client staff to make necessary decisions on behalf of Client	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CM
					
	Ensure that workstations meet requirements	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CST
					
	Manage changes to the Client Software environment	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CST
					
	Provide production testing documentation and results to Supplier	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CST
					
	Assist with the analysis of business process related issues	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CST
					
	Participate in the deliverables reviews as needed	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	BAA
					
	Provide Client business area knowledge to support testing activity	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	BAA
					
	Validate data integrity	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	BAA
					
	Participate in application design through requirements development sessions	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	BAA
					
	Assist in problem resolution	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	BAA
					
	Participate in status meetings	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	BAA
					
	Provide training	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	BAA
					
	Define user acceptance test (UAT) requirements per the established project schedules	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	UATC
					
	Execute UAT scripts to verify conformance to requirements	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	UATC
					
	Report testing incidents per the established procedures and timeframes	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	UATC
					
	Take initial and follow-up calls for application support issues	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CHD
					
	Log problems in the change management system	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CHD
					
	Answer questions based on help scripts developed by Supplier and approved by Client and other resources	  	 	  	 	  	Perform	  	CHD

  

  
 EXHIBIT 2 

 
 to the 
  
 SERVICE AGREEMENT 
  
 Notices 
  

	1.0	Notifications and Approvals 

  

	a.	Supplier and Client may communicate with each other by electronic means. Such communication is acceptable as a signed writing to the extent permissible under applicable law. An
identification code (called a user ID) contained in an electronic document will be deemed sufficient to verify the sender’s identity and the document’s authenticity. 

  

	b.	Unless specified otherwise in this Service Agreement, when Supplier or Client is required to provide notice to the other, such notice will be in writing, or electronically given,
delivered by one of the following methods and deemed given upon the earlier of: 

  

	 	1.	the day of receipt, if delivered in person or electronically; 

  

	 	2.	the day on which signature of acceptance is obtained; 

  

	 	3.	the date delivered as evidenced by return receipt or certified mail; or 

  

	 	4.	one business day after being given to an express next day courier with a reliable system for tracking delivery. 

  

	c.	Supplier and Client will provide notifications under this Service Agreement to the following: 

  

	 	1.	For termination, breach or default: 

  

			
	If to Supplier:	  	 
	 	  	 Vice President Global Midmarket Business for IBM Global Services
 Route 100
 Somers, NY 10589

	 	  	  
 With a copy to:
 IBM Contract Manager
 300 North Zeeb Road
 Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: TBD
 Facsimile: TBD
  
 and
 General Counsel, IBM Global Services
 Route 100
 Somers, New York 10589
 Telephone:
914-766-4165
 Facsimile: 914-766-8444
  
 and
 One IBM Plaza
 Chicago, Illinois 60611
 Attn: Regional Counsel
 Facsimile: 312-245-2070

  

			
	If to Client:	  	 
	 	  	 ProQuest Company President and CEO
 300 North Zeeb Road
 Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: 734-761-4700
 Facsimile: 734-997-4943
  
 With a copy to:
 ProQuest Information and Learning President and CEO
 300 North Zeeb Road

Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: 734-761-4700
 Facsimile: 734-975-6450
 and
 ProQuest Contract Manager
 300 North Zeeb Road
 Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: 734-761-4700
 Facsimile: 734-997-4220
 and
 ProQuest Company General Counsel
 300 North Zeeb Road
 Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: 734-761-4700
 Facsimile: 734-997-4040
 and
 ProQuest Information and Learning General Counsel
 300 North Zeeb Road
 Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: 734-761-4700
 Facsimile: 734-975-6420

	
	 2.      For all other notices:

		
	 If to Supplier:
	  	 
	 	  	 IBM Contract Manager
 300 North Zeeb Road

Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: TBD
 Facsimile: TBD

  

			
	If to Client:	  	 
	 	  	 ProQuest Contract Manager
 300 North Zeeb
Road
 Ann Arbor, MI 48106
 Telephone: 734-761-4700
 Facsimile: 734-997-4220

  

	d.	Supplier or Client may change its address, phone and facsimile numbers for notification purposes by giving the other prior written notice of the new information and its effective
date. 

  

  
 Schedule A 

 
 Client Software 
  

	1.0	Introduction 

  
 This Schedule lists the Client Software that the Supplier has the responsibilities for maintaining as set forth in the Service Agreement. 
  

	2.0	Applications Software 

  

									
	Item Number

	  	 Location

	  	 Business Unit

	  	 Vendor

	  	 Application Name

	1001	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	eFeeds Pipeline
	1002	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	HQO Pipeline
	1003	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	BBOS/BigChalk
	1004	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	AAIM
	1005	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	STS
	1006	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	AVE
	1007	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	FDM
	1008	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	VBOS Tools
	1009	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	CIS
	1010	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	Print Indexes
	1011	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	ODS
	1012	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	EIR (Electronic Image Repository)
	1013	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	ICS (Image Converting System)
	1014	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	eFeeds Tools
	1015	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	Content Editor
	1016	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	PDF Tool
	1017	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	HNP/APS Pipeline
	1018	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	HNP/APS Tools
	1019	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	EDM
	1020	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	ADM
	1021	  	Ann Arbor	  	MSD	  	 	  	Homework Central
	1030	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - QA	  	 	  	CCSI Apps
	1041	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - QA	  	 	  	QA Run and QA Load
	1042	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - QA	  	 	  	Trackrecord
	1043	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - K12/Gen.	  	 	  	eLibrary (K12, K6, CA, AU, CE, etc)
	1044	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - K12/Gen.	  	 	  	HQO (Census, Books, PERSI, etc)
	1045	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - K12/Gen.	  	 	  	HNP-K12
	1046	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - K12/Gen.	  	 	  	BIC
	1047	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - K12/Gen.	  	 	  	Pike Admin
	1048	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	TPD
	1049	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	NVI

  

									
	Item Number

	  	 Location

	  	 Business Unit

	  	 Vendor

	  	 Application Name

	1050	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	Smart Search
	1051	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	DELI
	1052	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	LAD
	1053	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	LAD2
	1054	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	New DELI
	1055	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	LUR
	1056	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	Athens
	1057	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	Shibboleth
	1058	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	Auto-categoriazation
	1059	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Common Srvcs.	  	 	  	Auto-A&I
	1060	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	PQArchiver
	1061	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	DNSA
	1062	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	Gerritsen
	1063	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	DNSA
	1064	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	SIM and NIM
	1065	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	INSPEC
	1066	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	PQDD
	1067	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	Dissertation Back-end Systems: POD, LCCORDS, Inhouse Print, External Print
	1068	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	DV Usage: OLD (Urchin)
	1069	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	DV Usage: New (AWSTATS)
	1070	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	Books On Demand
	1071	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Dig. Vault	  	 	  	Sanborn Maps
	1072	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-FEP
	1073	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-FEI
	1074	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Vault Framework (DSM)
	1075	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-ASCII Retrieval (DRS)
	1076	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Image Retrieval (IRS)
	1077	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-ASCII Search (SSS)
	1078	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-ASCII Import (AIS)
	1079	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-SGML Import (SIS)
	1080	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Image Import (IIS)
	1081	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-ASCII Doc Arch
	1082	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Z39 Client
	1083	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-IDL (Intellidoc Linking)

  

									
	Item Number

	  	 Location

	  	 Business Unit

	  	 Vendor

	  	 Application Name

	1084	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-APS Pub Search
	1085	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Online Stats
	1086	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-awstats
	1087	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Archive Stats
	1088	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Capacity Tools (drones, launcher, cap testing framework)
	1089	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Best Of Web
	1090	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Vault Capacity Plan
	1093	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	Op Tools - PAT
	1094	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	Op Tools - RIT
	1095	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	Op Tools - Config Ed
	1096	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Vault Tech.	  	 	  	PQ-Vault Framework (rac/ras)
	1103	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	TLS
	1104	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	MARC
	1106	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	PQD ADMIN application
	1107	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	CDS Portal
	1108	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	LAD XML-RPC gateway
	1110	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	Alerting
	1111	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Linking	  	 	  	LINKRESOLVER
	1112	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Linking	  	 	  	PQD LINKING SERVICE
	1113	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Linking	  	 	  	PQIL UK LINKING SERVICE
	1114	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Linking	  	 	  	Dissertation linking service
	1115	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Linking	  	 	  	Reference Linking
	1116	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Linking	  	 	  	CrossReff linking service
	1117	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Linking	  	 	  	Jstor linking service
	1122	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	SYNAPTICA
	1123	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - DTG	  	 	  	Applix support
	1136	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Client	  	 	  	PPC (Portal Platform Client)
	1137	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Client	  	 	  	MW (Middleware)
	1139	  	Ann Arbor	  	S&PD - Client	  	 	  	Usage Statistics Collection
	1140	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Business Objects
	1141	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Callback
	1142	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Comshare
	1143	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Cybersource
	1144	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Data Warehouse
	1145	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Exodus - Books on Demand
	1146	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Exodus - Collections
	1147	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Exodus - Disserations
	1148	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	First Logic
	1149	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Info Reports
	1150	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Informatica
	1151	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	J.D. Edwards One World and Portal
	1152	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Internal Web Sites
	1153	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Interwoven TeamSite

  

									
	Item Number

	  	 Location

	  	 Business Unit

	  	 Vendor

	  	 Application Name

	1154	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Invoice Reprints
	1155	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	LC Cords
	1156	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Lock Box Feeds
	1157	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Open Deploy
	1158	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Optio
	1159	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Oracle Financials
	1160	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Peoplesoft
	1161	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	PQIL Web Sites
	1162	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Royalty Accounting System
	1163	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	SPOC
	1164	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Siebel - Call Center Base with Order, Quote, Contracts, Pricer & Opportunities modules for traditional microform products
	1165	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Usage Reporting
	1166	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Vertex
	1167	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Web Methods
	1168	  	Ann Arbor	  	IS	  	 	  	Arbortext
	1183	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SNAP Application
	1184	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SNAP Web (Daily, Monthly) Builds
	1185	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SNAP CD Build
	1186	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SNAP Print Build
	1187	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SNAP Imports
	1188	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SNAP OCLC Export
	1189	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	CD Products
	1190	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	ROCS Website
	1191	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	ROCS Web Build
	1192	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	ROCS CD Build
	1193	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	ROCS Print Build
	1194	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	ROCS Imports
	1195	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	ROCS OCLC Export
	1196	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Linksadmin Website
	1197	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Linksadmin Link Checker
	1198	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Linksadmin Web Build
	1199	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SKS Website
	1200	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Interactive Citizenship Text Cache
	1201	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Reuters News Feed
	1202	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	SIRS Discoverer Website
	1203	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Full Data Build
	1204	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Daily Data Build
	1205	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Spotlight Data Build
	1206	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Search Indexing Code
	1207	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Search Retrieval Code
	1208	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Authentication Code
	1209	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	ARS Website

  

									
	Item Number

	  	 Location

	  	 Business Unit

	  	 Vendor

	  	 Application Name

	1210	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Internal Usage Reports
	1211	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	External Usage Reports
	1212	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Web Monitor Code
	1213	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Ticketmaster Website
	1214	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	QA Website
	1215	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Atlas Client
	1216	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Atlas Application Aerver
	1217	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	Timekeeper Website
	1218	  	Boca Raton	  	SIRS	  	 	  	HNP SE

  

  
 Schedule B 

 
 Service Levels 
  

					
	 1.0
	  	 General Provisions.
	  	2
	 1.1
	  	 General
	  	2
	 1.2
	  	 Definitions:
	  	2
	 1.3
	  	 Reporting
	  	3
			
	 2.0
	  	 Measurement and Validation of Service Levels
	  	4
	 2.1
	  	 Measurement Period
	  	4
	 2.2
	  	 Service Level Failures
	  	4
	 2.3
	  	 Critical Deliverables
	  	4
	 2.4
	  	 Key Measurement Failures
	  	4
			
	 3.0
	  	 Establishing Minimum Service Levels and Increased Impact Service Levels for Critical Service Levels
and
 Expected Service Levels for Key Measurements
	  	5
	 3.1
	  	 Critical Service Levels
	  	5
	 3.2
	  	 Key Measurement
	  	5
			
	 4.0
	  	 Service Level Credits
	  	5
			
	 5.0
	  	 Additions and Deletions of Key Measurements
	  	7
			
	 6.0
	  	 Additions and Deletions of Critical Service Levels
	  	7
			
	 7.0
	  	 Monthly Reports
	  	8
	 7.1
	  	 Monthly Report
	  	8
			
	 8.0
	  	 Continuous Improvement
	  	9
			
	 9.0
	  	 Service Level Review
	  	9
			
	 10.0
	  	 Exceptions and Waivers
	  	9
			
	 11.0
	  	 Customer Satisfaction Measurement
	  	10
		
	Attachment SLA-1	  	11
		
	Attachment SLA-2	  	14
		
	Attachment SLA-3	  	15

  

	1.0	General Provisions. 

  

	1.1	General. 

  
 This Schedule sets forth certain quantitative Critical Service Levels and Key Measurements against which Supplier’s performance shall be measured against the Services provided under the Service Agreement.

  

	1.2	Definitions: 

  
 “Applications Area” - means MSD, IS, S&PD and Boca Raton SIRS, each an Applications Area. 
  
 “At Risk Amount” – means ten percent (10%) of the Monthly Charges for such month. 
  
 “Critical Applications” shall mean those applications that are deemed
critical to its business by the Client. Critical Applications will be identified by Client during the Transition Period and documented in the Procedures and Policies Manual. There will be a limit of ten (10) Critical Applications. 
  
 “Critical Batch Runs” - shall mean those batch runs that are deemed critical
to its business by the Client. Critical Batch Runs will be identified by Client and Supplier during the Transition Period and documented in the Procedures and Policies Manual. 
  
 “Critical Deliverables” - shall mean those deliverables performed on a one-time basis for which a Deliverable Credit may be
payable in accordance with this Schedule. Critical Deliverables are identified in Attachment SLA-1. 
  
 “Critical Service Level” - means a measurable aspect of performance specified in Attachment SLA-1 with respect to certain Services. Unless otherwise specified in this Schedule, each Critical
Service Level consists of a Minimum Service Level and an Increased Impact Service Level. 
  
 “Deliverable Credits” - shall have the meaning set forth in Section 2.3 of this Schedule. 
  
 “Expected Service Level” or “ESL”– means a measurable aspect of performance specified in Attachment SLA-2 for each Key Measurement
Service Level. 
  
 “Increased Impact Service Level” or
“ISL” – means the increased impact level of performance specified in Attachment SLA-1 for each Critical Service Level. 
  
 “Key Measurement Service Level” - means a measurable aspect of performance specified in Attachment SLA-2 with respect to certain Services that are
meaningful to Client’s business. Each Key Measurement consists of an Expected Service Level. Supplier’s failure to achieve the Expected Service Level in a Key Measurement shall not give rise to Service Level Failures.

  
 “Measurement Period” - means the period of time following the
completion of the Migration Period during which Supplier will measure a Service Level in order to establish its MSL and ISL (for a Critical Service Level), or its ESL for a Key Measurement Service Level as set forth in Attachment SLA-1 and
Attachment SLA-2 and applies wherever stated throughout this document. 
  
 “Migration” - means the process of transferring the Applications contained within each Application Area from Client to Supplier. 
  
 “Migration Date” - means the date that an Application Area has completed Migration. 
  
 “Migration Period” – means the period of time for each application beginning with the Effective Date and ending with
cutover to full Supplier support of that application. 
  
 “Minimum Service
Level” or “MSL” – means the minimum level of performance specified in Attachment SLA-1 for each Critical Service Level. 
  
 “Monthly Charges” – means the total of all Supplier charges in connection with its performance of the Services for a single calendar month.

  
 “Service Level Credit” or “SLC” - is defined
in Section 3.1.a. of this Schedule B. 
  
 “Service Level Credit
Allocation Percentage” - means, for a particular Critical Service Level, the portion of the At Risk Amount represented as a percentage used to calculate the Service Level Credit payable to Client in the event of a Critical Service Level
Failure. Service Level Credit Allocation Percentages are set forth in Attachment SLA-1. 
  

 “Service Level Metric” – means an MSL, ISL or ESL, as appropriate. 
  
 “Service Levels” – means the Critical Service Levels and Key
Measurements. 
  
 “Steady State”- means the period immediately
following the completion of Migration. 
  

	1.3	Reporting 

  
 As of the Effective Date, the measuring tools and/or methodologies that will be set forth in Attachment SLA-3 to this Schedule represent acceptable measuring tools and/or methodologies for the Critical Service
Levels and Key Measurements. If there are any Service Levels for which the measuring tools and/or methodologies have not been agreed upon by Client and Supplier and included in Attachment SLA-3, and Supplier fails to propose a measuring tool
for such Service Level that is acceptable to Client prior to the date upon which Supplier shall be responsible for Service Level performance and Service Level Credits, such failure shall be deemed a Minimum Service Level default for the Critical
Service Level until Supplier proposes and implements such acceptable measuring tool. 
  
 Tools for new Service Levels will be implemented according to the Change Control Procedures. If, after the Effective Date or the implementation of tools for new Service Levels, Supplier desires to use a different measuring tool for a
Service Level, Supplier shall provide written notice to Client, in which event the Parties will reasonably adjust the measurements as necessary to account for any increased or decreased sensitivity in the new measuring tools; provided that, if the
Parties cannot agree on the required adjustment, Supplier will continue to use the measuring tool that had been initially agreed to by the Parties. It is not anticipated that changes in the monitoring tools will drive changes in Service Levels;
rather, the need to collect and accurately reflect the performance data should drive the development or change in performance monitoring tools. 
  
 Unless otherwise specified in this Schedule, each Critical Service Level and Key Measurement shall be measured on a monthly basis beginning on the first day of the month
following the completion of Transition or, if later, the date specified in Attachments SLA-1 or SLA-2, and reported on the 15th day of each calendar month for the previous month. Supplier shall provide, commencing the end of the first calendar month following the establishment of each Service Level, and monthly thereafter, as part of Supplier’s
monthly performance reports, a set of hard and soft copy reports to measure Supplier’s performance against and compliance with the Critical Service Levels and Key Measurements. Supplier will report on actual performance of all Service Levels
even during their respective Measurement Periods. Supplier will also be responsible for promptly investigating failures to meet the Service Levels by: 
  

	a.	promptly initiating problem investigations, including without limitation, root cause analyses, where applicable; 

  

	b.	promptly reporting Critical or Key Measurement Service Level Failures to Client in accordance with the escalation process set forth in the Policy and Procedures Manual;

  

	c.	promptly reporting potential and actual problems interfering with Supplier’s ability to meet Service Levels; 

  

	d.	advising Client within thirty (30) Business Days after a Critical Service Level Failure occurred of the root cause of the Critical Service Level Failure and promptly advising
Client, on an ongoing basis of, the status of remedial efforts being undertaken with respect to such Critical Service Level Failures; 

  

	e.	initiating remedial action to correct the problem and to begin meeting the Service Levels as soon as practicable; 

  

	f.	providing Client with reasonable evidence that the causes of such problem have been or will be corrected on a long-term basis barring unforeseen future circumstances; and

  

	g.	making written recommendations to Client for improvement in procedures that are negatively affecting Service Level achievement. 

  
 Supplier shall promptly notify the Client Contract Manager in writing of any Client actions
which prevent Supplier from meeting the Service Levels. 
  

	2.0	Measurement and Validation of Service Levels 

  

	2.1	Measurement Period 

  

	a.	During the Measurement Period, Supplier shall meet all Service Levels at a level which is at least equivalent to that of the current level such services are performed by Client to
the extent that such a history is available. 

  

	b.	During the Measurement Period, Supplier will submit to Client a standard report or set of standard reports assessing Supplier’s performance during the previous calendar month.

  

	c.	Service Level Credits will not apply during the Measurement Period. However, Supplier will use its best efforts to meet all Service Levels for which there is prior history (per (a)
above). 

  

	d.	During the Measurement Period, Supplier will use identified measurement tools and/or methodologies to monitor the performance levels for the Services to serve as input for
establishing Service Levels and Key Measurements, provided that should it be determined that the Measurement Period is not indicative of Client’s normal operating environment, Client and Supplier will mutually define another period which is
representative of Client’s normal operating environment as the Measurement Period. 

  

	e.	Upon completion of each Measurement Period: 

  

	 	1.	Supplier will update the tables set forth in Attachments SLA-1 for the Critical Service Levels or SLA-2 to this Schedule for the Key Measurements to reflect the
mutually agreed Service Levels and Service Level measurement criteria and will provide an amended copy of this Schedule to Client; and 

  

	 	2.	Supplier will meet or exceed the related ISLs and MSLs or ESLs, as set forth in this Schedule. 

  

	2.2	Service Level Failures 

  

	a.	A “Critical Service Level Failure” will be deemed to occur whenever Supplier’s level of performance for a particular Critical Service Level fails to meet the
Minimum Service Level standard or the Increased Impact Service Level standard specified in Attachment SLA-1 at completion of the Measurement Period for the applicable Critical Service Level. A “Preliminary Critical Service Level
Failure” will be deemed to occur during the Measurement Period whenever Supplier’s level of performance for a particular Critical Service Level fails to meet the Minimum Service Level standard or the Increased Impact Service Level
standard specified at completion of Transition in Attachment SLA-1 for the applicable Critical Service Level. 

  

	b.	A “Key Measurement Service Level Failure” will be deemed to occur whenever Supplier’s level of performance for a particular Key Measurement fails to meet the
Expected Service Level standard specified in Attachment SLA-2 for the applicable Key Measurement. 

  

	2.3	Critical Deliverables 

  
 Certain of Supplier’s obligations under the Statement of Work are one-time obligations to deliver Critical Deliverables. Attachment SLA-1 sets
forth the credits that shall be payable by Supplier to Client in the event Supplier fails to deliver any of the Critical Deliverable (“Deliverable Credits”), within the time period relative to the Effective Date, specified in
Attachment SLA-1. Imposition of Deliverable Credits for failure to meet the Critical Deliverables obligations shall not be included in the calculation related to the At Risk Amount. The total amount of Deliverable Credits that Supplier will
be obligated to pay to Customer shall be reflected on the invoice that contains charges for each month during which the Deliverable Credits occurred. 
  

	2.4	Key Measurement Failures 

  
 If Supplier fails to satisfy any Key Measurement, Supplier shall provide Client with a written plan for improving Supplier’s performance to satisfy
the Key Measurement within thirty (30) days of the failure to meet the Expected Service Level for the Key Measurement, which plan shall be subject to Client’s approval, not to be unreasonably withheld. Supplier shall promptly implement such
plan once it has been approved by Client. 
  

	3.0	Establishing Minimum Service Levels and Increased Impact Service Levels for Critical Service Levels and Expected Service Levels for Key Measurements 

 

	3.1	Critical Service Levels 

  

	a.	Should Supplier fail to achieve the Minimum Service Level or an Increased Impact Service Level for a particular Critical Service Level, Supplier acknowledges that Client may be
damaged by such failure. Because the precise amount of such damages, if any, would be difficult, in most cases, to ascertain, Supplier agrees that in the event of such failure Client will, in addition to other remedies available to Client, receive a
credit “Service Level Credit” or “SLC”, as set forth in Section 4.0 below, against the charges owing to Supplier under this Service Agreement. Supplier acknowledges and agrees that the Service Level Credits
shall not be deemed or construed to be liquidated damages or a sole and exclusive remedy or in derogation of any other rights and remedies Client has hereunder or under the MSA. 

  
 Following the Measurement Period, Minimum Service Levels and Increased
Impact Service Levels for the Critical Service Levels will be established as set forth in Section 3.1.b and 3.1.c below. If Supplier’s performance does not meet the MSL or ISL for a specific Service Level, Client will be entitled to a
Service Level Credit for such Service. 
  

	b.	Establishing the Minimum Service Level for Critical Service Levels: 

  
 The MSL will be established according to one of the following: 
  

	 	1.	If there is a Preliminary Critical Service Level Failure recorded during the Measurement Period, the MSL will be calculated at the median of the actual performance attained by
Supplier for such Critical Service Level during the Measurement Period; or 

  

	 	2.	In the case where no Preliminary Critical Service Level Failure occurred during the Measurement Period, the MSL will be set at the level agreed at the conclusion of the Migration
Period. 

  

	c.	Establishing the Increased Impact Service Level for Critical Service Levels: 

  

The ISL will be set at the level agreed at the completion of the Measurement Period. 
  

	3.2	Key Measurement 

  
 The Expected Service Level for each Key Measurement will be equal to the median of documented monthly data obtained during the Measurement Period, unless no deviation occurred during the Measurement Period, in which
case the ESL will be set at the level agreed at the conclusion of the Migration Period. 
  

	4.0	Service Level Credits. 

  
 In the event of a Critical Service Level Failure, Supplier shall provide Client financial credits as defined below: 
  

	a.	Attachment SLA-1 sets forth the information required to calculate the credits that Supplier shall credit to Client in the event of a Critical Service Level Failure. For each
Critical Service Level Failure, Supplier shall pay to Client, a Service Level Credit that will be computed in accordance with the following formula: 

  

					
	Service Level Credit = A x B
	
	 Where:

			
	 A
	  	=	  	The Service Level Credit Allocation Percentage.
			
	 B
	  	=	  	The dollar amount of the At Risk Amount for the month in question.
			
	 	  	 	  	For example, assume that Supplier fails to meet the Critical Service Level with respect to a number of projects completed within estimated timeframes (as set forth in Attachment
SLA-1). Also, assume that (i) Supplier’s Monthly Services

  

					
			
	 	  	 	  	Charges for the month in which the Critical Service Level Failure occurred were $100,000, (ii) the At Risk Amount is 10% of the aggregate Monthly Services Charges, and (iii) the Service Level
Credit Allocation Percentage for such Critical Service Level Failure (as would also be set forth on Attachment SLA-1) is 25%. The Service Level Credit due to Client for such Critical Service Level Failure would be computed as
follows:
			
	 	  	 	  	A = 25% (the assumed Service Level Credit Allocation Percentage),
			
	 	  	 	  	multiplied by
			
	 	  	 	  	B = $10,000 (the At-Risk Amount).
			
	 	  	 	  	= $2,500 (the amount of the Service Level Credit)

  

	b.	If Supplier fails to achieve the Increased Impact Service Level, the Service Level Credit calculated above shall be increased by 100% percent. 

  

	c.	If Supplier fails to achieve a Minimum Service Level three consecutive months, or four months in any six months, the Service Level Credit calculated above shall be increased by 100%
for that month and for any following months that re-trigger the condition. Such increase in the Service Level Credit will be in addition to any increase due to an Increased Impact Service Level (e.g., if Supplier misses a Minimum Service Level three
months in a row, and in that third month the Supplier fails to achieve the Increased Impact Service Level, then the Service Level Credit will be quadrupled), Such increase will still be subject to the At Risk Amount. 

  

	d.	If more than one Critical Service Level Failure has occurred in a single month, the sum of the corresponding Service Level Credits shall be credited to Client.

  

	e.	In no event shall the aggregate amount of Service Level Credits credited to Client with respect to all Critical Service Level Failures occurring in a single month exceed, in total,
the At Risk Amount for such month. 

  

	f.	Client may make changes to the Service Level Credit Allocation Percentages for any Critical Service Level via the Change Control Process; provided that the total number of such
changes (each of which may contain multiple changes) requested by Client pursuant to this provision shall not exceed four (4) in any calendar year. Such change will include changes necessary to accommodate the addition of new Critical Service Levels
or Key Measurements made pursuant to Sections 5.0 and 6.0 of this Schedule B. In no event may the Service Level Credit Allocation Percentage for any Critical Service Level exceed fifty percent (50%). The sum of all Service Level Credit
Allocation Percentages shall not exceed one hundred fifty percent (150%). 

  

	g.	Supplier shall report to the Client in writing if Client becomes entitled to a Service Level Credit, which report shall be provided monthly and shall describe the Critical Service
Level Failures for the month that is the subject of the monthly Critical Service Level report. The monthly reports shall also describe any failure to meet Key Measurements for the month being reported on. 

  
 The total amount of Service Level Credits that Supplier is obligated to credit to Client with
respect to Critical Service Level Failures occurring each month, shall be reflected on the next monthly invoice in the regular billing cycle for Monthly Services Charges, after the Critical Service Level Failure has been reported. Service Level
Credits will be payable with the credit applied to Monthly Services Charges, or, upon expiration or termination of the Statement of Work, shall be paid by Supplier to Client within thirty (30) days following such expiration or termination.

  

	h.	Client will have the right to terminate this Service Agreement if any of the following occurs. 

  

	
	Number of Failure Events for Service Level’s to constitute a Service Level Termination Event
	
	1. Missing the same Critical Service Level four (4) consecutive months
	
	2. Missing the same Critical Service Level six (6) times within a rolling twelve (12) month period
	
	3. Missing twenty-four (24) Critical Service Levels in the aggregate within a rolling twelve (12) month period.

  

	
	Number of Failure Events for Increased Impact Service Levels to constitute a Service Level Termination Event
	
	1. Missing the same Increased Impact Service Level two (2) consecutive months
	
	2. Miss twelve (12) Increased Impact Service Levels in the aggregate within a rolling twelve (12) month period.

  

	5.0	Additions and Deletions of Key Measurements. 

  

	a.	Additions. At any time following the initial establishment of the Key Measurements, Client may add Key Measurement Service Levels by written notice to Supplier which notice
shall be delivered to Supplier at least thirty (30) days prior to the date on which such additions to the Key Measurement Service Levels are to be effective or established (as applicable) subject to any additional time necessary to successfully
install any additional tool(s) which are necessary to adequately measure such Key Measurement. Client may not make such a request (which request may contain multiple additions) more than once each calendar quarter. Client will be responsible for the
incremental cost (if any) incurred by Supplier to measure such new Key Measurements. New Key Measurement Service Levels will be established in one of the following ways: 

  

	 	1.	Where at least six (6) months of verifiable performance measurements exist for a particular Service, the Expected Service Level for such Key Measurement shall be equal to the
average performance achieved during the previous six (6) months; or 

  

	 	2.	Where there are not at least six (6) months of verifiable service measurements for a particular Service, Supplier will measure and, on a monthly basis, document its actual
performance of such Service for six (6) consecutive months. The Expected Service Level will be equal to the average of the documented monthly performance achieved during the six (6) month period. 

  

	b.	Deletions. Client may delete Key Measurement Service Levels upon written notice to Supplier which notice shall be delivered to Supplier at least thirty (30) days prior to the
date on which such deletions are to be effective. 

  

	6.0	Additions and Deletions of Critical Service Levels. 

  

	a.	 Additions. At any time following the initial establishment of the Critical Service Levels, Client may add Critical Service Levels by written notice to
Supplier which notice shall be delivered to Supplier at least thirty (30) days prior to the date on which such added Critical Service Levels are to be effective (subject to any additional time necessary to complete the measurements described in
Section 6.0.a.2 below and successfully install any additional tool(s) which are necessary to adequately measure such Critical Service Level). Client may not make such a request (which request may contain multiple additions) more than once
each calendar quarter. Client will be responsible for the incremental cost (if 

  

	 	 
any) incurred by Supplier to measure such new Critical Service Levels. Client will, in the case of added Critical Service Levels, modify the Service Level
Credit Allocation Percentages for one or more Critical Service Levels in accordance with Section 4.0.f. (i.e., to maintain the total Service Level Credit Allocation Percentages at one hundred fifty percent (150%)). The Minimum Service Levels
for new Critical Service Levels will be established in one of the following ways: 

  

	 	1.	Where at least six (6) months of verifiable performance measurements exist for a particular Service (e.g., the element was previously measured as a Key Measurement), the Minimum
Service Level for such Critical Service Level shall be set according to Section 6.0.b. below; or 

  

	 	2.	Where there are not at least six (6) months of verifiable service measurements for a particular Service, Supplier will measure and, on a monthly basis, document its actual
performance of such Services for six (6) consecutive months. The Minimum Service Level and Increased Impact Service Level will be set according to Section 6.0.b. below. 

  

	 	3.	Client may add Critical Applications and Critical Batch Runs with thirty (30) days notice to Supplier. If there exists six (6) months worth of existing data for the added Critical
Application or Critical Batch Run, then the MSL is established per Section 6.0.a.1. above. If not, then the MSL is established per Section 6.0.a.2. above. Addition of an application to the list of Critical Applications or a batch run
to the list of Critical Batch Runs does not absolve Supplier of the need to continue to meet Service Level Metrics for those previously on the respective lists to the extent that those Critical Applications or Critical Batch runs had already
completed their own Measurement Periods. 

  

	b.	Establishing the Minimum Service Level and the Increased Impact Service Level 

  

The MSL and ISL values will be determined using the same methodology as described in Section 3.1. above. 
  

	c.	Deletions. Client may delete Critical Service Levels upon written notice to Supplier which notice shall be delivered to Supplier at least thirty (30) days prior to the date
on which such deletions to the Critical Service Levels are to be effective. In the event Client elects to delete a Critical Service Level(s), Client will modify the Service Level Credit Allocation Percentages for one or more Critical Service Levels
in accordance with Section 4.0.f. (i.e., to maintain the total Service Level Credit Allocation Percentages at one hundred fifty percent (150%)). 

  

	7.0	Monthly Reports. 

  

	7.1	Monthly Report. 

  
 In addition to the standard monthly Service Level reports provided by Supplier to Client hereunder, Supplier will provide to Client, within ten (10) days after the end of each month, a report that sets forth, at a
minimum, the following: 
  

	a.	statistics detailing Supplier’s monthly performance with respect to each Critical Service Level for each month during the last twelve (12) months; and 

 

	b.	the total dollar amount of all Service Level Credits earned by Client during the month and Contract Year. 

  
 Some Supplier reporting requirements will rely on Client Software. To the extent that the system is not available or does not capture the
required data, Client recognizes that Supplier may not be able to meet reporting and/or measurement requirements. 
  

	8.0	Continuous Improvement 

  
 The Parties agree to the concept of continuous improvement and that the Critical Service Levels and Key Measurement Service Levels should be modified during this Service
Agreement to reflect this concept. To accomplish this, Critical Service Levels and Key Measurement Service Levels will be modified each year upon the anniversary of the date each Service Level was established as described below: 
  

	a.	The MSL for a Critical Service Level or the ESL for a Key Measurement (the “Service Level Metric”) will be reset to the average of the four highest monthly actual
results (e.g., 99.6% is higher than 99.4%) at or above the Service Levels achieved during the previous year; provided that, if fewer than four monthly actual results exceeded the Service Level Metric, the Service Level Metric will be reset by taking
the four highest monthly actual results, replacing each such actual result that is below the Service Level Metric with the Service Level Metric, and dividing the sum of the resulting four numbers by four (4). (For example, if the Service Level
Metric being adjusted were 99.6%, and there were three actual results that were higher and none equal (e.g. 99.9%, 99.8%, and 99.7%), the calculation would be ((99.9% + 99.8% + 99.7% + 99.6%) / 4) = 99.75%. 

  

	b.	Notwithstanding Section 8.0.a. above, in no event shall any single increase in a Service Level Metric pursuant to Section 8.0.a. exceed ten percent (10%) of the difference between
one-hundred percent (100%) and the then-current Service Level Metric for Critical Service Levels and Key Measurement Service Levels that have an Service Level Metric equal to or greater than ninety-five percent (95%). (For example, if the Service
Level Metric being adjusted were 99.6%, the maximum increase for that reset would be 0.04% (i.e. from 99.6% to 99.64%)). 

  

	c.	Notwithstanding Section 8.0.a. above, in no event shall any single increase in a Service Level Metric pursuant to Section 8.0.a. exceed twenty five percent (25%) of the difference
between one-hundred percent (100%) and the then-current Service Level Metric for Critical Service Levels and Key Measurement Service Levels that have a Service Level Metric less than ninety-five percent (95%). (For example, if the Service Level
Metric being adjusted were 74.0%, the maximum increase for that reset would be 6.5% (i.e. from 74.0% to 80.5%)). 

  

	9.0	Service Level Review 

  
 At least quarterly, and as otherwise requested by Client, Client and Supplier will review the Service Levels and mutually agree whether to: 
  

	a.	add to, delete or change the Services to be measured and the corresponding Service Levels to reflect changes in Client’s business operations; and 

  

	b.	improve the existing Service Levels, where warranted, to reflect operational or technical improvements. 

  

	10.0	Exceptions and Waivers. 

  
 Supplier will be relieved of responsibility for Service Level(s) and associated Service Level Credits only to the extent Supplier’s failure to meet the Service
Level(s) is due to: 
  

	a.	Problems resulting from hardware, system software, network, maintenance and Client maintained applications software for which Client is responsible, but only if (i) Supplier
promptly, upon becoming aware of them, notifies Client of such problems and its inability to perform under such circumstances, (ii) Supplier provides Client with every reasonable opportunity to correct such problem and thereby avoid such Supplier
non-performance, (iii) Supplier pursues reasonable means to mitigate the impact of such problem, and (iv) Supplier uses reasonable efforts to perform notwithstanding such problem; or 

  

	b.	problems caused by the actions or inaction of Client or its affiliates, third-party vendors and suppliers but only if (i) Supplier promptly notifies Client of such problems and its
inability to perform under such circumstances, (ii) Supplier provides Client with every reasonable opportunity to correct such problem and thereby avoid such Supplier non-performance, (iii) Supplier pursues reasonable means to mitigate the impact of
such problem, and (iv) Supplier uses reasonable efforts to perform notwithstanding such problem; or 

  

	c.	Client’s reprioritization of tasks to be performed by Supplier where Supplier has notified Client in advance that such reprioritization may cause Supplier to miss such Service
Level; or 

  

	d.	circumstances that excuse performance in connection with a Force Majeure Event; 

  

	e.	a reduction in performance directly related to a Major Change on a Service Level that Supplier warned Client, prior to the implementation of the Major Change, might be adversely
affected; or 

  

	f.	any other circumstances that Client agrees constitute an excused performance 

  

	11.0	Customer Satisfaction Measurement. 

  
 As part of the Services, Supplier shall conduct customer satisfaction surveys in accordance with Schedule J (Customer Satisfaction) and the results of such
customer satisfaction surveys may be used to measure Supplier’s performance against applicable Service Levels. 
  

  
 Attachment SLA-1

  
 Critical Service Levels and Service Level Credit
Allocation Percentage 
 (ISLs, MSLs, and ESLs are for discussion) 
  

													
	 Service
 Attribute

	  	 Description of
Critical Service
Level Metric

	  	 Minimum Service
Level

	  	Increased
Impact Service
Level

	 	 Effective Date

	  	 Measurement
Period

	  	Service
Level Credit
Allocation
Percentage

	Project schedule estimation accuracy	  	Performance on planned projects against the agreed upon project plan	  	95% of projects completed over a 4 month rolling window for which Supplier is responsible under this Service Agreement are completed, in accordance with the agreed project plan, by the agreed
upon duration, +/- 10%, including approved changes to estimates.	  	85%	 	 Effective Date for new projects.
  
 For the purposes of budget and timeline revision, 45 days from Migration start date for each Application Area affected for In-Flight Projects that have detailed and
committed project and resource plans.
	  	None	  	25%
							
	 Project
 resource estimation accuracy
	  	Performance on planned projects against estimated resource budget	  	95% of non-fixed price projects completed over a 4 month rolling window for which Supplier is responsible under this Service Agreement, are completed, in accordance with the project plan, within
the estimated usage level of Development resources, +/- 10%, including approved changes.	  	85%	 	 Effective Date for new projects.
  
 For the purposes of budget and timeline revision, 45 days from Migration start date for each Application Area affected for In-Flight Projects that have detailed and
committed project and resource plans.
	  	None	  	10%

  

													
	 Service
 Attribute

	  	 Description of Critical
Service Level Metric

	  	 Minimum Service
Level

	  	Increased
Impact Service
Level

	 	 Effective Date

	  	 Measurement
Period

	  	Service
Level Credit
Allocation
Percentage

	Problem response timeliness	  	Timeliness of Severity Level 1 problem report acknowledgement	  	95% of problem reports are acknowledged via phone call within 10 minutes of Supplier receipt	  	85%	 	Migration Date (date when responsibility for an application transfers to Supplier)	  	None	  	15%
							
	Problem resolution timeliness	  	Time to resolve Severity Level 1 problem reports	  	TBD % of Severity Level 1 problems resolved for Client Software, or a temporary fix provided, in TBD hours or less, from the time the problem is reported to Supplier	  	TBD	 	Completion of Transition Period plus Measurement Period	  	3 months	  	10%
							
	Critical Application availability	  	Application availability (excludes Client responsibilities such as HW downtime)	  	All Critical Applications are available TBD% (to be set for each application separately)	  	All Critical
Applications
are available
TBD%	 	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	5 months	  	30%
							
	Non-critical Application availability	  	Application availability (excludes Client responsibilities such as HW downtime)	  	Non-critical Applications are available on average 99%	  	98.5%	 	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	5 months	  	15%
							
	Critical Batch Run Completion	  	 % of Batch Runs Completed within specified Batch
 Cycle
(excludes Client responsibilities such as HW downtime)
	  	Critical Batch Runs complete within specified Batch Cycle 99.5% of attempts	  	99%	 	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	5 months	  	10%
							
	 Density of bugs in code
 releases
	  	# of Severity 1 within six months of code release	  	New code releases contain less than TBD Severity 1 bugs per hundred programmer development hours reported within 6 months of release date	  	TBD bugs
per hundred
programmer
development
hours	 	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	6 months	  	20%
							
	 Density of bugs in code
 releases
	  	# of Severity 2 within six months of code release	  	New code releases contain less than TBD Severity 2 bugs per hundred programmer development hours reported within 6 months of release date	  	TBD bugs
per hundred
programmer
development
hours	 	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	6 months	  	15%

  

 Critical Deliverables and Deliverable Credits 
  

					
	 Critical Deliverable

	 	 Measurement

	 	 Service Credit

	Attainment of CMMI SEI Level 3 within 12 months after completion of Transition	 	IBM SCAMPI process for evaluation and measurement.	 	$50,000 per month for every month after 12 months after completion of Transition without reaching CMMI SEI Level 3
			
	Successful knowledge transfers	 	For each Application Area, there will be a planned Migration Date. To the extent that a Migration Date, subject to approved changes, is not met, Supplier will pay a monthly service credit for
every month that said Migration is delayed beyond the planned Migration Date.	 	$50,000 per month per Application Area.

  

  
 Attachment SLA-2

  
 Key Measurements 
  

									
	 Service Attribute

	  	 Description of Key
Measurement

	  	 Expected Service Level

	  	 Effective Date

	  	 Measurement
Period

	Problem resolution timeliness	  	Time to resolve Severity Level 2 problem reports	  	TBD% of Severity Level 2 problems resolved for Client Software, or a Temporary Fix provided in TBD hours or less, from the time the problem is reported to Supplier	  	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	4 months
					
	Problem resolution timeliness	  	Time to resolve Severity Level 3 problem reports	  	TBD% of Severity Level 3 problems resolved, for Client Software or temporary fix provided during Business Hours within TBD hours or less from the time the problem is reported to
Supplier	  	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	4 months
					
	Problem response timeliness	  	Timeliness of Severity Level 2 problem report acknowledgment	  	TBD% of problem reports are acknowledged via phone call or e-mail within TBD hours of Supplier receipt	  	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	4 months
					
	Problem response timeliness	  	Timeliness of Severity Level 3 problem report acknowledgment	  	TBD% of problem reports are acknowledged via phone call or e-mail within TBD hours of Supplier receipt during Business Hours	  	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	4 months
					
	Customer Satisfaction	  	Senior Management satisfaction with key attributes of Supplier services	  	Average ratings above TBD on key attributes of service on a TBD point rating scale	  	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	4 months
					
	First time resolution	  	% of Trouble Tickets Correctly Resolved on First Try	  	90% of Trouble Tickets are not re-opened within six months post release of code fix	  	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	4 months
					
	 Density of bugs in code
 releases
	  	# of Severity 3 within six months of code release	  	New code releases contain less than CC Severity 3 bugs per hundred programmer development hours reported within 6 months of release date	  	Migration Date plus Measurement Period	  	4 months

  
 Reference Section 3.2 of this Schedule
B for the method of establishing the Expected Service Level. 
  

  
 Attachment SLA-3

  
 Measurement Tools and Methodologies 
  
 This Attachment SLA-3 will be completed during the Transition Period. 
  

  
 Schedule D 

 
 Transition 
  
 Table of Contents 
  

					
	 1.0
	  	Management Summary	  	2
			
	 2.0
	  	Transition of Services	  	2
			
	 3.0
	  	Transition Objectives	  	2
			
	 4.0
	  	Transition Scope	  	2
			
	 5.0
	  	Major Transition Activities	  	3
			
	 6.0
	  	Transition Deliverables	  	3
			
	 7.0
	  	Transition Assumptions	  	3
			
	 8.0
	  	Transition Dependencies	  	4
			
	 9.0
	  	Roles and Responsibilities	  	4
	 9.1
	  	 Supplier Responsibilities
	  	4
	 9.2
	  	 Client Responsibilities
	  	4
			
	 10.0
	  	Deliverables/Completion Criteria	  	5
	 10.1
	  	 Transition Completion Criteria
	  	5
	 10.2
	  	 Transition Deliverables Review / Acceptance Procedure
	  	5
	 10.3
	  	 Transition Deliverables Escalation Procedures
	  	6
			
	 11.0
	  	Risk Management	  	6
			
	 12.0
	  	Transition Issue Management	  	7
			
	 13.0
	  	Transition Milestones Schedule	  	7

  

	1.0	Management Summary 

  
 This Schedule D is a high-level representation of the Transition activities Supplier and Client will perform during the Transition Period. The Transition Plan will set forth a detailed plan for the Transition of the
Services to Supplier. 
  

	2.0	Transition of Services 

  

	a.	There will be a six (6) month transition period (the “Transition Period”) beginning on the Effective Date set forth in the Statement of Work (the “Effective
Date”). During the Transition Period, Supplier will migrate the Client Software, as set forth in Schedule A of the Statement of Work, from the Client to Services performed by Supplier (the “Transition”). The
Transition Period may be adjusted upon Supplier’s and Client’s mutual agreement. 

  

	b.	Within thirty (30) days after the Effective Date, a team of the appropriate Supplier employees and Supplier Agents (the “Transition Team”) and the Client will draft
a detailed written plan (the “Transition Plan”) for the Transition. A preliminary outline of the Transition Plan is attached to this Schedule as Exhibit 1. The Transition Plan will contain a responsibilities matrix detailing
the Parties respective obligations with respect to Transition. Each Party will cooperate with the other Party in accomplishing all aspects of the Transition, including providing the resources necessary to perform such Party’s responsibilities
in the Transition during the Transition Period. 

  

	c.	Client and Supplier will each appoint an individual (each a “Transition Manager” and collectively the “Transition Managers”) who will be
responsible for overseeing the completion of its Transition Plan responsibilities and coordinating activities with the other. 

  

	3.0	Transition Objectives 

  
 In general, the Transition objectives include the following: 
  

	a.	Set Client management and business area expectations regarding Supplier’s Transition activities and delivery; 

  

	b.	Provide consistent communication to Client on Supplier Transition initiatives and progress; 

  

	c.	Analyze the Client Software and Client business processes to facilitate knowledge transfer; 

  

	d.	Identify and stabilize work efforts and In-Flight Projects; 

  

	e.	Establish network connectivity to support delivery against Service Levels; and 

  

	f.	Review and evaluate required metrics and establish initial measurements and reporting tools. 

  

	4.0	Transition Scope 

  
 General Transition Scope: 
  

	a.	The Transition Plan will focus on Transition of the Client Software to Supplier’s global resource model. All current Client procedures and help desk tools will be utilized
during the Transition. 

  

	b.	Change Management 

  

	c.	Training 

  

	d.	Problem Management 

  

	e.	Change Management 

  

	f.	Project Management 

  

	g.	Management of ongoing service delivery or day-to-day operations is not included in the Transition Plan. 

  

	5.0	Major Transition Activities 

  
 In general, the major Transition activities are summarized below: 
  

	a.	Supplier development of the final Transition Plan for review and approval by Client; 

  

	b.	Execution of Governance; 

  

	c.	Supplier will execute Transition activities and delivery; 

  

	d.	Supplier will review the Statement of Work with Client management team to set expectations regarding the delivery and responsibilities set forth in the Service Agreement;

  

	e.	Perform knowledge transfer, parallel perform and attain steady state for the Client Software; 

  

	f.	Establish Client connectivity to Supplier; 

  

	g.	Client will obtain the applicable Required Consents, as set forth in Exhibit B of the MSA, necessary to deliver support; 

  

	h.	Begin providing Supplier support as defined in the Statement of Work and as defined and agreed upon in a support ramp-up plan; 

  

	i.	Supplier will implement its AMS Measurements and Performance Management Program; 

  

	j.	Prepare and implement Client and Supplier Transition Team communication plans; and 

  

	k.	Identify the Key Employees and Dedicated Project Staff. 

  

	6.0	Transition Deliverables 

  
 The following Deliverables will be included as part of the final draft of the Transition: 
  

	a.	The Transition Plan; 

  

	b.	A communications plan; 

  

	c.	The initial draft of the Policy and Procedures Manual; 

  

	d.	The final Policy and Procedures Manual; and 

  

	e.	The migration of the Client Software to steady state for Supplier support. 

  

	7.0	Transition Assumptions 

  
 Transition assumptions will be mutually agreed by the Parties and included in the Transition Plan. The Transition Plan is based on an Effective Date of January 01, 2005,
and the availability of Client resources, Source Codes and documentation to provide effective knowledge transfer. 
  
 Additional Transition Assumptions: 
  

	a.	In the event key Client resources, Source Codes or documentation are not available to Supplier during Transition as required, Supplier shall promptly notify the Client Project
Manager and advise the Client Project Manager of the impact that such failure will have on Supplier’s performance of Services and the ability of Supplier to meet the one time and ongoing Service Levels. Supplier and Client shall use good faith
efforts to agree on revisions to service level commitments and a workaround plan in the event that resources are not available or the project is delayed. Client’s failure to satisfy the requirements set forth in this Section 1.0.a. shall
not be deemed a default under the Agreement, however, such failure does relieve the Supplier from having to meet the transition milestones and Service Levels to the extent Supplier’s performance is adversely impacted by such failure.

  

	b.	Client problem and change management tools and infrastructure will be used. Client will work with Supplier to outfit Supplier personnel with access and authorized userids for those
tools. 

  

	c.	Supplier and Client will develop a detailed Transition Project Plan which will be reviewed and approved by Client within ten (10) days after the Effective Date.

  

	d.	Client will provide adequate office space and facilities for Supplier Transition Team. 

  

	e.	In-Flight Projects will be reviewed and adjustments to committed schedules and budgets for those projects affected by the transition activities will be recommended by Supplier
within forty-five (45) days after the Migration start date. 

  

	8.0	Transition Dependencies 

  

	a.	The establishment of a Client liaison or contract management team; 

  

	b.	Client’s timely performance of Client’s activities detailed in the Transition Plan; 

  

	c.	Access to Client’s current application support staff and business area organizations, as set forth in the Transition Plan, to participate in data gathering, knowledge transfer
and communication activities; 

  

	d.	Effective communication with and commitment from Client management, pursuant to the communications plan included as part of the Transition Plan, concerning Transition activities,
roles and responsibilities and expectations; 

  

	e.	Effective communication to all levels of Client’s business area organization, pursuant to the communications plan included as part of the Transition Plan, of Transition
activities, status, process & policy changes, contract requirements, contract scope.; and 

  

	f.	Access to application data, environments and any existing documentation of Client Software and supporting materials (e.g. help desk procedures for applications support personnel).

  

	9.0	Roles and Responsibilities 

  
 The roles and responsibilities of the Supplier and Client in reference to the Transition Plan are set forth below: 
  

	9.1	Supplier Responsibilities 

  

	a.	Lead the development of a preliminary and final Transition Plan; 

  

	b.	Perform all project management activities including progress tracking, status reporting, communication, issue resolution, change control, etc; 

  

	c.	Establish and staff the Supplier Transition Team; 

  

	d.	Provide orientation to the Client liaison organization for Transition activities; 

  

	e.	Lead the establishment of Service Levels and other performance expectations; 

  

	f.	Lead the establishment of contract management approach and philosophy; 

  

	g.	Lead the development of ongoing performance and service reporting requirements; 

  

	h.	Supplier shall report to Client not less frequently than weekly on its progress in performing its responsibilities and meeting the Transition milestones set forth in the Transition
Plan. Promptly upon receiving any information indicating that Supplier may not perform its responsibilities or meet the Transition milestones set forth in the Transition Plan, Supplier shall disclose such information to the Client Transition Manager
and shall identify for Client consideration and approval specific measures to address such delay and mitigate the risks associated therewith; and 

  

	i.	Supplier shall perform Supplier’s tasks described in the Transition Plan in a manner that will not substantially (i) disrupt or adversely impact the business or operations of
Client, (ii) degrade the Services then being received by them, or (iii) interfere with their ability to obtain the full benefit of the Services, except as may be otherwise specifically provided in the Transition Plan. 

  

	9.2	Client Responsibilities 

  

	a.	Establish liaison organization to manage the Service Agreement (to facilitate communication with organization, manage and resolve disputes and issues manage contract deliverables,
etc.); 

  

	b.	Client will provide a network specialist to assist Supplier in establishing connectivity to Supplier’s network; 

  

	c.	Assist Supplier in establishment of service level objectives and other performance expectations; 

  

	d.	Communicate the requirements and Service Levels of the Service Agreement to the business organization; 

  

	e.	Assist Supplier in development of ongoing performance and service reporting requirements; 

  

	f.	Provide required Client resources to perform Transition activities as defined in the Transition Plan; 

  

	g.	Provide access to physical resources, office space and connectivity to in-scope environments; 

  

	h.	Provide access to technical and business resources needed to complete Transition activities. 

  

	i.	Provide access to business resources knowledgeable in current reporting information to assist Supplier in the establishment of Client reporting requirements and expectations;

  

	j.	Provide access to tools used in the Client environment; and 

  

	k.	Provide physical location for on-site Supplier Transition Team to reside during the Transition Period. 

  

	10.0	Deliverables/Completion Criteria 

  

	10.1	Transition Completion Criteria 

  
 This following section describes the completion criteria for the Transition. 
  

	a.	A detailed Transition Plan document and schedule has been developed and approved by Supplier and Client; 

  

	b.	The Supplier Project Management Office has been established and has begun executing their role, as defined in the Service Agreement; 

  

	c.	The final Policy and Procedures Manual has been completed and submitted to Client for review and approval; 

  

	d.	Work order processes have been completed and execution against the processes has begun, if applicable; 

  

	e.	Client signs the transition completion acceptance letter; and 

  

	f.	Migration of Client Software and In-Flight Projects to Supplier support. 

  

	10.2	Transition Deliverables Review / Acceptance Procedure 

  
 With the exception of the AMS Monthly Performance Reports and AMS Management Reports, each of the deliverables noted in Section 6.0 above will
require approval by the Client Transition Manager. 
  
 For each deliverable,
Supplier will provide an outline for Client’s review. Each of the deliverables will be submitted with a deliverable transmittal document, which will be the vehicle for communication concerning the status of the Deliverable Review / Acceptance
Procedure for that deliverable. 
  
 To keep the Transition Plan on schedule and to
surface issues as quickly as possible, Client will either accept or, in the event that changes or revisions are required to conform the deliverable to Supplier’s obligations under this Service Agreement, return the deliverable with a written
summary of such recommended changes or revisions within the time frames specified for such deliverable in the Transition Plan. 
  
 If changes or revisions are required to conform the deliverable to Supplier’s obligations under this Service Agreement, the deliverable will be re-worked for one
additional revision to incorporate such requested changes. In the event changes to the deliverable is required, Supplier will provide an estimated schedule for completion of such changes within three (3) Business Days from receipt of the change
request from Client. 
  

 If further changes to the revised deliverable are required, Supplier will complete those in one additional revision step
and Client will review/return revisions within three (3) Business Days of receipt of the revised deliverable. 
  
 If the revisions are not accepted by Client, then the procedure outlined in Section 10.3 below will be followed. 
  

	10.3	Transition Deliverables Escalation Procedures 

  
 If a deliverable is not accepted by the Client and the Parties are unable to agree on a solution, the dispute resolution procedures identified in Schedule H
(Governance) will be followed. During dispute resolution, Supplier agrees to provide support relating to items not in dispute, and to the extent practicable, the disputed items, pending resolution of the escalated item. Client agrees to pay
invoices submitted by Supplier as set forth in the Service Agreement. 
  

	11.0	Risk Management 

  
 Throughout the Transition, risk areas will be identified and this Risk Management section will be updated accordingly. Risks will be reviewed with the Client Transition Manager on an agreed-upon frequency, where Risks
will be updated and or added to, as needed. 
  
 As of the Effective Date, the
Supplier Transition Team has identified the following risks and their associated risk mitigation strategy: 
  

	a.	Risk 1: Availability of knowledgeable resources and/or comprehensive documentation/Source Codes to facilitate effective knowledge transfer. 

  

	 	1.	Commitment from Client management to support resource availability, supported by communication plans. 

  

	 	2.	Immediate escalation to Client management as soon as Supplier Transition Team perceives resource unavailability. 

  

	 	3.	Prioritization of critical application and business support areas as priority focus for knowledge transfer activities. 

  

	 	4.	For Client sub-contractors, review of sub-contractor end-dates and current assignments to prioritize and schedule knowledge transfer activities. 

  

	b.	Risk 2: Completion of and availability of connectivity between Supplier and Client. 

  

	 	1.	Begin connectivity tasks upon Effective Date. 

  

	 	2.	Established delivery dates for Client’s connectivity service provider. 

  

	 	3.	Client management focuses on delivery of Client’s connectivity service provider. 

  

	 	4.	Identify interim connectivity solution until permanent connectivity solution is installed and tested. 

  

	 	5.	Locate necessary Supplier support staff on-site at Client for an identified period of time until permanent connectivity solution is installed and tested. 

 

	c.	Risk 3: Stabilization of delivery immediately upon Effective Date, including existing or planned project initiatives, enhancements and report writing. 

  

	 	1.	Review all in-process enhancements and In-Flight Projects to determine need, priority, and continued development effort. 

  

	 	2.	Establish base services as the short-term priority to provide stability for future endeavors. 

  

	 	3.	Risk identification and mitigation plan established. 

  

	 	4.	Only work on high priority enhancements, base service projects and development services. 

  

	d.	Risk 4: Underdeveloped relationships between Supplier and Client support organizations may present challenges to meeting business goals. 

  
 A formal communications plan will be developed and will define the roles of
Client support organizations in support of Supplier’s outsourcing delivery. 
  

	e.	Risk 5: Sufficient time for Supplier to perform knowledge transfer and initiation activities prior to full turnover of Services support to Supplier. 

  

	 	1.	Interim processes will be implemented to enable support to continue during the Transition Period. 

  

	 	2.	Identify Day 1 support expectations, and provide on-site Supplier resources during initiation phase. 

  

	 	3.	Managed by Supplier management, current support staff will continue to provide application support until such time that knowledge transfer has occurred. 

  

	f.	Risk 6: Client users may not understand new processes and procedures, which could cause confusion in Supplier’s delivery of the Services. 

  

	 	1.	Communicate to the user community proper helpdesk and other applicable procedures. 

  

	 	2.	Enforce the helpdesk procedures at all levels. 

  

	12.0	Transition Issue Management 

  
 Issues that arise during the Transition Period that are specific to the Transition effort will be managed by the Supplier Transition Manager. Transition issues will be
tracked on a spreadsheet. Issues will be assigned an issue log number and will include a description of the issue, an assigned priority, an assigned individual responsible for issue resolution, and a target issue completion date. 
  
 Transition issues will be reviewed with the Client Transition Manager on a weekly basis as
part of the weekly Transition review meetings. If Transition issue escalation is required, the escalation procedures identified in the Service Agreement will be followed. 
  

	13.0	Transition Milestones Schedule 

  
 The following identifies the Transition Plan milestones that will be managed as part of the Transition Plan. The date below represents the date Supplier will deliver the
milestone deliverable for review to Client. The dates below assume an Effective Date of January 01, 2005. 
  

			
	 Transition Milestone

	  	Submission Date

	 Service Agreement Effective Date of January 01, 2005
	  	n/a
	 Communication Plan delivered
	  	ED* + M1**
	 Transition Plan delivered
	  	ED + M1
	 Supplier Policy and Procedures Manual – initial draft delivered
	  	ED + M3
	 Supplier Policy and Procedures Manual – Final draft delivered
	  	ED + M5
	 IS, K-12/Geneology
	  	ED + M5
	 AMS Transition
	  	ED + M6
	 S&PD
	  	ED + M6
	 MSD Migration
	  	ED + M6
	 SIRS
	  	ED + 10
		
	 Legend :
 *  ED – Effective Date, **M1 – Month 1
	  	 

  

  
 Schedule E 

 
 Employees and Human Resources 
  

	1.0	Transitioned Personnel. 

  

	 	1.1	Offers of Employment. 

  
 Supplier shall extend offers of employment to those Client Personnel identified in Exhibit E-1 to this Schedule and shall waive all preconditions to such offers
except criminal background checks. Supplier will conduct criminal background checks and will have a drug free workplace program in accordance with the Drug-Free Workplace Act of 1998, with reasonable cause drug testing for all personnel
provided by Supplier. Such offers shall be for employment for an indeterminate period of time with Supplier in positions comparable to those held by such employees at Client, and with initial base wages or salaries, variable compensation, employee
benefits, severance and other terms of employment comparable, in the aggregate to those paid or provided by Client as of the date of such offers. Unless otherwise specified in the Service Agreement or agreed by the Parties, Client Personnel
accepting such offers shall be hired by Supplier effective as of the Effective Date of the Service Agreement.  
  

	 	1.2	Certain Employees. 

  
 With respect to any Client Personnel identified in the Service Agreement who on the Effective Date is in a leave status, including without limitation on family, medical, disability or sick leave, such employee shall
remain an employee of Client until the first day that such employee actually returns to work, with physician’s release or other appropriate documentation stating that such employee may resume his or her prior work schedule, and upon such return
shall be eligible to accept Supplier’s offer of employment, effective at the beginning of the Supplier’s next regular pay period, so long as such return date is within six (6) months after the Effective Date. If such return date is not
within such period, then Supplier shall have no obligation to accept such employee as a Transitioned Employee hereunder. 
  

	 	1.3	Transitioned Employees. 

  
 All Client employees who accept Supplier’s offer of employment and begin work with Supplier pursuant to the foregoing paragraphs are herein referred to as
“Transitioned Employees”. Each such Transitioned Employee’s “Employment Effective Date” shall be the date on which such employee is first added to Supplier’s payroll system. 
  

	 	1.4	Additional Personnel. 

  
 During the six (6) months following the Effective Date of the Service Agreement, the Parties may agree upon additional Client Personnel to whom offers of employment are
to be extended by Supplier. The compensation and other terms and conditions of such offers of employment shall be as set forth in this Schedule and Client Personnel accepting such offers shall be treated as Transitioned Employees for all purposes.

  

	 	1.5	Relocation of Personnel. 

  
 Unless otherwise specified in the Service Agreement or agreed by the Parties, during the first twelve (12) months after the Employment Effective Date, Supplier shall not
assign a Transitioned Employee, without Client’s prior approval, to a work location other than the Client Site at which he or she was employed prior to the Employment Effective Date or to the provision of services to a customer other than
Client. Client’s approval will not be unreasonably withheld if the assignment will not materially disrupt Client’s operations.  
  

	 	1.6	Termination of Transitioned Employees. 

  
 Unless otherwise specified in the Service Agreement or agreed by the Parties, Supplier shall not terminate the employment of a Transitioned Employee within the first
twelve (12) months after the Transitioned Employee’s Employment Effective Date for any reason other than Cause or Performance. 
  

	 	1.7	Reemployment. 

  
 During the six (6) months following the Effective Date of the Service Agreement, the Parties may agree upon one or more Transitioned Employees to whom Client may extend offers of reemployment. Supplier shall not
interfere with Client’s efforts to reemploy any Transitioned Employee with respect to whom such an agreement has been made.  
  

	2.0	Employee Benefit Plans. 

  

	 	2.1	General. 

  
 Except as otherwise provided in this Schedule, Supplier shall offer enrollment to the Transitioned Employee and his or her dependents, effective as of the Transitioned Employee’s Employment Effective Date, in the
employee plans of Supplier that are made available to similarly situated employees of Supplier. Supplier has provided Client with true and complete copies of the most recent summary plan descriptions and summary of material modifications for such
employee plans. 
  

	 	2.2	Years of Service Credit. 

  
 The service of a Transitioned Employee prior to his Employment Effective Date, which is recognized by an employee plan of Client (the “Years of Service
Credit”), shall be recognized only for vacation, short term and long term disability plans, access to Supplier’s Rule of 65 retiree medical plan, 401(k) plan eligibility/contribution levels/vesting, and any severance pay programs of
Supplier. 
  
 The following exception will apply to the severance pay program. In
the event Client initiates a Termination for Convenience for this Service Agreement and as a result of such Termination for Convenience, Supplier terminates a Transitioned Employee, then (a) Supplier will pay a severance based on the total years of
service with Supplier, which includes the Years of Service Credit, and (b) Client will reimburse to Supplier a sum that equates to a severance based on the Years of Service Credit awarded to the Transitioned Employee. As an example: 
  

	 	1.	Transitioned Employee has a total of seven (7) years of service – two (2) with Supplier and five (5) with Client. 

  

	 	2.	Supplier will pay Transitioned Employee a severance based on seven (7) years of service and Client will reimburse Supplier a sum equaling a severance of five (5) years of service.

  

	 	2.3	Employee Welfare Benefit Plans. 

  
 Each Transitioned Employee shall be eligible as of his or her Employment Effective Date to participate immediately in Supplier’s employee welfare benefit plans (the
“Welfare Plans”), which shall include medical care, hospitalization, life, accidental death and dismemberment, prescription drug, dental insurance benefits, short term disability and long term disability. Subject to the general
comparability requirements in Section 2.1, eligibility for, the benefits of, and the amount, if any, of employee contributions toward Welfare Plan coverage will be determined by Supplier; provided, however, that each of Supplier’s
Welfare Plans shall waive all pre-existing condition exceptions, exclusionary provisions and waiting periods for each such Transitioned Employee and any eligible spouse or covered dependents. In addition, any out-of-pocket deductible amounts paid in
the calendar year of the Employment Effective Date by any Transitioned Employee shall be applied toward any deductible required by Supplier’s group insurance program for the calendar year of the Employment Effective Date. 
  

	 	2.4	Paid-Time-Off (Vacation/Sick Leave). 

  
 Beginning on the Employment Effective Date, Supplier shall make available to all Transitioned Employees paid-time-off benefits for vacation and sick leave under its
applicable plans, with years of service of such Transitioned Employees determined in accordance with Section 2.2. Supplier shall recognize vacations plans made by the Transitioned Employees and approved by Client prior to the Employment
Effective Date and shall permit such Transitioned Employees to incur negative leave balances for this purpose. 
  

	 	2.5	Pension Plan (401K). 

  
 Supplier agrees to provide Transitioned Employees from their respective Employment Effective Dates with the opportunity to participate in the IBM 401(K) Pension Plan. The employee with an outstanding loan must pay off
the loan prior to rolling over their ProQuest monies into IBM’s 401 (K) Pension Plan. 
  

	 	2.6	Reimbursement Account Plans. 

  
 As of the Effective Date under the Service Agreement, Supplier shall provide dependent care and health care reimbursement account plans for the benefit of the
Transitioned Employees (the “Supplier Reimbursement Account Plan”). 
  

	 	2.7	Tuition Assistance. 

  
 Transitioned Employees, as of their Employment Effective Date, shall be eligible to participate in all tuition assistance programs provided by Supplier to its similarly situated employees. Courses which are in
progress as of the enrolled Transitioned Employee’s Employment Effective Date and for which tuition assistance has been approved by Client, and courses which have been approved by Client and paid for by the Transitioned Employee prior to the
Employment Effective Date shall be reimbursed by ProQuest. 
  
 Employee can
participate in Supplier’s Tuition Refund program effective with their date of hire. 
  

	 	2.8	Bonus Programs. 

  
 Transitioned Employees, as of their Employee Effective Date, may participate in Supplier’s bonus programs to the same degree as Supplier’s other similarly situated employees. 
  

	 	2.9	Severance Pay Plans. 

  
 All Transitioned Employees will participate in Supplier’s severance pay plan(s) on the same terms and conditions as similarly situated employees of Supplier. 
  

	 	2.10	Retiree Medical. 

  
 Supplier shall provide access to Supplier’s retiree medical benefits to the Transitioned Employees, either through an existing plan or by establishing a new plan. All Transitioned Employees will participate in
Supplier’s retiree medical benefit plan(s) on the same terms and conditions as similarly situated employees of Supplier. Service will be credited to Transitioned Employees by Supplier in accordance with Section 2.2. 
  

	3.0	Other Employee Matters. 

  
 Supplier shall be responsible for funding and distributing benefits under the benefit plans in which Transitioned Employees participate on or after the Employment
Effective Date and for paying any compensation and remitting any income, disability, withholding and other employment taxes for such Transitioned Employees beginning on the Employment Effective Date. Client shall be responsible for funding and
distributing benefits under the Client benefit plans in which Transitioned Employees participated prior to the Employment Effective Date and for paying any compensation and remitting any income, disability, withholding and other employment taxes for
such Transitioned Employees for the period prior to the Employment Effective Date. 
  

	4.0	Severance Reimbursement for non-Transitioned Employees 

  
 Supplier will reimburse Client for Client’s actual severance expense, as incurred, for its non-Transitioned Employees (the “Severance
Reimbursement”). Such Severance Reimbursement is limited to a maximum of $1,300,000.00. Supplier will pay Client’s invoices relating to Severance Reimbursement on or before 30 days from Supplier’s receipt of a proper invoice from
Client. Each Client invoice shall include documentation stating the method and calculation of the actual severance expense incurred for each non-Transitioned Employee included in such invoice. 
  

	5.0	Supplier Contract Manager. 

  

	 	5.1	Appointment. 

  
 The Supplier Contracting Party shall appoint an individual who from the Effective Date, shall be in charge of implementing the Services as required by the Service Agreement (the “Supplier Contract
Manager”). 
  

	 	5.2	Replacement. 

  
 The Supplier Contracting Party shall replace such Supplier Contract Manager when required or permitted pursuant to Section 5.0. 
  

	6.0	Key Employees. 

  

	 	6.1	Designation of Key Employees. 

  
 Client and Supplier shall designate certain employees of Supplier as key employees (collectively, the “Key Employees”; each, a “Key
Employee”) who shall be dedicated to Client’s account in accordance with the Service Agreement. Before assigning an individual as a Key Employee, whether as an initial assignment or as a replacement, Supplier shall notify Client of the
proposed assignment, shall introduce the individual to appropriate representatives of Client and shall provide Client with a resume and other information regarding the individual that may be reasonably requested by Client. Supplier’s
appointment of a Key Employee shall be subject to Client’s written consent. No more than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of Supplier employees under the Service Agreement may be designated as Key Employees except by agreement of Client
and Supplier. Client and Supplier shall meet as appropriate to update the list of Key Employees. Key Employees will be set forth in Exhibit E-2 to this Schedule E. 
  

	 	6.2	Replacement or Reassignment of Key Employees. 

  
 Unless otherwise specified in the Service Agreement or agreed by the Parties, Supplier shall not reassign or replace any Key Employee for twelve (12) months after his or
her designation as a Key Employee, or with respect to Key Employees who are identified by the Client Contract Manager as important to a particular project, prior to the time that such project is completed to the reasonable satisfaction of Client,
except for the reasons set forth below: (1) replacement or reassignment of a Key Employee pursuant to Client’s written consent to such reassignment; (2) Key Employee’s voluntary resignation from Supplier; (3) dismissal of Key Employee by
Supplier for Cause or Performance in respect of his or her duties and responsibilities to Client pursuant to the Service Agreement; or, (4) inability of Key Employee to work due to sickness or disability, or any relevant labor or employment
legislation or following the termination or expiration of the Service Agreement. In any event, Supplier may only replace or reassign a Key Employee after two (2) months notice to Client. 
  
 If Supplier replaces or reassigns a Key Employee in violation of this provision, in addition to whatever rights and remedies Client may
otherwise have, Supplier shall be responsible: (1) for replacing such Key Employee within thirty (30) days of the last day of such Key Employee’s employment with Supplier; and (2) for training such Key Employee’s replacement at
Supplier’s sole expense. 
  

	 	6.3	Client’s Replacement of Key Employee. 

  
 Client may require Supplier to remove any individual Key Employee immediately for any non-discriminatory reason, provided, however, that Section 5.5 shall not
apply if the Key Employee is removed without a reason. 
  

	 	6.4	Supplier’s Special Request For Replacement or Reassignment. 

  

	a.	Client Project Manager Review. 

  
 In the event that Supplier wishes to replace or reassign a Key Employee for reasons other than those listed in Section 5.5 below, Supplier may make
a written request to the relevant Client Project Manager. The Client Project Manager will review such requests on a case-by-case basis. 
  

	b.	Review by Representatives of Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party. 

  
 In the event that the Client Project Manager declines Supplier’s request, then Supplier Contracting Party has the right
to request that the issue be considered by representatives nominated by the Client Contracting Party and the Supplier Contracting Party who shall meet to discuss the request. The decision of the Client Contracting Party’s representative
following such meeting shall be final. 
  

	 	6.5	Replacement of Key Employees. 

  
 In the event any Key Employee is reassigned or otherwise removed before his or her service under the Service Agreement is completed, Supplier shall as soon as practicable
assign an appropriate replacement who shall thereafter be designated as a Key Employee. Additionally, upon agreement of the Contract Managers, in appropriate situations, in order to ensure a smooth transition between such Key Employees, Client and
Supplier shall jointly agree (such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld by either Party) upon an appropriate overlap period where both the Key Employee being reassigned or removed and the replacement Key Employee are assigned to support the
Service Contract. Unless otherwise agreed, there shall be an overlap period of thirty (30) days. During such overlap period, Client shall only be responsible for the charges associated with one individual. 
  

	 	6.6	Competitive Business. 

  
 Neither Supplier nor any Supplier Agent shall cause or permit any employee that has been engaged in the provision of Services as a Key Employee or as Dedicated Project
Staff to perform services directly or indirectly for a Direct Client Competitor during the twelve (12) months immediately following the cessation of his or her involvement in the provision of Services to Client without Client’s consent.
Client’s Client Direct Competitors are set forth in Schedule I. 
  

	 	6.7	Movement of Key Employees. 

  
 Supplier shall not without Client’s written consent move more than ten percent (10%) of the Key Employees from Client’s account during a calendar year, except
as a result of the termination or expiration of a Service Agreement or as a result of a written request for reduction of Services. 
  

	7.0	Project Staff. 

  

	 	7.1	Appointment. 

  
 Subject to the terms of this Schedule, Supplier shall appoint and manage the Project Staff. Client reserves the right to review the qualifications of Project Staff providing Services under the Service Agreement, and
to make recommendations regarding placement of such personnel for the benefit of Client. 
  

	 	7.2	Dedicated Project Staff List. 

  
 Within thirty (30) days of the Effective Date of the Service Agreement and twice each calendar year thereafter, Supplier shall, to the extent permitted under applicable
laws and regulations, provide Client, upon Client’s written request, with a list of the “Dedicated Project Staff” and, if not dedicated full-time, the percentage of time that the individual is working on Client’s account
during the sixty day period prior to the date of such list. The Dedicated Project Staff will be set forth in Exhibit E-3 to this Schedule E. 
  

	 	7.3	Access to Client Site. 

  
 Client, in its sole discretion, shall approve all members of the Project Staff or other Supplier employees requiring access to any Client Site. Supplier shall notify
Client as soon as reasonably practicable, but no later than two (2) business days, after dismissing or reassigning any of the Project Staff whose normal work location is at a Client Site. 
  

	 	7.4	Movement of Dedicated Project Staff. 

  
 Supplier shall not without Client’s written consent move more than ten percent (10%) of the Dedicated Project Staff from Client’s account during a calendar
year, except as a result of the termination or expiration of a Service Agreement or as a result of a written request for reduction of Services. 
  

	 	7.5	Removal and Replacements. 

  
 In the event that Client notified Supplier that it wishes Supplier to replace a member of the Project Staff, Client and Supplier shall meet to attempt to resolve
Client’s concerns. If Client and Supplier are not able to resolve Client’s concerns within ten (10) days after Client’s notice to Supplier (or such later date agreed upon by Client and Supplier), Supplier shall replace the member of
the Project Staff. Supplier shall make a commercially reasonable effort to honor Client’s requests to replace any Project Staff. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Client may require Supplier to replace any Project Staff immediately for any
non-discriminatory reasons, provided, however, that Section 6.6 shall not apply if the Project Staff is removed without a reason. 
  

	 	7.6	Replacement of Dedicated Project Staff. 

  
 In the event any member of the Dedicated Project Staff is reassigned or otherwise removed before his or her service under the Service Agreement is completed, Supplier
shall as soon as practicable assign an appropriate replacement who shall thereafter be designated as a member of the Dedicated Project Staff. Additionally, upon agreement of the Contract Managers, in appropriate situations, in order to ensure a
smooth transition between members of the Dedicated Project Staff, Client and Supplier shall jointly agree (such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld by either Party) upon an appropriate overlap period where both the member of the Dedicated
Project Staff being reassigned or removed and the replacement member of the Dedicated Project Staff are assigned to support the Service Contract. Unless otherwise agreed, there shall be an overlap period of thirty (30) days. During such overlap
period, Client shall only be responsible for the charges associated with one individual. 
  

	 	7.7	Time Period for Reassignment of Dedicated Project Staff. 

  
 Subject to the provisions of the Service Agreement and in cases as set out in Sections 5.2(1) to (3) Supplier shall not reassign any member of the Dedicated
Project Staff during a specified period after the Effective Date (or the duration of the Service Agreement if shorter) without Client’s written consent.  
  

	8.0	Supplier Agents. 

  

	 	8.1	Client’s Consent. 

  
 Supplier shall not subcontract any material portion of the Services or all or any material portion of its obligations under the Service Agreement without Client’s
written consent. Client’s consent with respect to any subcontracting shall not relieve Supplier of its responsibility for the performance of any of its obligations under the Service Agreement or constitute Client’s consent to further
subcontracting. 
  

	 	8.2	Supplier’s Responsibilities. 

  
 The Supplier Contracting Party shall retain responsibility for the acts or omissions of all Supplier Agents. The Supplier Contracting Party shall be responsible for all
payments to, and claims by, Supplier Agents relating to performance or nonperformance under the Service Agreement and Supplier Contracting Party shall ensure that Supplier Agents comply with the applicable provisions of the Service Agreement.

  

	 	8.3	Approval for Access. 

  
 Client, in its sole discretion, shall approve all Supplier Agents requiring access to any Client Site. Supplier shall have the right to approve Client Agents requiring access to Supplier Sites, such approval not to be
unreasonably withheld. 
  

	9.0	Conduct of Project Staff. 

  

	 	9.1	Safety Rules and Regulations. 

  
 Supplier shall ensure that all members of the Project Staff or other Supplier employees, while at the Client Sites, shall: (1) comply with the reasonable requests and
standard rules and regulations of Client as notified regarding personal and professional conduct (including the wearing of a particular uniform, identification badge or personal protective equipment and adhering to regulations and general health and
safety practices or procedures) or otherwise generally applicable to such Client Sites; and (2) otherwise conduct themselves in a businesslike manner. 
  

	 	9.2	Security Passes. 

  
 Supplier acknowledges that the Project Staff allowed access to the Client Sites shall require security passes from Client to obtain such access. In no event may members of the Project Staff approve security passes
allowing access to the Client Sites or sign in visitors without Client’s prior approval. 
  

	 	9.3	Access Outside Normal Hours. 

  
 If the Project Staff requires access to the Client Sites outside of normal working hours, Supplier shall request the necessary security clearance from Client and Client
shall not unreasonably withhold such clearance. 
  

	10.0	Access to Supplier Personnel and Resources. 

  
 Upon Client’s request, Supplier shall promptly provide Client with access to Supplier’s specialized technical services, personnel and resources (the
“Specialized Services”) in accordance with Supplier’s standard practices Client shall be treated in the same manner with respect to the Specialized Services as similarly situated customers. 
  

	11.0	Supplier Utilized Persons. 

  
 Supplier shall be solely responsible for all persons engaged or provided by Supplier in performing the Services, for supervision, daily direction and control of the work
by such persons unless stated otherwise in the Service Agreement. 
  

	12.0	Non-Solicitation and No-Hire Covenants. 

  

	 	12.1	Non-Solicitation. 

  
 During the Term of the Service Agreement and for one (1) year thereafter (the “Non-Solicitation Period”), neither Party (without the prior written consent of the other Party) shall solicit (with
knowledge that such solicitation is prohibited by this Section 11.0) for employment or independent contract service any of the other Party’s individual personnel directly engaged in the rendering or receipt of Services. This Section
11.1 shall not apply to a Party’s employees who are no longer in the Party’s employ at least six (6) months prior to the time the other Party hereto solicits them. Furthermore, this Section 11.0 shall not restrict either Party
from generally advertising available positions. 
  

	 	12.2	No-Hire. 

  
 During the Non-Solicitation Period, (1) Client shall not hire or engage as an independent contractor any of the Supplier employees designated in the Service Agreement, and (2) Supplier shall not hire or engage as an
independent contractor any of the Client employees designated in the Service Agreement. Each Party may update its respective list of names from time to time with thirty (30) days prior written notice to the other Party. 
  

	 	12.3	Communication. 

  
 Both Parties shall use good faith and reasonable efforts to communicate, and will maintain consistent internal practices to communicate, the existence and import of this Section 11.0 to applicable employees,
and to resolve in a mutually satisfactory manner any issues that may arise under this Section. 
  

	13.0	Union Agreements and WARN Act. 

  

	 	13.1	Collective Bargaining Agreements. 

  
 Supplier shall provide Client not less than ninety (90) days notice of the expiration of any collective bargaining agreement with unionized Project Personnel if the
expiration of such agreement or any resulting labor dispute could potentially interfere with or disrupt the business or operations of Client or impact Supplier’s ability to timely perform its duties and obligations under the Service Agreement.

  

	 	13.2	WARN Act Compliance. 

  
 Supplier shall comply with the WARN Act with respect to all periods following the Employment Effective Date. Supplier shall not, for a period of sixty (60) days after the Employment Effective Date, cause any of the
Transitioned Employees to suffer “employment loss” as that term is construed pursuant to the WARN Act, if such employment loss could create any liability for Client or its Affiliates, unless Supplier delivers notices under the WARN Act in
a manner and at a time such that Client or Affiliates bear no liability with respect thereto. 
  

	 	13.3	Liability. 

  
 Supplier shall be responsible for any liability, cost, claim, expense, obligation or sanction resulting from the failure to comply with the WARN Act and the regulations thereunder through actions or omissions of
Supplier on or after the Employment Effective Date. Client shall be responsible for any liability, cost, claim, expense, obligation or sanction resulting from the failure to comply with the WARN Act and the regulations thereunder through actions or
omissions of Client.  
  

	 	13.4	Legal Compliance. 

  
 With respect to all Transitioned Employees and other personnel employed by Supplier, Supplier shall be solely responsible for compliance with all laws and regulations governing the employer-employee relationship,
including but not limited to compliance with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, the Americans With Disabilities Act, the Age Discrimination in Employment Act, the Family and Medical Leave Act, the Fair Labor Standards Act, ERISA, and all other
applicable federal, state and local discrimination, civil rights, wage payment and benefit laws, and will hold Client harmless from any liabilities or costs resulting from any failure thereof, whether claim is made against Client directly as an
alleged employer, joint employer, joint venturer, conspirator or otherwise. Supplier shall comply, as applicable, with Executive Order 11246, Executive Order 11375, the Vietnam-Era Veterans’ Readjustment Assistance Act, and any other laws or
regulations requiring affirmative action by government contractors or subcontractors. 
  

  
 Exhibit E - 1

  
 Transitioned Employees 
  

			
	 Transitioned Employees

	 Name

	  	 Client
Employee
 Identification
Number

	 	  	 
	(To be completed during Transition)	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 

  

  
 Exhibit E – 2

  
 Key Employees 
  

			
	 Key Employees

	 Name

	  	 
	 	  	 
	(To be completed during Transition)	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 

  

  
 Exhibit E – 3

  
 Dedicated Project Staff 
  

			
	 Dedicated Project Staff

	 Name

	  	 
	 	  	 
	(To be completed during Transition)	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 
	 	  	 

  

  
 Schedule F 

 
 Benchmarking 
  
 Benchmarking 
  

	a.	From time to time during the Term, but not more frequently than set forth in paragraph b. below, Client may, subject to this Schedule F, engage the services of an independent
third party (a “Benchmarker”) to compare the cost of the Services against the cost of well-managed operations performing services of a similar nature and type, taking into account any unique requirements of Client, to ensure that
Client is obtaining pricing that is competitive with market rates, given the nature, volume and type of Services provided by Supplier under a Service Agreement (“Benchmarking”). Benchmarks shall be performed in a manner so as not to
interfere materially and unnecessarily with Supplier’s ability to perform the Services in accordance with the Service Levels. Supplier shall cooperate fully with Client and the Benchmarker and will provide reasonable access to the Benchmarker
during such effort. 

  

	b.	Starting twelve (12) months from the completion of Transition, Client may elect at any time to have a benchmark study performed for the Services provided under the Service
Agreement. Client may not conduct a benchmark study more frequently than once in any rolling two year period. 

  

	c.	Client will designate and engage the Benchmarker from the list of firms designated on Attachment 1 to this Schedule F. Client and Supplier shall each bear fifty percent (50%)
of all charges, expenses and costs incurred by the Benchmarker in performing the Benchmarking described in this Schedule F. 

  

	d.	Prior to receiving any information from the Parties regarding the Services or the Charges, the Benchmarker shall execute a confidentiality agreement satisfactory to both Supplier
and Client and shall agree in writing to be bound by the confidentiality and security provisions specified in the MSA. It is the intent of the parties that the Benchmarking process be a collaborative process. In this regard, each party shall
cooperate with reasonable requests by the Benchmarker for any information or data related to the Service Agreement to the extent necessary for the Benchmarker to perform the Benchmarking described in this Schedule F; provided, however, in no event
shall Supplier be required to provide the Benchmarker with Supplier cost data or data from other Supplier customers. Client shall cooperate with reasonable requests by the Benchmarker for any information or data related to the Client to the extent
necessary for the Benchmarker to perform the Benchmarking described in this Schedule F. 

  

	e.	The Benchmarker shall perform a price-based benchmark, benchmarking the various blended rates and hourly rates with respect to each of the selected entities in the Representative
Sample as such term is defined below. The Benchmarker shall normalize (taking into account all aspects of the Services being performed by Supplier that are subject to the benchmark) the data used to perform the Benchmarking to accommodate
differences between the volume of services, service location(s), and other relevant factors pertaining to the Service Agreement and those applicable to the entities comprising the Representative Sample. The purpose of such normalization process is
to ensure that the Benchmarker makes appropriate adjustments to all data relating to each of the selected entities in the Representative Sample to account for any and all differences between the Services performed by Supplier and the services
received by the respective entity. For the purposes of Benchmarking: 

  

	 	1.	“Representative Sample” for such Services shall mean a sample of a minimum of five (5) entities by the following process: 

  

	 	(a)	The Benchmarker shall propose at least nine (9) entities chosen for similarity of services as described in (d) above, 

  

	 	(b)	Supplier will have the right to exclude from the Representative Sample up to two (2) of the proposed entities without justification, 

  

	 	(c)	Client will have the right to exclude from the Representative Sample up to two (2) of the proposed entities without justification, 

  

	 	(d)	The Representative Sample will be composed of the remaining entities 

  

	 	2.	“Benchmarked Levels” shall mean the top quartile of rates, for each type of blended rate (U.S. resources, offshore resources, offshore resources deployed onsite,
and any other blended rate class applicable from Schedule C (Charges) attributable to the Benchmarked Services among those entities comprising the Representative Sample. 

  

	f.	The Benchmarker shall meet with the parties and review and explain how each of entities in the Representative Sample matches and does not match the relevant factors of the Service
Agreement and the appropriate normalization approach before a report is produced. 

  

	g.	The Benchmarker shall be directed to deliver the final results of the benchmarking process in a written report (the “Benchmark Results”) to the designated
representatives of the Parties. The Parties shall have thirty (30) days from receipt of the Benchmark Results to review, comment on, and request appropriate changes in the results (the “Benchmark Review Period”). If the Benchmarker
believes that there may be merit to issues raised in response to the Benchmark Results, the Benchmarker shall be given additional time to review the issues raised and any other materials submitted by either Party and to submit a final set of
Benchmark Results, including any revisions to the original Benchmark Results. The revised Benchmark Results (or the original Benchmark Results, if not disputed) shall be final to the extent described below. The report shall be treated as
Confidential Information of each Party. As part of such review and comment process, either Party may request the Benchmarker to provide the data on which its findings are based. 

  

	h.	For each type of blended rate, if the Benchmark Results indicate that the Benchmark Level is not more than five percent (5%) less than the rate under the Agreement for the
Benchmarked Services (the “Benchmark Target”), then no adjustment shall be made hereunder. 

  

	i.	If the Benchmark Results indicate that the Benchmark Target is greater than the Benchmarked Level, then Supplier will provide Client with up to a five percent adjustment in the
charges for the Benchmarked Services depending upon the difference between the Benchmark Target and the Benchmark Level. For example, if the Benchmarked Results indicate that the charges being benchmarked are 7% greater than the Benchmarked Level
(i.e., the Benchmark Target is two percent (2%) greater than the Benchmark Level), then the charges for the Benchmarked Services shall be adjusted by 2%; if the Benchmarked Results indicate that the charges are 12% greater than the Benchmarked Level
(i.e., the Benchmark Target is seven percent (7%) greater than the Benchmark Level), then the charges for the Benchmarked Services shall be adjusted by 5%. In addition to the foregoing, if the adjustments to the Charges would have been greater than
5% but for the limitations set forth above, the Parties will work to reach a commercially reasonable solution that is acceptable to both Parties. If the Parties are unable to reach an agreement, then Client may elect to exercise its right to
terminate for convenience under this Service Agreement and pay Supplier’s fees as set forth in Section 1.1.b. of Schedule L (Termination and Termination Assistance) and wind down expenses, excluding the Termination Charges.

  

	j.	Any changes made to the Charges pursuant to a benchmark process shall take affect thirty (30) days after the final Benchmark Results have been delivered to the parties. No
adjustments to the Charges shall be made for any period prior to thirty (30) days after the Benchmark Results have been delivered to the Parties. 

  

  
 Attachment 1

  

	1.	Gartner Group 

  

	2.	Meta Group 

  

	3.	Compass 

  

  
 Schedule G 

 
 Standards 
  

	1.0	Introduction 

  
 This Schedule defines the mutually agreed software operating environment standards which Supplier will support during the Term. Client retains financial responsibility to ensure all software products are deemed
current in accordance with this Schedule as of the Effective Date or as otherwise mutually agreed by Client and Supplier and set forth in this Service Agreement. 
  

	2.0	Operating Environment Standards 

  
 In the table below, the column marked “As of the Effective Date” lists the operating environment as of the Effective Date. The column marked “Future”
lists the operating environment to which Client and Supplier have agreed to migrate during the Transition Period. 
  

					
	 STANDARDS

	 Operating Environment

	  	 As of the Effective Date

	  	 Future

	 Platforms
	  	 HP
	  	 HP

	 Platforms
	  	 Intel
	  	 Intel

	 Platforms
	  	 SGI
	  	 SGI

	 Platforms
	  	 SUN
	  	 SUN

	 Operating System
	  	 HP Unix
	  	 HP Unix

	 Operating System
	  	 Linux
	  	 Linux

	 Operating System
	  	 MAC
	  	 MAC

	 Operating System
	  	 Mainframe 390 PC
	  	 Mainframe 390 PC

	 Operating System
	  	 NT
	  	 NT

	 Operating System
	  	 NT/Unix
	  	 NT/Unix

	 Operating System
	  	 Red Hat AS 2.1
	  	 Red Hat AS 2.1

	 Operating System
	  	 Red Hat ES 3.0
	  	 Red Hat ES 3.0

	 Operating System
	  	 Red Hat Linux 7.x
	  	 Red Hat Linux 7.x

	 Operating System
	  	 SCO Unix
	  	 SCO Unix

	 Operating System
	  	 SGI IRIX
	  	 SGI IRIX

	 Operating System
	  	 Solaris
	  	 Solaris

	 Operating System
	  	 SUN MAC
	  	 SUN MAC

	 Operating System
	  	 Sun Solaris
	  	 Sun Solaris

	 Operating System
	  	 Windows
	  	 Windows

	 Databases
	  	 Binary Files
	  	 Binary Files

	 Databases
	  	 C-tree
	  	 C-tree

	 Databases
	  	 dBase 3
	  	 dBase 3

	 Databases
	  	 FOXPRO
	  	 FOXPRO

	 Databases
	  	 MARC
	  	 MARC

	 Databases
	  	 MS SQL Ser Sybase
	  	 MS SQL Ser Sybase

	 Databases
	  	 MS SQL Server
	  	 MS SQL Server

	 Databases
	  	 MsAccess
	  	 MsAccess

	 Databases
	  	 MySQL
	  	 MySQL

	 Databases
	  	 Open Text
	  	 Open Text

	 Databases
	  	 Oracle
	  	 Oracle

	 Databases
	  	 Oracle + NT Files
	  	 Oracle + NT Files

  

					
	 STANDARDS

	 Operating Environment

	  	 As of the Effective Date

	  	 Future

	 Databases
	  	 Oracle/PLSQL
	  	 Oracle/PLSQL

	 Databases
	  	 Progress
	  	 Progress

	 Databases
	  	 RetrievalWare
	  	 RetrievalWare

	 Databases
	  	 SQL Server
	  	 SQL Server

	 Databases
	  	 ZIM
	  	 ZIM

	 Languages
	  	 ASP
	  	 ASP

	 Languages
	  	 Awk
	  	 Awk

	 Languages
	  	 Borland C++
	  	 Borland C++

	 Languages
	  	 Business Obejects
	  	 Business Obejects

	 Languages
	  	 C
	  	 C

	 Languages
	  	 C++
	  	 C++

	 Languages
	  	 Clipper
	  	 Clipper

	 Languages
	  	 Delphi
	  	 Delphi

	 Languages
	  	 HTML
	  	 HTML

	 Languages
	  	 Informatica
	  	 Informatica

	 Languages
	  	 Java
	  	 Java

	 Languages
	  	 MsExcel
	  	 MsExcel

	 Languages
	  	 Pascal (Delphi)
	  	 Pascal (Delphi)

	 Languages
	  	 Perl
	  	 Perl

	 Languages
	  	 PL/SQL
	  	 PL/SQL

	 Languages
	  	 Powerbuilder
	  	 Powerbuilder

	 Languages
	  	 Pro-C
	  	 Pro-C

	 Languages
	  	 SGML FOSI
	  	 SGML FOSI

	 Languages
	  	 SQL
	  	 SQL

	 Languages
	  	 Tcl/Tk
	  	 Tcl/Tk

	 Languages
	  	 Unix Script
	  	 Unix Script

	 Languages
	  	 VB
	  	 VB

	 Languages
	  	 Vendor Proprietary
	  	 Vendor Proprietary

	 Languages
	  	 Visual C++
	  	 Visual C++

	 Languages
	  	 XML
	  	 XML

	 Other
	  	 Addict (Spell Checker).
	  	 Addict (Spell Checker).

	 Other
	  	 Apache/Linux
	  	 Apache/Linux

	 Other
	  	 Arbortext
	  	 Arbortext

	 Other
	  	 Berkley BSD
	  	 Berkley BSD

	 Other
	  	 Caravan Web
	  	 Caravan Web

	 Other
	  	 CodeBase
	  	 CodeBase

	 Other
	  	 Comshare GEAC
	  	 Comshare GEAC

	 Other
	  	 Cybersource
	  	 Cybersource

	 Other
	  	 Freeware ftp graphic upload tool
	  	 Freeware ftp graphic upload tool

	 Other
	  	 HTML/HGEN
	  	 HTML/HGEN

	 Other
	  	 ICENI GEMINE
	  	 ICENI GEMINE

	 Other
	  	 Idene Argus
	  	 Idene Argus

	 Other
	  	 Interactive Tools (Te1t editor & Spell Checker ).
	  	 Interactive Tools (Te1t editor & Spell Checker ).

	 Other
	  	 JDE
	  	 JDE

	 Other
	  	 Lead Tools (for Graphics).
	  	 Lead Tools (for Graphics).

	 Other
	  	 LEX/YACC
	  	 LEX/YACC

  

					
	 STANDARDS

	 Operating Environment

	  	 As of the Effective Date

	  	 Future

	 Other
	  	 Mason Template
	  	 Mason Template

	 Other
	  	 MS Index Server
	  	 MS Index Server

	 Other
	  	 Orpheus by Turbo Power (Te1t editor).
	  	 Orpheus by Turbo Power (Te1t editor).

	 Other
	  	 Peoplesoft
	  	 Peoplesoft

	 Other
	  	 Progress Forms
	  	 Progress Forms

	 Other
	  	 Python
	  	 Python

	 Other
	  	 Report Builder Pro, Quick Reports.
	  	 Report Builder Pro, Quick Reports.

	 Other
	  	 Seibel
	  	 Seibel

	 Other
	  	 SGML
	  	 SGML

	 Other
	  	 Spellex
	  	 Spellex

	 Other
	  	 TRACKWISE
	  	 TRACKWISE

	 Other
	  	 UDML
	  	 UDML

	 Other
	  	 UI Templating
	  	 UI Templating

	 Other
	  	 WebStationOne,
	  	 WebStationOne,

  

  
 Schedule H 

 
 Governance 
  

  
 Table of Contents

  

					
	 1.0
	  	 Service Description
	  	3
	 1.1
	  	 Overview and Purpose
	  	3
	 1.2
	  	 Major Functions
	  	3
	 1.3
	  	 Desired Results
	  	4
	 1.4
	  	 Process Activities
	  	5
			
	 2.0
	  	 Governance Responsibility Matrix
	  	7
			
	 3.0
	  	 Escalations and Notification
	  	11
	 3.1
	  	 Escalations
	  	11
	 3.2
	  	 Notification Policy
	  	11
			
	 4.0
	  	 Additional Information
	  	11

  

	1.0	Service Description 

  

	1.1	Overview and Purpose 

  
 Governance is the structured approach by which Client and Supplier agree to manage the outsourcing relationship. The purpose of governance is to provide a mutually understood and mutually adopted management model
which allows services to be delivered in a responsive and cost-effective manner, while minimizing problems and risk. 
  
 Client and Supplier agree that the governance model includes the methods and processes by which Client and the Supplier will establish goals and desired outcomes, track
and measure performance, surface problems and resolve them, and monitor that results are delivered according to expectations. It further includes the organizational structure, positions, roles and responsibilities, and accountabilities which are
established to execute that methodology. 
  
 Governance includes the performance
of duties by three key roles: the Executive Committee, Supplier’s Contract Manager and Client’s Contract Manager. The Executive Committee will conduct annual planning meetings and will also meet to resolve problems that have been escalated
by the Supplier’s Contract Manager and the Client’s Contract Manager. The Supplier’s Contract Manager and Client’s Contract Manager will act as the Single Points of Contact (SPOC) in their respective organizations. They will
review Service Levels on a monthly basis and be responsible for resolving all issues and problems that cannot be handled by the normal problem management process. A Policy and Procedures Manual, which will be jointly developed by Client and Supplier
during the Transition Phase of this engagement, will set forth the normal processes by which Client end users and Supplier service providers will agree on services to be performed, make changes to requirements, monitor progress and results, and
resolve problems. 
  
 Supplier is responsible for recommending standards,
processes and technology for Client’s approval, for the Services provided. Supplier is also responsible for performing and managing the Services at the stated levels of service described in Schedule B (Service Levels), in a cost-effective and
measurable manner in support of Client’s business objectives stated herein. Stipulations stated in this document include, but are not limited to: 
  

	a.	Timely billing of Client’s account; 

  

	b.	Contract change management; 

  

	c.	Performance and status reporting/reviews; 

  

	d.	Incident Management; 

  

	e.	Problem Management; and 

  

	f.	Change Management. 

  
 The scope of service provided by Supplier will be documented and measured against the stated Service Levels set forth in Schedule B, with associated Service Level Credits to be credited to Client. Supplier will create
an environment that, in and of itself, fosters the creation of recommendations that will have a positive impact on the Services provided to Client. Supplier will make recommendations related to improving productivity and Service Levels, achieving
savings, and reducing complexities in processes. 
  
 This document outlines the
working structure of the governance model. It covers roles and responsibilities, relationship management and performance management processes, and communication. Client and Supplier will agree to finalize tactical details of this model during the
Transition period of this engagement. 
  

	1.2	Major Functions 

  
 Listed below, including, without limitation, are the functions and key tasks the Supplier will provide. Further details around each of these functions are defined in the Responsibility Matrix. 
  
 Supplier will: 
  

	a.	Provide an service delivery team; 

  

	b.	Develop and maintain a current Policy and Procedures Manual; 

  

	c.	Conduct and attend regularly scheduled status and review meetings; 

  

	d.	Perform contract change management, if and as required; 

  

	e.	Participate in cooperative strategy and planning sessions; 

  

	f.	Develop, and maintain documentation, status reporting and report management; 

  

	g.	Provide proper billing and invoicing; 

  

	h.	Perform contract management for third parties engaged by the Supplier as applicable to deliver the Services; 

  

	i.	Follow Client’s current procedures related to incident management, change management; problem management, and root cause analysis until the completion of the Policy and
Procedures Manual; 

  

	j.	Follow Client procedures, guidelines for information and physical security; 

  

	k.	Provide auditing access and assistance to Client to be further described in the MSA; 

  

	l.	Conduct annual Client satisfaction survey as set forth in Schedule J; and 

  

	m.	Provide support to Client for mergers, acquisitions and divestitures as described in the Services Agreement and subject to the change management procedure. 

 

	1.3	Desired Results 

  
 Listed below are the results that Client desires from the governance model: 
  

	a.	Both Client and Supplier have a clear understanding of the end-to-end process(es) within which the Services are performed; 

  

	b.	Both Client and Supplier understand the inputs and outputs all along the value chain, and understand where the Services fit into the overall value chain; 

 

	c.	Both Client and Supplier understand what must occur at inbound and outbound hand-offs between the Services and other activities in the value chain; 

  

	d.	Roles and responsibilities have been clearly defined, agreed and documented in the Service Agreement for all activities in the end-to-end process; 

  

	e.	Procedures that identify how Supplier will deliver consistent and high-quality services have been fully documented; 

  

	f.	Client and Supplier have chosen and agreed on appropriate points to monitor performance in the end-to-end process; 

  

	g.	Client receives timely and accurate information regarding Supplier performance via status meetings, status reports and general performance reporting, and the same data is
simultaneously available and looked at by both Client and Supplier in evaluating performance; 

  

	h.	Use of a common, efficient, equitable, and consistent change management process integrates changes across business units, service categories, and process platforms;

  

	i.	Until the Policy and Procedures Manual is completed Supplier will follow Client’s incident, problem, change management and escalation procedures for the reporting and tracking
of incidents by defined priority levels; 

  

	j.	Incidents are resolved in a timely and orderly manner so Client may resume duties as quickly as possible; 

  

	k.	Supplier supports Client during any mergers, acquisitions and divestitures subject to the Service Agreement and the change management procedure; 

  

	l.	There is an implied level of trust that facilitates open data-sharing, and joint responsibility for problem-solving; 

  

	m.	The defined escalation path quickly reaches a joint decision-making body with representatives from both Client and Supplier; and 

  

	n.	Both Client and Supplier are committed to understanding and fixing root causes. 

  
 These desired results represent overarching business objectives which are in addition to specific Service Levels defined in Schedule B to
the Service Agreement. As such, while Supplier will be held accountable for meeting the specific Service Levels set forth in Schedule B, Supplier and Client will collaborate to better enable the Service Levels to advance Client’s business
objectives. If the Service Levels do not advance the business objectives, then Client and Supplier will work together to determine whether or not alternative Service Levels, or alternate work procedures, would be more appropriate. If Client and
Supplier reach such an agreement, then new Service Levels and/or new work procedures will be documented and implemented as set forth in Schedule B. 
  

	1.4	Process Activities 

  
 Listed below are the qualifiers or limitations for this service description. Client requires that these constraints be followed in Supplier’s performance of these services. 
  
 Process Constraints: 
  

	a.	Supplier recognizes that personnel it assigns to provide Services to Client are critical to the successful provision of services. Accordingly, Supplier will assign to the Client
account a qualified Contract Manager who is approved by Client. Supplier’s Contract Manager shall be a Key Employee. 

  

	b.	Client and Supplier agree that all assigned individuals are critical to the successful provision of services. Supplier will assign individuals with the appropriate skill sets
required to support the scope and service levels agreed to by Client. Supplier will replace assigned individuals as provided in Schedule E (Employees and Human Resources) to the Statement of Work. 

  

	c.	Supplier’s Policy and Procedures Manual will contain the documented processes and procedures by which the Supplier will administer Client’s account. This manual will
contain processes and procedures such as, but not limited to, Incident Management, Change Management, Project Management, and Reporting. Supplier will assign version numbers to each procedure and document the date(s) on which any procedures were
changed by mutual consent with Client. This manual will be developed during the Transition Phase of this engagement, and will be thereafter attached as an Appendix to this Schedule H. 

  

	d.	Except for emergency changes, Supplier will perform only those changes submitted in writing and approved by Client’s Contract Manager and the Supplier Contract Manager.
Supplier will perform every approved change, as scheduled, for Client unless requested by Client’s Contract Manager to cancel or reschedule the change. If, in the implementation of an approved change, Supplier recognizes the need to perform
additional work not documented in the approved change request, Supplier will first amend the change request and obtain written or verbal approval from Client’s Contract Manager and reschedule the change, if necessary, before initiating
additional work. Supplier will promptly notify Client of any emergency changes. All changes are subject to the Change Control Procedures set for the Policy and Procedures Manual. 

  

	e.	Client reserves the right to escalate the priority level of an incident. The incident escalation will be in writing, detailing the business reason for the escalation. All
escalations will be reviewed by the Supplier Contract Manager prior to the escalation. Client will take this action if Supplier has been unable to solve an incident in a reasonable amount of time or if the incident has started to cause a greater
negative impact on Client’s users than when first reported. Also, Client may escalate the priority level of an incident in the event it has sufficient business reasons to effect the escalation. Client will expect Supplier to react to the
escalation by providing the appropriate amount of attention and resources to resolve the incident in accordance with the Service Level associated with the revised incident priority level. 

  

	f.	Any requested services outside the scope of the Service Agreement will not be included in the overall calculation of performance for agreed-to Service Levels.

  

	g.	Client reserves the right to request supporting data from Supplier regarding Service Level measurement data for auditing purposes. Supplier will provide such requested data within
five (5) days of request. Supplier will support one audit per year. Audit assistance that requires additional resources will be provided as a new service subject to the change management process. 

  

	h.	Client reserves the right to issue any out-of-scope project for competitive bid among multiple other vendors and will include the supplier in all competitive bids.

  

	i.	An out-of-scope project is defined as “a non-operational task (or function) not included as part of the Service Description, with defined start and end dates and specific
functions.” Supplier will use its project management methodology to manage both in-scope and out-of-scope projects. 

  

	j.	Out-of-scope projects which have been approved by the Client Contract Manager will be billed on a separate invoice or as a separate line item on the monthly invoice.

  

	k.	Supplier will submit for review and prior written approval from Client’s Contract Manager any and all billable work Supplier performs outside the scope of the Services and not
included in any monthly fees. Written approval [from the Client Contract Manager will be obtained before work is performed and subsequently invoiced. 

  

	l.	Supplier will respond to Client in writing within one (1) week regarding any documented agreement disputes. 

  

	m.	Both Client and Supplier will create and provide representation to an Executive Committee. The “Executive Committee”, comprised of seven (7) members, with four (4)
members being appointed and replaced by Client and three (3) members being appointed and replaced by Supplier. Each Party’s Contract Manager shall be one of the designated members to the Executive Committee. The chairperson of the Executive
Committee shall be appointed by Client. A Party’s representatives to the Executive Committee shall serve at the discretion of such Party and may be replaced at any time by such Party. Each member of the Executive Committee shall have one vote
on the Executive Committee. The Parties may subsequently agree to change the size of the Executive Committee, as appropriate to meet the needs of the Parties in managing the joint efforts under the Service Agreement. The Executive Committee shall
determine the frequency of its meetings and how such meetings will be conducted. Whenever any action by the Executive Committee is called for hereunder during a time period in which the Executive Committee is not scheduled to meet, a representative
of either Party may cause the Executive Committee to take the action in the requested time period by calling a special meeting or written agreement to take such by action without a meeting. The proceedings of all meetings of the Executive Committee
shall be summarized in writing and sent to both Parties. Supplier shall be responsible for the preparation and circulation of such summaries. Draft summaries shall be issued in final form only upon approval by the Executive Committee at a subsequent
meeting or as evidenced by the signature of a majority of the representatives of the Executive Committee. Each Party shall bear all expenses of their respective Executive Committee representatives related to their participation on the Executive
Committee and attendance at Executive Committee meetings. All decisions of the Executive Committee shall be by majority vote. In addition, the Executive Committee will resolve operational disputes that cannot be resolved by Client’s Contract
Manager and Supplier’s Contract Manager. 

  

	n.	Supplier will create, maintain and provide an annual plan that will outline the major activities that it will perform in the coming year. At the direction of the Executive
Committee, Supplier shall update such plan to reflect changes approved by the Executive Committee. 

  

	o.	Supplier will support Client’s environment resulting from a merger, acquisition or divestiture. The appropriate project change control process will be used in the event
additional resources and/or costs are required for this support. 

  

	2.0	Governance Responsibility Matrix 

  
 The Responsibility Matrix indicates the party ultimately responsible for the listed task. Ticks in both columns indicate a shared responsibility or combined effort
between both parties. It is not the intent of any Responsibility Matrix to absolutely define every process, activity or task performed as a contracted function. Responsibility Matrix, roles and responsibilities will be finalized during the
Transition phase. 
  

							
	 	 	 Governance

	  	Supplier

	  	Client

	 	 	 Supplier Account Team
	  	 	  	 
	 1.
	 	Designate dedicated Contract Manager.	  	ü	  	ü
	 2.
	 	Approve Supplier Contract Manager.	  	 	  	ü
	 3.
	 	Assign account team.	  	ü	  	 
	 4.
	 	Manage account team.	  	ü	  	 
	 5.
	 	Adequately train account team and review team performance.	  	ü	  	 
	 6.
	 	Implement corrective actions relating to team performance, as necessary.	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Policy and Procedures Manual
	  	 	  	 
	 7.
	 	Develop, maintain and make available to Client a Policy and Procedures Manual for the processes that are in-scope for this engagement.	  	ü	  	 
	 8.
	 	Review Policy and Procedures Manual.	  	 	  	ü
	 9.
	 	Propose changes to procedures.	  	 	  	ü
	 10.
	 	Amend Policy and Procedures Manual based upon mutual agreement.	  	ü	  	 
	 11.
	 	Approve Policy and Procedures Manual.	  	 	  	ü
				
	 	 	 Status Meetings and Reporting
	  	 	  	 
	 12.
	 	Propose status-meeting schedule.	  	ü	  	 
	 13.
	 	Approve status-meeting schedule.	  	 	  	ü
	 14.
	 	Conduct status meetings.	  	ü	  	ü
	 15.
	 	Participate in status meetings.	  	ü	  	ü
	 16.
	 	Prepare and distribute project status and service performance report for status meetings.	  	ü	  	 
	 17.
	 	Review, discuss and analyze the status and service performance report.	  	ü	  	ü
	 18.
	 	Identify areas for improvement.	  	ü	  	ü
	 19.
	 	Approve changes to project status and service performance reports, as needed.	  	 	  	ü
	 20.
	 	Provide a plan for the implementation of action items from the status review meetings during the next scheduled status review meeting.	  	ü	  	 
	 21.
	 	Approve the plan for implementation of action items from the status review meeting	  	 	  	ü
	 22.
	 	Complete agreed action items in plan from the status review meeting	  	ü	  	ü
	 23.
	 	Request Service Level performance and activity reports, as needed.	  	 	  	ü
	 24.
	 	Audit Service Level performance and activity reports, as needed.	  	 	  	ü
	 25.
	 	Negotiate new and/or renew agreements of Service Levels.	  	ü	  	ü
	 26.
	 	Perform in order to enable compliance with agreed-upon Service Levels.	  	ü	  	ü
	 27.
	 	Adhere to Client’s safety and security policies when onsite at any Client facility.	  	ü	  	ü

  

							
	 	 	 Governance

	  	Supplier

	  	Client

	 28.
	 	Prepare quarterly management briefing for Service Level results.	  	ü	  	 
	 29.
	 	Conduct quarterly management review meeting.	  	ü	  	ü
	 30.
	 	Attend quarterly management review.	  	ü	  	ü
	 31.
	 	Implement action items resulting from, and agreed to, during quarterly management review meeting.	  	ü	  	 
	 32.
	 	Approve new or changes to Service Level/performance reports as needed.	  	 	  	ü
	 33.
	 	Manage consequences (e.g., failure to meet Service Levels) resulting from quarterly management review.	  	ü	  	ü
	 34.
	 	Prepare and distribute an overview of activity plans as a result of quarterly management meetings.	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Contract Change Management
	  	 	  	 
	 35.
	 	Propose contract changes (including additions or changes to Service Levels).	  	ü	  	ü
	 36.
	 	Review proposed contract changes.	  	ü	  	ü
	 37.
	 	Agree to contract changes.	  	ü	  	ü
	 38.
	 	Refer contract change agreements to the Executive Committee for review and approval.	  	ü	  	ü
	 39.
	 	Escalate contract disputes to the Executive Committee.	  	ü	  	ü
				
	 	 	 Strategy and Planning
	  	 	  	 
	 40.
	 	Prepare an annual plan.	  	ü	  	 
	 41.
	 	Provide input into annual plan.	  	 	  	ü
	 42.
	 	Modify annual plan as necessary.	  	ü	  	 
	 43.
	 	Publish annual plan.	  	ü	  	 
	 44.
	 	Execute annual plan.	  	ü	  	 
	 45.
	 	Review progress against annual plan during quarterly management review meeting.	  	ü	  	ü
	 46.
	 	Communicate business requirements to the Supplier.	  	 	  	ü
	 47.
	 	Understand and document Client’s business requirements.	  	 	  	ü
	 48.
	 	Set standards, architecture and design.	  	ü	  	ü
	 49.
	 	Assist with direction setting and updating of standards.	  	ü	  	 
	 50.
	 	Recommend standards.	  	ü	  	 
	 51.
	 	Approve standards.	  	 	  	ü
	 52.
	 	Document any exceptions to standards.	  	ü	  	 
	 53.
	 	Test the compatibility of new standards and exceptions with the existing infrastructure.	  	ü	  	 
	 54.
	 	Research emerging technology and propose effective solutions.	  	ü	  	ü
	 55.
	 	Identify areas for improvement and communicate to Client.	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Report Management
	  	 	  	 
	 56.
	 	Identify reporting requirements.	  	 	  	ü
	 57.
	 	Develop sample reports.	  	ü	  	 
	 58.
	 	Approve sample reports.	  	 	  	ü

  

							
	 	 	 Governance

	  	Supplier

	  	Client

	59.	 	Develop a report schedule including the frequency of report production, the number of copies of each report to be produced and the report distribution list.	  	ü	  	ü
	 60.
	 	Produce and deliver reports in accordance with the report schedule.	  	ü	  	 
	 61.
	 	Review reports and follow-up with Supplier, if necessary.	  	 	  	ü
	 62.
	 	Correct erroneous reports.	  	ü	  	 
	 63.
	 	Reproduce reports, if necessary.	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Billing
	  	 	  	 
	 64.
	 	Produce and distribute a monthly invoice for services provided for the previous month on or about the fifth (5th) working day of every month.	  	ü	  	 
	 65.
	 	Provide an invoice that meets Client’s accounting and financial practices.	  	ü	  	 
	 66.
	 	Approve the invoice format.	  	 	  	ü
	 67.
	 	Investigate and respond to requests for clarification, as required.	  	ü	  	 
	 68.
	 	Escalate billing disputes to the Executive Committee.	  	ü	  	ü
	 69.
	 	Submit any invoice changes to Client’s Contract Manager within two (2) weeks of invoice being submitted to Client.	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Change Management
	  	 	  	 
	 70.
	 	Include Change Management procedures in Policy and Procedures Manual.	  	ü	  	 
	 71.
	 	Manage all changes in accordance with approved Change Management procedures.	  	ü	  	ü
	 72.
	 	Request changes.	  	 	  	ü
	 73.
	 	Log and track all changes.	  	ü	  	 
	 74.
	 	Determine if change is billable.	  	ü	  	ü
	 75.
	 	Approve changes.	  	 	  	ü
	 76.
	 	Schedule change implementation.	  	ü	  	 
	 77.
	 	Implement changes.	  	ü	  	ü
	 78.
	 	Sign off change when a change has been successfully implemented.	  	 	  	ü
	 79.
	 	Produce and distribute change status reports.	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Incident Management
	  	 	  	 
	 80.
	 	Include Incident Management procedures in Policy and Procedures Manual.	  	ü	  	 
	 81.
	 	Manage all incidents in accordance with approved Incident Management procedures.	  	ü	  	ü
	 82.
	 	Identify incidents.	  	ü	  	ü
	 83.
	 	Assume responsibility for resolving all in-scope incidents.	  	ü	  	 
	 84.
	 	Log and track all incidents (for all in scope applications).	  	ü	  	 
	 85.
	 	Track incidents and participate in resolution.	  	ü	  	 
	 86.
	 	Confirm resolution of all incidents.	  	 	  	ü
	 87.
	 	Produce and distribute incident status reports.	  	ü	  	 
	 88.
	 	Analyze results of monthly reports and historical trends.	  	ü	  	 
	 89.
	 	Identify areas for improvement.	  	ü	  	 
	 90.
	 	Approve new or changes to services, as needed.	  	 	  	ü

  

							
	 	 	 Governance

	  	Supplier

	  	Client

				
	 	 	 Project Management for In-and Out-Of-Scope Work
	  	 	  	 
	 91.
	 	Include Project Management procedures in Policy and Procedures Manual.	  	ü	  	 
	 92.
	 	Manage all projects in accordance with approved Project Management procedures.	  	ü	  	ü
	 93.
	 	Initiate project request.	  	 	  	ü
	 94.
	 	Log and track all projects.	  	ü	  	 
	 95.
	 	Review project requests and recommend options.	  	ü	  	 
	 96.
	 	Develop project cost and time estimates.	  	ü	  	 
	 97.
	 	Approve project.	  	 	  	ü
	 98.
	 	Create project plan.	  	ü	  	 
	 99.
	 	Implement project.	  	ü	  	 
	 100.
	 	Sign off project when project has been successfully implemented.	  	 	  	ü
	 101.
	 	Produce and distribute project status reports.	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Client Procedures
	  	 	  	 
	 102.
	 	Provide Client procedures (such as, but not limited to: asset management, procurement, and information security) to Supplier.	  	 	  	ü
	 103.
	 	Receive and review Client procedures.	  	ü	  	 
	 104.
	 	Request clarifications of Client procedures if necessary.	  	ü	  	 
	 105.
	 	Provide clarifications of Client procedures if requested by Supplier.	  	 	  	ü
	 106.
	 	Adhere to and enforce adherence to Client procedures.	  	ü	  	ü
				
	 	 	 Auditing Support
	  	 	  	 
	 107.
	 	Develop and maintain auditing support procedures. (New Service work request)	  	ü	  	 
	 108.
	 	Approve auditing support procedures.	  	 	  	ü
	 109.
	 	Notify Supplier of intent to perform an audit.	  	 	  	ü
	 110.
	 	Perform the audit.	  	 	  	ü
	 111.
	 	Assist in the performance of the audit in accordance with auditing support procedures. (New Service work request)	  	ü	  	 
				
	 	 	 Merger, Acquisition and Divestitures
	  	 	  	 
	 112.
	 	Provide scalability of services to support mergers, acquisitions or divestitures.	  	ü	  	 
	 113.
	 	Develop business specifications as a result of a merger, acquisition or divestiture.	  	 	  	ü
	 114.
	 	Develop technology integration and process integration plan to support a merger, acquisition or divestiture. (New Service work request)	  	ü	  	 
	 115.
	 	Approve technology integration plan.	  	 	  	ü
	 116.
	 	Deliver services according to business and technology plan.	  	ü	  	 

  

	3.0	Escalations and Notification 

  
 Supplier shall provide a detailed escalation process and notification policy in regard to the Services provided. 
  

	3.1	Escalations 

  
 Escalation procedures assist Supplier in devoting management attention to incident areas consistent with the impact of those incidents. Each outstanding incident will be categorized with a priority level, and will be
assigned the appropriate level of resources consistent with its impact. Supplier will clarify the incident and communicate action plans to Client within a timeframe appropriate to the priority of the pending incident. Incident priority and
escalation will be defined during the Transition period. 
  

	3.2	Notification Policy 

  
 The objective of the notification policy is to inform key Client and Supplier staff and management about an incident that has affected Service availability or performance. A notification will be sent out by Supplier
to a pre-defined distribution list based on the incident priority. 
  

	a.	The notification will inform affected staff and management of one of the following: 

  

	 	1.	An incident with high priority has caused a service outage 

  

	 	2.	The service has been recovered and is available 

  

	b.	Contact Methods include but are not limited to the following: 

  

	 	1.	E-mail 

  

	 	2.	Pager 

  

	 	3.	Phone Call 

  

	 	4.	Warm Hand Off 

  

	 	5.	All of the above 

  
 Details of the Notification Policy will be specified in the Policy and Procedure Manual which Supplier and Client will develop during the Transition Phase of this engagement. 
  

	4.0	Additional Information 

  
 Supplier and Client will hold regularly scheduled management meetings to review the success and performance of the services provided by Supplier using telephones, Net
conference, or in person, as mutually agreed by both parties. 
  
 Status meetings
and review of service: 
  

	a.	Daily 

  

	b.	Monthly 

  

	c.	Quarterly 

  
 Details will be defined during the Transition period. 
  

  
 Schedule I 

 
 Client Direct Competitors 
  

	1.0	Introduction 

  
 This Schedule lists the Client Direct Competitors. 
  

	2.0	Client Direct Competitors 

  

					
	 	 	 Client Direct Competitors
	 	 
	 	 	ARI Network Services Inc	 	 
	 	 	Automatic Data Processing Inc	 	 
	 	 	Bright Horizons	 	 
	 	 	CCC	 	 
	 	 	EBSCO	 	 
	 	 	Enigma	 	 
	 	 	ExLibris	 	 
	 	 	Google Inc	 	 
	 	 	Infomedia Ltd	 	 
	 	 	John Wiley	 	 
	 	 	LeapFrog	 	 
	 	 	Lexis Nexis	 	 
	 	 	McGraw-Hill	 	 
	 	 	Pearson PLC	 	 
	 	 	Renaissance Learning	 	 
	 	 	Reynolds and Reynolds Co.	 	 
	 	 	Scholastic	 	 
	 	 	The Thompson Learning Segment of The Thomson Corporation of which The Gale Group is a member.	 	 
	 	 	Universal Computer Systems	 	 
	 	 	West	 	 
	 	 	Yahoo! Inc	 	 
			
	 	 	 Proprietary Electronic Parts Catalogs of:
	 	 
	 	 	Daimler Chrysler	 	 
	 	 	Harley Davidson	 	 
	 	 	Honda Motor Company	 	 

  

  
 Schedule J 

 
 Customer Satisfaction 
  
 (This Schedule J will be completed during the Transition Period) 
  

  
 Schedule K 

 
 In-Flight Projects 
  
 This Schedule sets forth the In-flight Projects. The Parties agree that the scheduled start
and end dates are estimates and will be reviewed and verified during the Migration of each Applications Area and any date changes or removal of an In-Flight Project will be accomplished through the Change Control Process. 
  

											
	Sl number

	  	Projected
FTE

	  	Status

	  	 RFIs/Projects

	  	Start
Month

	  	End
Month

	MSD	  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
						
	1	  	 	  	Completed	  	EDM Sample File Creation Report	  	 	  	 
						
	2	  	 	  	Completed	  	Generic Fields	  	 	  	 
						
	3	  	 	  	Completed	  	Digitization Demo – VG, Norway	  	 	  	 
						
	4	  	 	  	Green	  	Front Page Alternative Mfg Solution	  	04/04	  	10/04
						
	5	  	 	  	Green	  	Upgrade to Oracle 9i	  	07/04	  	10/04
						
	6	  	 	  	Green	  	Replace Oracle Servers (RePOS 2k4)	  	07/04	  	09/04
						
	7	  	 	  	Green	  	Factiva USA Today early Feed	  	04/04	  	09/04
						
	8	  	 	  	Green	  	OxResearch reload gen flds	  	07/04	  	 
						
	9	  	 	  	Green	  	Author Profiles (ContentScan)	  	04/04	  	07/04
						
	10	  	 	  	Green	  	Tier 3 Newspapers (HNP-FPK (full page image, keyword highlight))	  	06/04	  	01/05
						
	11	  	 	  	Green	  	EIU Viewswires	  	04/04	  	09/04
						
	12	  	 	  	Green	  	CO QA Storage	  	06/04	  	09/04
						
	13	  	 	  	Green	  	Varying embargo content rights (internal & external)	  	10/04	  	02/05
						
	14	  	 	  	Green	  	Decomission ADM System	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	15	  	 	  	Green	  	TLS	  	04/04	  	10/04
						
	16	  	 	  	Green	  	Addition of metadata from Xanedu to ABI subsets	  	10/04	  	02/05
						
	17	  	 	  	Green	  	Migrate old VBOS to ODS	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	18	  	 	  	Green	  	Extend life of VBOS until ODS Ph2 implementation	  	06/04	  	02/05
						
	19	  	 	  	Green	  	Consolidate Manufacturing Pipelines	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	20	  	 	  	Green	  	Hoover’s	  	09/04	  	01/05
						
	21	  	 	  	Green	  	ODS Phase 1	  	04/04	  	10/04
						
	22	  	 	  	Green	  	ODS - Phase 2	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	23	  	 	  	Green	  	Centralized Development User Management	  	10/04	  	12/04
						
	24	  	 	  	Green	  	PsycArticles Reload	  	n/a	  	n/a
						
	25	  	 	  	Green	  	Biomed Phase 3	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	26	  	 	  	Green	  	AOP 72 hour turnaround	  	08/04	  	10/04

  

											
	Sl number

	  	Projected
FTE

	  	Status

	  	 RFIs/Projects

	  	Start
Month

	  	End
Month

	27	  	 	  	Green	  	UME Phase 1	  	04/04	  	10/04
						
	28	  	 	  	Green	  	ProQuest Alerts Feature	  	08/04	  	09/04
						
	29	  	 	  	Green	  	Micromedia VBOS enhancement	  	05/04	  	09/04
						
	30	  	 	  	Green	  	PDF/Quark Decomposition	  	07/04	  	11/04
						
	31	  	 	  	Green	  	Biomed Phase 2	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	32	  	 	  	Green	  	Reloading Snapshots to Generic Fields	  	05/04	  	10/04
						
	33	  	 	  	Green	  	RFI 62 - Implement “Update Start Page” and “Append” transactions	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	34	  	 	  	Green	  	Dissertation Extraction Schedule	  	09/04	  	01/05
						
	35	  	 	  	Green	  	LAT/CT Clubbing	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	36	  	 	  	Green	  	Backfile (NYT & BG)	  	05/04	  	09/04
						
	37	  	 	  	Green	  	Quality Standards (RFI-111)	  	07/04	  	12/04
						
	38	  	 	  	Green	  	APS Ohiolink	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	39	  	 	  	Green	  	CINAHL Reload 2004	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	40	  	 	  	Green	  	PsycInfo Reload 2004	  	04/04	  	10/04
						
	41	  	 	  	Green	  	Operationalize TPD Loading (weekly)	  	07/05	  	01/06
						
	42	  	 	  	Green	  	PsycInfo Reload 2005	  	04/05	  	10/05
						
	43	  	 	  	Green	  	PsycInfo Reload 2006	  	04/06	  	10/06
						
	44	  	 	  	Green	  	CINAHL Reload 2005	  	10/05	  	04/06
						
	45	  	 	  	Green	  	CINAHL Reload 2006	  	10/06	  	03/07
						
	46	  	 	  	Green	  	MIT Sloan Cleanup	  	07/04	  	11/04
						
	47	  	 	  	Green	  	PQDD – Phase 1	  	07/04	  	11/04
						
	48	  	 	  	Green	  	PC Issue Date	  	07/04	  	11/04
						
	49	  	 	  	Joe?	  	COS/EIR - Serials	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	50	  	 	  	Joe?	  	PDF to TIFF converting system	  	04/04	  	09/04
						
	51	  	 	  	Joe?	  	British Library Historical Conversion	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	52	  	 	  	New RFI	  	Historical Magazines Online	  	n/a	  	n/a
						
	53	  	 	  	New RFI	  	Publication Search	  	n/a	  	n/a
						
	54	  	 	  	Red	  	VG, Norway implementation (Place holder for actual implementation of what we Demo’d)	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	55	  	 	  	Red	  	MIT Sloan Mgt Review	  	10/04	  	02/05
						
	56	  	 	  	Red	  	CSA Index / ProQuest Full Text Products	  	10/04	  	02/05
						
	57	  	 	  	Red	  	Encylopedia Britannica	  	10/04	  	02/05
						
	58	  	 	  	Red	  	FTP PQ5000 w/o newspapers (U Toronto)	  	09/04	  	01/05
						
	59	  	 	  	Red	  	MLA Bibliographic Database	  	10/04	  	02/05
						
	60	  	 	  	Red	  	CIS replacement/ New CD-ROM Product/CD+ Conversion	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	61	  	 	  	Red	  	CPM - Phase 2, release 1	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	62	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Chicago Tribune ( find gaps and fill)	  	07/04	  	11/04
						
	63	  	 	  	Yellow	  	WSJ Backfile (find gaps and fill)	  	n/a	  	n/a
						
	64	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Biomed Phase 1	  	07/04	  	11/04

  

											
	Sl number

	  	Projected
FTE

	  	Status

	  	 RFIs/Projects

	  	Start
Month

	  	End
Month

						
	65	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Infrastructure Migration and regression test	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	66	  	 	  	Yellow	  	QA Process	  	04/04	  	01/05
						
	67	  	 	  	Yellow	  	PDF outsourcing (w/ and no metadata)	  	04/04	  	10/04
						
	68	  	 	  	Yellow	  	eFeeds Global Config	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	69	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Operationalize Softline & MM Loads	  	04/04	  	10/04
						
	70	  	 	  	Yellow	  	APS Hit Highlighting	  	04/04	  	09/04
						
	71	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Author Start Page	  	10/04	  	02/05
						
	72	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Reference Linking	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	73	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Workflow Manager	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	74	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Auto-categorization	  	05/04	  	04/05
						
	75	  	 	  	Yellow	  	PQDD – Phase 2	  	09/04	  	02/05
						
	76	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Advanced eFeeds manufacturing and display	  	07/05	  	01/06
						
	77	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Dialog Content Enhancement	  	08/04	  	10/04
						
	78	  	 	  	Yellow	  	UME Phase 3 (includes A&I outsourcing)	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	79	  	 	  	Yellow	  	UME Phase 2	  	07/04	  	04/05
						
	80	  	 	  	Yellow	  	PQSJ CD-ROM Additional 10 Years Images	  	n/a	  	n/a
						
	81	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Repair CBCA and SFLN PQ Content	  	n/a	  	n/a
						
	82	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Expectations Mgt	  	04/04	  	01/05
						
	83	  	 	  	Yellow	  	RFI 62 - Move documents between page collections without changing DOCID	  	10/05	  	04/06
						
	84	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Content Component Controls – never delete	  	10/05	  	04/06
						
	85	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Elsevier	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	86	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Improve efeeds support of CBCA& SFLN merge	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	87	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Move Micromedia to Innodata Stream	  	05/04	  	10/04
						
	88	  	 	  	Yellow	  	Family Therapy Network	  	06/04	  	08/04
					
	SIRS	  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
				
	CD-ROM Products	  	 	  	 	  	 
						
	1	  	 	  	 	  	Researcher Winter 2004	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	2	  	 	  	 	  	Discoverer Spring 2005	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	3	  	 	  	 	  	Researcher Spring 2005	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	4	  	 	  	 	  	Gov Rep Spring 2005	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	5	  	 	  	 	  	Renaissance Spring 2005	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	6	  	 	  	 	  	Discoverer Fall 2005	  	07/05	  	01/06
						
	7	  	 	  	 	  	Researcher Fall 2005	  	07/05	  	01/06
						
	8	  	 	  	 	  	Gov Rep Fall 2005	  	07/05	  	01/06
						
	9	  	 	  	 	  	Renaissance Fall 2005	  	10/05	  	04/06
						
	10	  	 	  	 	  	Researcher Winter 2005	  	n/a	  	n/a
	SIRS Internal	  	 	  	 	  	 
						
	1	  	 	  	 	  	Code Cleanup	  	10/04	  	04/05
		
	SIRS Information Systems	  	 

  

											
	Sl number

	 	Projected
FTE

	 	Status

	  	 RFIs/Projects

	  	Start
Month

	  	End
Month

	1	 	 	 	 	  	ROCS	  	01/05	  	06/05
			
	SIRS Product Enhancements - Committed	  	 	  	 
						
	1	 	 	 	 	  	SIRS/eLibrary Combined Login	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	2	 	 	 	 	  	Portal Customization/Enduring Links	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	3	 	 	 	 	  	Primary Sources	  	04/05	  	10/05
			
	SIRS Product Enhancements - Slotted	  	 	  	 
						
	1	 	 	 	 	  	Bookcart Integration	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	2	 	 	 	 	  	Subject heading Search enhancements - Phase I	  	04/05	  	10/05
						
	3	 	 	 	 	  	Usage stats migration to PQ	  	04/05	  	10/05
						
	4	 	 	 	 	  	eLibrary/SIRS Researcher HWC Tree Matching	  	07/05	  	01/06
						
	5	 	 	 	 	  	Interactive Citizens Search and GUI Revisions	  	07/05	  	01/06
						
	6	 	 	 	 	  	Web Collection Controller	  	10/05	  	04/06
						
	7	 	 	 	 	  	Tabbed Source Delineation Phase II	  	10/05	  	04/06
					
	IS	 	 	 	 	  	 	  	 
						
	1	 	 	 	 	  	BSR Project II - UMI Traditional Products	  	04/04	  	08/04
						
	2	 	 	 	 	  	BSR Traditional Product Maintenance Releases	  	07/04	  	02/05
						
	3	 	 	 	 	  	Electroinic Product Catlog Release	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	4	 	 	 	 	  	Sales Release	  	07/04	  	03/05
						
	5	 	 	 	 	  	BSR Electronic Product Release	  	01/05	  	07/05
			
	S & PD	  	 	  	 
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	 Authentication
	  	 	  	 
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Tier 3 Newspapers	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	eLibrary Bookcart Enhancements	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	eLibrary Usage Monitoring	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Ancestry Library Edition	  	07/04	  	01/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	PQDD Phase 2	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	ODS Phase 2	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	LAT/CT Clubbing	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	CINAHL Reload	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Remaining State Standard Correlations	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	eLibrary CE II	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	eLibrary Timeline for HWC	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Revolutionary War	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Soundex / Wildcard Search	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	TexShare Authentication II	  	10/04	  	04/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	PQDD Phase 3	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Open Access Journals	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Reference Linking	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	eLibrary Platform Enhancements -  Auto categorization	  	01/05	  	07/05

  

											
	Sl number

	 	Projected
FTE

	 	Status

	  	 RFIs/Projects

	  	Start
Month

	  	End
Month

						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Culture Grams World Conflicts	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	eLibrary Science	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	HNP SE – Phase II	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	Freedmans	  	01/05	  	07/05
						
	 	 	 	 	 	  	PERSI FT Linking	  	01/05	  	07/05
			
	HQO	  	 	  	 
						
	1	 	 	 	 	  	Platform Migration #1	  	04/04	  	06/04
						
	2	 	 	 	 	  	Usage Reports	  	04/04	  	06/04
						
	3	 	 	 	 	  	Platform Migration #2	  	04/04	  	09/04
						
	4	 	 	 	 	  	Revolutionary War	  	04/04	  	09/04
						
	5	 	 	 	 	  	Soundex / Wildcard	  	07/04	  	09/04
						
	6	 	 	 	 	  	Ancestry Library Edition ( new )	  	07/04	  	10/04
						
	7	 	 	 	 	  	Freedmans ( form 3Q4)	  	10/04	  	12/04
						
	8	 	 	 	 	  	Revolutionary War ( from 2Q4)	  	10/04	  	03/05
						
	9	 	 	 	 	  	PERSI FT (linking)	  	10/04	  	12/04
						
	10	 	 	 	 	  	Full UI	  	01/05	  	03/05
						
	11	 	 	 	 	  	Cross Search ( form 4Q4)	  	01/05	  	03/05

  

  
 Schedule L 

 
 Termination and Termination Assistance 
  

	1.0	Termination 

  

	1.1	Termination for Convenience. 

  
 Client may, in its sole discretion, terminate the Service Agreement by: 
  

	a.	providing Supplier with a written notice stating Client’s election to terminate the Service Agreement for its convenience (the “Termination Notice Date”) and
the effective date of such termination (the “Termination Date”). Such Termination Date will be: 

  

	 	1.	no earlier than one (1) contract year from the Effective Date; and 

  

	 	2.	no earlier than 120 days, and no later than 18 months, after Supplier’s receipt of such notice; and 

  

	b.	paying Supplier the Termination Charges set forth in Exhibit C-1 of Schedule C and other fees as defined in the Service Agreement (e.g, severance reimbursement set forth in
Section 2.2 of Schedule E (Employees and Human Resources), Termination Assistance), which Supplier and Client agree is Client’s sole and exclusive liability for such termination for convenience. 

  

	1.2	Termination for Change of Control of Supplier. 

  
 In the event of a sale of: (a) all or substantially all of the assets of Supplier; or (b) more than twenty-five percent (25%) of issued voting rights stock of Supplier to
another person or Entity, which in Client’s sole discretion, creates a substantial uncertainty as to Supplier’s continued ability to perform under the MSA or will substantially change the Client-Supplier relationship, Client may terminate
the Service Agreement on at least sixty (60) days notice to Supplier, whereby such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience. 
  

	1.3	Termination for Cause. 

  

	a.	Failure to Perform. 

  
 If either Client or Supplier fails to perform any of its material obligations or breaches any representations under the MSA or this Service Agreement
(except as provided in subsections (b) through (e) below), and such failure is not cured within thirty (30) days after notice is given to the defaulting Party specifying the nature of the default, then the non-defaulting Party may, upon further
notice to the defaulting Party, terminate the Service Agreement as to all or part of the Services, as of the date specified in such notice of termination; provided, however, that, if, the defaulting Party has promptly commenced to cure the default
and if after the defaulting Party’s reasonable efforts such default could not be cured within such thirty (30) day period, the defaulting Party may give notice to the non-defaulting Party by the end of such thirty (30) day period, and the time
to cure a default shall then extend for up to fifteen (15) days from the end of such thirty (30) day period, provided that the defaulting Party continues to use its reasonable efforts to cure such default during the fifteen (15) day period.

  

	b.	Repeated Failure to Perform. 

  
 If either Client or Supplier repeatedly fails to perform any of its obligations or breaches any representations under the MSA or this Service Agreement,
regardless of whether such failures or breaches are cured and where such failures have a material effect, the non-defaulting Party may, upon further notice to the defaulting Party, terminate all or part of the Services as of the date specified in
such notice of termination. 
  

	c.	Service Levels. 

  
 Client may, upon notice to Supplier, terminate all or part of the Services, for the reasons set forth in Schedule B (Service Levels), as of the date
specified in such notice of termination. 
  

	d.	Failure to Complete Transition. 

  
 If Supplier fails to complete the Transition by the deadlines set forth in the Transition Plan, Client may, upon notice to Supplier, terminate all or part
of the Services as of the date specified in such notice of termination. 
  

	1.4	Termination by Electronic Means. 

  
 Supplier shall not use any electronic means including, but not limited to, Illicit Code to enforce termination under the MSA. 
  

	1.5	Other Terminations. 

  
 A Service Agreement may also terminate: (a) to the extent necessary to exercise Client’s benchmarking rights under Schedule F (Benchmarking), and (b) pursuant to Section 16.2 and Section 27.6
of Exhibit B to the MSA. Any termination affected pursuant to these Sections shall not be subject to Section 1.3 above. 
  

	1.6	Effect of Termination. 

  
 In the event of a termination of part of the Services, the Service Agreement shall remain in effect subject to the Change Control Procedures with respect to the Services
still to be provided by Supplier. In the event of a termination of all of the Services pursuant to this Section 1.0, the Service Agreement shall terminate in its entirety. Upon termination of the Service Agreement by Client, Client shall have
no liability for any payments accruing for services performed after the Termination Date except those set forth in Section 2.0 below; provided, however, that Client shall comply with its obligations, if any, relating to the return or
redelivery of any products to Supplier that are covered by the terminated Service Agreement. 
  

	1.7	Rights upon Termination. 

  
 Upon termination or expiration of the Service Agreement, each Party shall forthwith return to the other all papers, materials and properties of the other held by such
Party in accordance with the terms of Article XV of Exhibit B to the MSA and subject to the terms of Article XIII of Exhibit B to the MSA. In addition, each Party will assist the other Party in the orderly termination of the Service
Agreement and the transfer of all items, tangible and intangible, as may be necessary for the orderly, non-disrupted business continuation of each Party. 
  

	2.0	Termination Assistance 

  

	2.1	Termination Assistance Services. 

  
 In the event of the expiration or termination of all or of part of the Services being provided under the Service Agreement, Supplier shall, upon Client’s request,
continue to provide the Services which were provided by Supplier prior thereto and any new services requested by Client that may be required to facilitate the transfer of the affected Services to Client or a third party service provider, as
applicable, or Client’s designee, including, providing to Client or third party personnel training in the performance of the affected Services (collectively, the “Termination Assistance Services”) in accordance
with the following: 
  

	a.	Applicable Requirements and Access. 

  
 At no additional cost, Supplier shall provide to Client and any designated third party service provider: 
  

	 	1.	in writing, to the extent available, applicable requirements, standards, policies, operating procedures and other documentation relating to the affected execution environment of the
Services; and 

  

	 	2.	necessary access to the systems and sites from which the affected Services were provided, subject to the provisions of Article XXI of Exhibit B to the MSA relating to
Client’s review rights. 

  

	b.	Development of Transition Plan. 

  
 If and to the extent requested by Client, Supplier shall assist Client in developing a plan which shall specify the tasks to be performed by the parties
in connection with the Termination Assistance Services and the schedule for the performance of such tasks. 
  

	c.	Termination Assistance Period. 

  
 Supplier shall provide the Termination Assistance Services to Client or its designee (1) commencing upon notice up to six (6) months prior to the
expiration of the Term or on such earlier date as Client may request and continuing for up to twelve (12) months following the effective date of the expiration of the Term, (2) commencing upon any notice of termination (including notice based upon
breach or default by Client) of the Term with respect to all or any part of the Services, and continuing for up to eighteen (18) months following the effective date of such termination (the “Termination Assistance
Period”), as agreed upon by Client and Supplier, including prices no worse to Client than those for comparable services prior to termination, except to the extent that resources included in the Charges otherwise being paid by Client
to Supplier can be used to provide the Termination Assistance Services. 
  

	d.	Service Quality. 

  
 To the extent Client requests Termination Assistance Services, such Services shall be provided subject to and in accordance with the terms and conditions
of the Service Agreement. Supplier shall perform the Termination Assistance Services with at least the same degree of accuracy, quality, completeness, timeliness, responsiveness and resource efficiency as it provided and was required to provide the
same or similar Services during the Term. The quality and level of performance of the Services provided by Supplier following the expiration or termination of the Term with respect to all or part of the Services or Supplier’s receipt of a
notice of termination or non-renewal shall not be degraded or deficient in any respect. 
  

	e.	Post-Termination Assistance Period. 

  
 Following the Termination Assistance Period for a period not to exceed six (6) months thereafter, Supplier shall: (1) answer all reasonable and pertinent
verbal or written questions from Client regarding the Services on an “as needed” basis as agreed upon by Client and Supplier; and (2) deliver to Client any remaining Client-owned reports and documentation still in Supplier’s
possession. 
  

	f.	Third-Party Contracts. 

  
 Upon request from Client to the extent permitted by third party contracts, Supplier shall do the following: 
  

	 	1.	Supplier Hardware. 

  
 Supplier shall make available any Supplier Hardware dedicated to the performance of the affected Services by allowing Client or its designee to (A)
purchase, at Net Book Value, any such Supplier Hardware owned by Supplier; or (B) assume the lease of any such Supplier Hardware leased by Supplier. 
  

	 	2.	Third Party Maintenance and Services Contracts. 

  
 Supplier shall transfer or assign, upon Client’s request, any third party contracts applicable to the affected Services for maintenance, disaster
recovery services or other necessary third party services being used by Supplier and dedicated to the performance of the affected Services, to Client or its designee, on terms and conditions acceptable to all applicable parties. 
  

	 	3.	Software Licenses. 

  
 Supplier shall, subject to the provisions of the Service Agreement, license to Client, or assist Client in obtaining a license to, Software then being
used by Supplier in providing the Services in accordance with the provisions of Article XIII of Exhibit B to the MSA. 
  

	g.	Inventory. 

  
 Supplier shall provide to Client, in the form and with the content requested by Client, inventories of the Hardware and Software used in connection with the provision of the Termination Assistance Services as needed.

  

	h.	Employment of Supplier Employees. 

  
 Upon completion of the Termination Assistance Period and notwithstanding the provisions of Schedule H (Governance) to the Service Agreement, upon request
from Client, Supplier will allow Client to offer employment to and to hire all Supplier employees who have been performing the Services that have been terminated or have expired pursuant to the Service Agreement. 
  

	i.	Absolute Obligation. 

  
 Supplier acknowledges and agrees that it shall have an absolute and unconditional obligation to provide Client with Termination Assistance Services.

  

	2.2	Divested Entities. 

  
 In the event an Entity or unit of Client or the business or part of an Entity or unit of Client is sold or otherwise divested (the “Divested Entity”), Supplier shall, upon Client’s
request, provide all or part of the Services to the Divested Entity (on the basis that the new owner of Divested Entity shall be deemed to fall within the definition of Client Contracting Party for the purposes of the Service Agreement) in
accordance with Section 22.2 of Exhibit B to the MSA, to the extent that the Services will then be provided to such Divested Entity. In addition, Supplier shall provide to the Divested Entity any Termination Assistance Services which may be
requested by the new owner of the Divested Entity. 
  

  
 SERVICE AGREEMENT

 Number
                     
  
 THIS SERVICE AGREEMENT (“Service Agreement”) is effective as of January 01, 2005 (the “Effective Date”) by
and between ProQuest Information and Learning Company, a Delaware corporation, (“Client Contracting Party”), with offices at 300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48106, and International Business Machines Corporation
(“IBM”), a New York corporation, (“Supplier Contracting Party”), with offices at Route 100, Somers, New York 10589. 
  
 RECITALS 
  
 WHEREAS, ProQuest Company and IBM have entered into a Master Services Agreement dated as of January 01, 2005 (the “MSA”);

  
 WHEREAS, in accordance with the MSA, Client Contracting Party
wishes to obtain from Supplier Contracting Party, and Supplier Contracting Party wishes to provide to Client Contracting Party, certain information technology and related services as described in this Service Agreement; and 
  
 WHEREAS, each of Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party
desires that the Terms and Conditions, attached as Exhibit B to the MSA, as modified by this Service Agreement (collectively, the “Terms and Conditions”) be incorporated by reference into this Service Agreement;

  
 NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the covenants and
agreements set forth below and in the MSA, Client Contracting Party and Supplier Contracting Party hereby agree as follows. 
  
 ARTICLE I. 
  
 INTRODUCTORY PROVISIONS 
  
 1.1 Definitions. Terms used in this Service Agreement with initial capital letters shall have the respective meanings set forth herein or, if not set forth herein, in Exhibit A to the MSA, or, if not set
forth in either of the foregoing, in the Statement of Work attached hereto. 
  
 1.2 Exhibits. This Service Agreement hereby incorporates by reference the following exhibits: 
  

			
	 Exhibit 1
	  	 Statement of Work

	 Exhibit 2
	  	 Notices

  
 1.3 Terms and
Conditions. All references in the Service Agreement to the Terms and Conditions shall refer to the Terms and Conditions as modified by the Statement of Work. 
  
 1.4 Hierarchy of Terms. 
  
 (a) Terms and Conditions and Service Agreement. Section 1.2 of the Terms and Conditions sets forth the hierarchy among the
Terms and Conditions and the Service Agreement. 
  
 (b) Body of Service Agreement and Exhibits. In the event of any conflict between the terms of the body of this Service Agreement and the Terms and Conditions, on the one hand, and the terms in any of the exhibits attached hereto, on
the other hand, the terms in the body of this Service Agreement or the Terms and Conditions shall prevail. 
  
 1.5 Cross-References. This Service Agreement may provide parenthetical cross-references to one or more provisions in the Terms and Conditions.
These cross-references are provided for convenience of reference only. 
  

 1.6 Client and Supplier. For purposes of this Service Agreement, unless otherwise expressly set
forth in this Agreement, the term “Supplier” shall mean only Supplier Contracting Party and the term “Client” shall mean only Client Contracting Party. 
  
 ARTICLE II. 
  
 TERM 
  
 2.1 Initial Term. The Initial Term of this Service Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date and shall continue until the later of: (a) the
Expiration Date, and (b) the last date during which Supplier is obligated to provide any Termination Assistance Services. The Expiration Date of this Service Agreement is December 31, 2009. 
  
 2.2 Renewal. This Service Agreement shall automatically be renewed for
a least one (1) successive Renewal Terms, each having a duration of twelve (12) months, unless Client gives written notice to the contrary at least six (6) months before the expiration of the Initial Term or any Renewal Term, however, this provision
shall not apply after the expiration of the last Renewal Term. (See Terms and Conditions, Section 2.2) 
  
 ARTICLE III. 
  
 SERVICES 
  
 3.1 Designated Services. The
Statement of Work describes the Services which Supplier shall provide to Client under this Service Agreement. The following Schedules are incorporated in and made part of the Statement of Work: 
  

					
	 Schedule A
	  	-	  	Client Software
	 Schedule B
	  	-	  	Service Levels
	 Schedule C
	  	-	  	Charges
	 Schedule D
	  	-	  	Transition
	 Schedule E
	  	-	  	Employees and Human Resources
	 Schedule F
	  	-	  	Benchmarking
	 Schedule G
	  	-	  	Standards
	 Schedule H
	  	-	  	Governance
	 Schedule I
	  	-	  	Client Direct Competitors
	 Schedule J
	  	-	  	Customer Satisfaction
	 Schedule K
	  	-	  	In-Flight Projects
	 Schedule L
	  	-	  	Termination and Termination Assistance

  
 3.2 Third Party
Service Providers. Subject to Section 5.1.a. of the Terms and Conditions, Client may, now or in the future, use one or more third-party service providers to provide information technology and related services that relate to, interact
with, or depend upon the Services. Supplier shall provide all reasonable cooperation to Client and such third-party service providers in connection with the provision of such Third Party Services. 
  

  
 ARTICLE IV.

  
 MISCELLANEOUS 
  
 4.1 Notices. All notices, requests, consents and other communications
required or permitted under this Service Agreement shall be addressed as set forth in Exhibit 2. 
  
 4.2 Governing Law. This Service Agreement shall be interpreted in accordance with, and governed by, the laws of the United States of America and
the State of Michigan. Each Party hereby consents to the exclusive jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in the State of Michigan. 
  
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Service Agreement has been executed by the Parties as of the Effective Date. 
  

									
	 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES
 CORPORATION
	 	 	 	 PROQUEST INFORMATION AND LEARNING
 COMPANY

					
	By:	 	 	 	 	 	By:	 	 

									
					
	 (Print):
	 	 	 	 	 	 (Print):
	 	 

									
					
	 Title:
	 	 	 	 	 	 Title:
	 	 

									
					
	 Date:
	 	 	 	 	 	 Date:

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00080-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00080-of-00352.parquet"}]]